Skip to main content

Full text of "Uncle Sam's boys in the Philippines, or, Following the flag against the Moros"

See other formats


NYPL  RESEARCH  LIBRARIES 


3  3433  08234583  0 


**«iM* 
IrtM* 


. 
.,  ->kfWW 

'  ,  <     .    T 


*V^V- 

.'W^.- 

r*K^U*  ,  , 


U<H4tUtf»WW**t1lk*,  ill.  ij^ww^ 
lfaUfc»»»)»^***»^v»i»W-WVW. 


N/\ 


H 


K 


THE  NEW  YORK 

prr,uc  LIBRARY 


AJfT'lK.   LENOX  AND 
TIU>tiA  FOrt:i»AT10NB 

r.  L 


"It  Won't  be  Necessary,  Corporal.' 


Frontispiece. 


Uncle  Sam's  Boys  in 
the  Philippines 


OR 


Following  the  Flag  against  the  Moros 

By 

H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

Author  of  Uncle  Sam's  Boys  in  the  Ranks,  Uncle  Sam's  Boys  on 

Field  Duty,  Uncle  Sam's  Boys  as  Sergeants,  The  Motor  Boat 

Club    Series,   The   Grammar  School   Boys   Series,  The 

High    School   Boys   Series,   The   West   Point 

Series,  The  Annapolis  Series,  The  Young 

Engineers  Series,  etc.,  etc. 


Illustrated 


PHILADELPHIA 

HENRY  ALTEMUS    COMPANY 


COPYRIGHT,  1912,  BY 
HOWARD  E.  ALTEMUS 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.  THE  FILIPINO  DANDY 7 

II.  A  MEETING  AT  THE  NIPA  BARRACKS 26 

III.  PLOTTERS  TRAVEL  WITH  THE  FLAG 42 

IV.  CERVERRA'S  INNOCENT  SHOP 54 

V.  ENOUGH  TO  ' 'RATTLE"  THE  VICTIM 65 

VI.  LIFE  HANGS  ON  A  WORD 70 

VII.  THE  KIND  OF  MAN  WHO  MASTERS  0  :HERS 81 

VIII.  THE  EIGHT  MAN  IN  THE  GUARD  HOUSE 87 

IX.  NEWS  COMES  OF  THE  UPRISING 98 

X.  THE  INSULT  TO  THE  FLAG 112 

XI.  IN  THE  FIRST  BRUSH  WITH  MOROS 124 

XII.  THE  BROWN  MEN  AT  BAY — FOR  How  LONG? 131 

XIII.  A  TALE  OF  MORO  BLACKMAIL 141 

XIV.  THE  CALL  FOR  MIDNIGHT  COURAGE 149 

XV.  IN  A  CLINCH  WITH  COLD  STEEL 161 

XVI.  DATTO  HAKKUT  1  IAKES  A  NEW  MOVE 168 

XVII.  "LONG"  GREEN  AND  KELLY  HAVE  INNINGS 177 

XVIII.  SENTRY  MIGGS  MAKES  A  GRUESOME  FIND 187 

XIX.  HAL  TURNS  THE  GATLING  GUN  LOOSE ]96 

XX.  CORPORAL  DUXBRIDGE  's  MISTAKE 208 

XXI.  SCOUTING  IN  DEADLY  EARNEST 220' 

XXII.  PLAYING  Goo-Goo  IN  A  GRIM  GAME 228 

XXIII.  DOOMING  THE  DATTO 236 

XXIV.  CONCLUSION  246 


Uncle  Sam's  Boys  in  the  Philippines 


CHAPTER  I 

THE    FILIPINO    DANDY 


"TITTE'VE    solved    one    problem    at    last, 
Vy       Noll,"  declared  Sergeant  Hal  Over- 
ton  seriouslv. 

V 

"Only  one?"  demanded  young  Sergeant  Terry 
quizzically. 

But  Hal,  becoming  only  the  more  serious, 
went  on  earnestly: 

"At  last  we  begin  to  understand  just  what 
the  'lure  of  the  Orient'  means !  For  years  I've 
been  reading  about  the  Orient,  and  the  way  that 
this  part  of  the  world  charms  men  and  holds 
them.  Now,  that  we  are  here  on  the  spot,  I 
begin  to  understand  it  all.  Noll,  my  boy,  the 
East  is  a  great  and  wonderful  place !  I  wonder 
if  I  shall  ever  tire  of  it?" 

"I  believe  I  could  tire  of  it  in  time,'  re- 
marked Sergeant  Terry,  of  the  Thirty-fourth 
United  States  Infantry. 

7 


'3  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

"But  you  haven't  yet,"  insisted  Sergeant  Hal. 

"What,  when  we've  been  here  only  three 
days!  Naturally  I  haven't.  And,  besides,  all 
we've  seen  is  Manila,  and  certainly  Manila 
can't  be  more  than  one  little  jumping-off  corner 
of  the  Orient  that  you're  so  enthusiastic  about.' 

"You're  wild  about  the  Far  East,  too — even 
the  one  little  corner  of  it  that  we  've  seen, '  re- 
torted Sergeant  Hal.  "Don't  be  a  grouch  or 
a  knocker,  Noll.  Own  up  that  you  wouldn't 
start  for  the  United  States  to-morrow  if  you 
were  offered  double  pay  back  in  the  home  coun- 
try." 

"No;  I  wouldn't,"  confessed  Sergeant  Terry. 
*•!  want  to  see  a  lot  more  of  these  Philippine 
Islands  before  I  go  back  to  our  own  land. ' 

"Just  halt  where  you  are  and  look  about 
you, ' '  went  on  enthusiastic  Sergeant  Hal.  i  i  Try 
to  picture  this  scene  as  Broadway,  in  New 
York." 

"Or  Main  Street  in  our  own  little  home  city.' 
laughed  Sergeant  Terry  quietly. 

Certainly  the  scene  was  entirely  different 
from  anything  that  the  two  young  Army  boys 
had  ever  seen  before. 

They  stood  on  the  Escolta,  which  is  the  main 
business  thoroughfare  of  New  Manila,  as  that 
portion  of  the  Philippine  capital  north  of  the 
little  river  is  called.  South  of  the  river  is  Old 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  9 

Manila,  the  walled  city  of  the  old  days  of  the 
Spanish  conquerors.  South  of  the  walled  city 
lie  two  rather  fashionable  residence  suburbs, 
Ermita  and  Malate. 

But  the  Thirty-fourth  was  temporarily  sta- 
tioned in  big  nipa  barracks  at  Malate.  It  was 
in  the  newer  Manila  that  the  two  boyish  young 
sergeants  found  their  greatest  interest. 

It  was  a  busy,  bustling  scene.  There  is  noth- 
ing exactly  like  the  Escolta  in  any  other  part 
of  the  world.  The  whole  of  this  crooked,  wind- 
ing thoroughfare  seemed  alive  with  horses  and 
people — with  the  horses  in  more  than  goodly 
proportion. 

Along  the  Escolta  are  the  principal  wholesale 
and  retail  houses  of  the  city.  Here  is  the  post 
office,  there  the  "Botanica'  or  principal  drug 
store,  operating  under  English  capital  and  a 
Spanish  name;  down  near  the  water  front  is 
the  Hotel  de  Paris,  a  place  famous  for  the  good 
dinners  of  the  East  Further  up  the  Escolta, 
just  around  a  slight  bend,  is  the  Oriente  Hotel, 
the  stopping  place  of  Army  officers  and  their 
families,  of  passing  travelers  and  of  civil  em- 
ployees of  the  government. 

At  this  point  along  the  Escolta  are  the  busiest 
marts  of  local  trade.  The  sidewalks  are 
crowded  with  hurrying  throngs;  the  streets 
jammed  with  traffic,  for  in  Manila  few  of  the 


10  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

whites  or  the  wealthier  natives  ever  think  of 
walking  more  than  a  block  or  two.  The  quilez, 
the  little  two-wheeled  car  drawn  by  a  six-hun- 
dred-ponnd  pony,  is  the  common  means  of  get- 
ting about.  A  dollar  in  American  money  will 
charter  one  of  these  quilez  for  hours,  and  the 
heat  renders  it  an  advisable  investment  for  one 
who  has  far  to  go. 

Automobiles  were  scarce,  though  they  had 
penetrated  even  this  congested  Escolta.  Here 
and  there  an  Army  officer  or  orderly  appeared 
on  horseback  in  the  crush  of  the  street.  If  he 
attempted  to  ride  at  a  canter  the  horseman 
seemed  to  be  taking  his  life  in  his  own  hands, 
with  the  chances  all  against  him. 

Save  for  the  lazy  calls  of  drivers — cocheros — 
to  their  horses,  the  hum  of  human  voices  was 
subdued.  In  the  heat  of  the  Escolta  the  people 
of  all  colors  seem  to  have  reached  a  tacit  under- 
standing that  it  requires  less  exertion  to  talk 
in  low  tones. 

White  people  of  both  sexes  appeared,  clad 
usually  in  the  white  attire  so  customary  in  the 
tropics.  Filipino  dandies  affected  the  same 
garbing,  with  the  exception  of  here  and  there 
a  natty,  nervous,  little  brown  man  who  appeared 
in  the  more  formal  black  frock  coat.  But  few, 
even  of  these,  had  the  courage  to  come  out  in 
sun-up  hours  wearing  the  silk  hat  that  is  the 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  11 

usual  accompaniment  of  the  long-tailed  frock 
coat. 

Despite  the  heat,  the  faces  of  most  of  the 
people  in  the  crowded  streets  appeared  cheerful, 
even  happy.  Life  is  not  taken  too  seriously  in 
the  Orient,  The  natives  always  find  plenty  of 
time  for  laughter;  the  stranger  soon  acquires 
the  trick. 

Banks,  stores,  restaurants,  mineral  water 
kiosks — all  the  places  of  resort  along  the  Es- 
colta — were  abundantly  patronized,  yet  none 
save  the  cocheros  perched  up  on  the  little  seats 
of  the  qidlez  appeared  to  be  at  all  in  a  hurry. 

Yet  one  man  in  particular  appeared  to  be 
devoid  of  hurry.  In  fact,  he  paused  or  halted 
whenever  the  two  boyish  young  sergeants  did. 
He  invariably  kept  about  a  hundred  feet  behind 
them  in  this  queerly  bustling  yet  ever  leisurely 
crowd  that  thronged  the  sidewalks  of  the  Es- 
colta. 

While  Hal  and  Noll  were  curiously  noting  the 
fact — that  the  Escolta  seems  always  so  busy, 
but  the  individuals  who  make  up  the  life  there 
seem  never  in  a  hurry — the  man  who  was  plainly 
following  them  never  glanced  at  them  directly, 
yet  never  once  lost  sight  of  them. 

Neither  Hal  nor  Noll  had  yet  noted  the  man, 
about  whom  there  were  some  points  that  would 
have  been  amusing  to  the  American  youngsters. 


12  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

This  man  was  a  Filipino.  At  first  glance  one 
would  have  believed  him  to  be  a  Tagalo,  or  mem- 
ber of  the  most  warlike  and  ambitious  of  all 
the  eighty-odd  tribes  that  make  up  the  peoples 
of  these  islands.  The  Tagalos  are  the  tribe 
most  frequently  found  in  and  around  Manila, 
and  in  the  provinces  nearest  to  that  city.  In 
apearance  the  Tagalos  look  a  good  deal  like 
underfed  Japanese.  It  was  to  the  Tagalos  that 
the  insurrecto  leader,  Aguinaldo,  belonged. 

These  Tagalos,  however,  consider  themselves 
in  every  way  the  equals  and  match  for  any  white 
man.  The  Tagalos  have  absorbed  much  of  the 
Spanish  civilization.  Many  of  them  are  wealthy 
and  the  sons  of  such  families  generally  hold 
degrees  from  Philippine  colleges.  Well-to-do 
Tagalos,  despite  their  undersized  stature  and 
dark-brown  skins,  affect  all  the  culture — and  the 
vices — of  well-to-do  white  people.  They  conduct 
banks,  engage  in  commerce,  mingle  with  white 
society,  and  consider  themselves  as  bright  lights 
of  civilization.  Above  all,  every  Tagalo  takes 
keen  interest  in  politics.  Yet  these  Tagalos,.  up 
to  date,  are  only  veneered  Malays. 

This  Filipino  who  was  so  patiently  following 
Sergeants  Hal  and  Noll  appeared  to  belong  to 
the  well-to-do  class.  Certainly  he  was  an  im- 
maculate dandy.  He  was  about  five  feet  two 
inches  in  height,  and  wore  neat-fitting,  well- 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  13 

tailored  white  duck  garments.  The  blouse  was 
buttoned  down  in  front,  a  military,  braided  white 
collar  standing  up  stiffly,  rendering  the  wearing 
of  a  shirt  unnecessary.  On  his  feet  were  highly 
polished  tan  shoes  of  American  make.  On  his 
head  he  wore  a  jaunty,  straight-brimmed  straw 
hat  of  the  best  native  manufacture.  In  his  right 
hand  this  irreproachable  Filipino  dandy  lightly 
swung  a  feather-weight  bamboo  cane. 

His  eyes  were  dark,  gleaming,  intense — fitted 
either  to  reflect  laughter  or  sharp  anger.  But 
what  rendered  this  man,  who  appeared  to  be 
close  to  thirty-five  years  of  age,  ridiculous  to 
American  eyes  was  his  mustache.  This  was 
blue-black  in  color,  waxed  to  two  fine,  bristling, 
upturned  points — a  fashion  that  this  dandy  had 
undoubtedly  caught  from  some  former  Spanish 
military  officer. 

"They  are  boys — they  will  suit  my  purpose 
excellently, ' '  murmured  the  Filipino  to  himself, 
as  he  halted  before  a  window  where  tropical 
outfittings  for  men  were  attractively  displayed. 
Yet,  though  he  gazed  in  at  the  window,  he  saw 
Sergeants  Hal  and  Noll  out  of  the  corners  of 
his  eyes.  "They  are  young,  ambitious;  they 
are  enlisted  men,  therefore  poor.  Even  in  this 
short  time  these  boys  must  have  learned  the 
craving  for  the  things  that  money  alone  will  buy. 
No  man,  in  the  Orient,  can  escape  that  knowl- 


14  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

edge  and  that  longing  for  money.  That  is  why 
it  is  so  easy  to  buy  men's  souls  here  in  the  East. 
Shall  I  go  up  and  speak  to  them?  But  no!  There 
they  go  into  a  curio  store  where  they  will  find 
much  that  they  may  wish  to  buy.  I  will  follow 
my  young  sergentes  inside  in  five  minutes — or 
ten.  Then  they  will  be  ripe  for  the  man  who 
talks  money.' 

Hal  and  Noll  had  entered  one  of  the  most 
attractive  little  shops  to  be  found  anywhere 
along  the  Escolta.  This  store  is  kept  by  a 
Chinaman,  who  sells  the  more  costly  curios  of 
the  Far  East.  China's  choicest  silks  are  here 
displayed ;  also  her  finest  teakwoods  and  curious 
boxes  and  cabinets  of  sandal  and  other  valued 
woods,  inlaid  with  pearl,  or  studded  with  rare 
jades.  Here  are  wonderful  creations  carved  out 
of  ivory,  idols  of  all  kinds  and  sizes,  of  the 
highest  grades  of  artistic  workmanship.  Here 
are  wonderful  beaded  portieres  and  the  most 
costly  of  curious  Chinese  garments  for  women. 
In  a  word,  the  bazaars  of  China  are  nobly  rep- 
resented on  the  Escolta.  But  there  is  much  more 
besides.  The  most  attractive  curios  from  India, 
from  Ceylon,  the  Malay  Peninsula  and  of  native 
Filipino  workmanship  are  all  to  be  found  here. 
It  is  not  the  place  to  enter  when  one  has  not 
much  money. 

No  wonder  Sergeant  Overton  and  Sergeant 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  v  15 

Terry  moved  from  counter  to  counter,  pricing 
and  sighing.  Each  young  Army  boy  wanted 
to  send  home  something  worth  while  to  his 
mother.  Yet  how  small  a  sergeant's  pay  seems 
in  such  a  bazaar! 

Hal  Overton  and  Noll  Terry  need  no  intro- 
duction to  the  reader  of  the  earlier  volumes  in 
this  series.  "  UNCLE  SAM'S  BOYS  IN  THE 
BANKS,  ' '  as  our  readers  are  aware,  details  how 
Hal  and  Noll,  reared  in  love  of  the  Flag  and 
respect  for  the  military,  determined,  at  the  age 
of  eighteen,  to  enlist  in  the  Eegular  Army.  Our 
readers  followed  the  new  recruits  to  the  recruit 
rendezvous,  where  the  young  men  received  their 
first  drillings  in  the  art  of  being  a  soldier.  From 
there  they  followed  Hal  and  Noll  westward,  to 
Fort  Clowdry,  in  the  Colorado  mountains,  where 
the  young  soldiers  went  through  their  first  thrill- 
ing experiences  of  the  strenuous  side  of  Army 
life,  proving  themselves,  whether  in  barracks,  on 
drill  ground  or  under  fire  on  a  lonely  sentry 
post,  to  be  the  sort  of  American  youths  of  whom 
the  best  soldiers  are  made. 

E-eaders  of  " UNCLE  SAM'S  BOYS  ON  FIELD 
DUTY'  already  know  how  Hal  and  Noll  went 
several  steps  further  in  learning  the  work  of 
the  soldier;  of  their  surprisingly  good  and 
highly  adventurous  work  in  practical  problems 
of  field  life.  In  this  volume  was  described  field 


16  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

life  and  outpost  duty,  and  scouting  duty  as 
well,  as  they  are  actually  taught  in  the  Army. 
In  this  volume  is  told  also  how  Hal  and  Noll 
while  out  with  a  scouting  party  supplied  their 
company  with  unexpected  bear  meat.  Our 
readers,  too,  will  remember  the  thrilling  work 
of  Hal  and  Noll,  under  Lieutenant  Prescott,  in 
capturing  a  desperate  character  badly  wanted 
by  the  state  authorities.  These  young  soldiers 
were  heroes  of  other  absorbing  adventures; 
their  fine  work  eventually  leading  to  their  ap- 
pointments as  corporals. 

In  " UNCLE  SAM'S  BOYS  AS  SEKGEANTS'  our 
readers  will  recall  a  host  of  happenings  that  be- 
long to  military  life,  among  them  the  stirring 
military  tournament  in  which  a  battalion  of 
"Ours'  took  part  at  Denver,  and  the  all  but 
tragic  results  of  that  tournament;  the  soldier 
hunting-party  up  in  the  Kockies.  in  which  Hal 
and  Noll  thoroughly  distinguished  themselves 
both  as  hunters  and  as  soldiers  and  commanders. 

And  now  we  find  the  entire  Thirty-fourth  In- 
fantry in  Manila,  stationed  there  briefly  pending- 
details  at  other  points  in  the  islands. 

As  we  look  in  upon  Sergeants  Overton  and 
Terry  to-day  we  find  them  two  years  older  than 
when  they  first  enlisted — but  many  years  older 
in  all  the  fine  qualities  that  go  to  make  up  the 
best  manhood. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  17 

Either  young  sergeant's  word  was  as  good  as 
his  bond  in  the  Thirty-fourth.  Truthful,  am- 

t/  t 

bitious,  manly,  thoroughly  trained  and  capable 
of  commanding;  in  a  word,  men  in  character 
and  abilities,  while  yet  boys  in  years. 

This  much  had  two  years  of  life  in  the  United 
States  Army  done  for  Hal  Overton  and  Noll 
Terry.  Could  other  training  have  done  more  ? 

And  these  were  the  young  Americans  whom 
the  alert-eyed,  trailing  Filipino  dandy  had 
already  singled  out  and  had  planned  to  corrupt 
to  his  own  purposes. 

Yet  the  astute  man  of  the  world  knows  more 
than  one  way  of  ruining  and  disgracing  simple- 
hearted,  true-souled  young  fellows.  Not  even 
Satan  is  credited  with  appearing  often  in  evil 
guise  at  first. 

Perhaps  this  Filipino,  a  wicked  fellow  of  long 
training,  knew  how  to  go  about  his  work. 

li Going  to  buy  anything,  Noll?"  asked  Hal 
at  last,  after  the  two  young  sergeants  had  made 
the  round  of  the  bewildering,  attractive  store. 

"I  would,  if  I  could  find  anything  worth  while 
that  didn't  take  a  sergeant's  whole  year's  pay," 
sighed  Terry. 

"Things  are  fearfully  dear  here,  aren't 
they?'  murmured  Overton.  "Yet  I  want  to 
send  something  home  as  a  remembrance  to 
mother. ' ' 

Uncle  Sam's  Bovs. 


18  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

"What  do  you  fancy  most?"  asked  Noll. 

"If  you  haven't  anything  else  on  your  mind, 
come  around  and  I'll  show  you,"  Hal  proposed. 

Nodding,  Noll  accompanied  his  chum.  Hal 
stopped  to  rest  one  hand  lightly  on  a  very  won- 
derful little  chest,  made  out  of  teak  and  sandal 
woods.  It  was  richly,  wonderfully  carved,  the 
darker  teakwood  being  also  inlaid  with  pearl. 
Inside  were  compartments  and  drawers,  includ- 
ing two  little  secret  drawers  that  the  smiling 
Chinese  salesman  artfully  opened  and  exposed 
to  view. 

"One  all  same  fo'  diner o  (money),  other  fo' 
plecious  stones,  jewels,  you  sabe/'  cooed  the  yel- 
low attendant. 

"It's  a  beauty  and  a  wonder,"  murmured 
Hal.  ' '  Mother  'd  be  the  proudest  woman  in  town 
if  I  could  send  it  home  to  her.  How  much  did 
you  say  it  cost?" 

' '  Him  tloo  bundled  pesos, ' '  stated  the  China- 
man gravely. 

A  peso  is  the  Spanish  name  for  a  Mexican 
dollar,  worth  about  forty-seven  cents;  but  two 
pesos  and  an  American  dollar  are  reckoned  as 
of  the  same  value  in  Manila. 

"A  hundred  dollars  gold!  Why,  that's  the 
same  price  you  asked  me  before, ' '  cried  Hal  in 
good-natured  protest. 

"Yep,  allee  same;  him  plenty  cheap." 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  19 

"It's  too  much,"  sighed  Sergeant  Hal.  But 
the  Chinaman,  as  though  he  had  not  heard, 
asked : 

"You  likee?     You  buy?" 

"I  can't  afford  it  at  that  price." 

"All  light;  come  in  some  other  day,"  invited 
the  Chinaman  politely,  and  glided  over  to  where 
another  possible  customer  was  examining  some 
handsome  jade  jewelry. 

"My  soldado  (soldier)  friend  has  not  been 
long  in  Manila?"  inquired  a  low,  pleasant, 
courteous  voice  behind  the  two  young  soldiers. 

Hal  wheeled.  It  was  the  Filipino  dandy 
whom  he  confronted.  That  smiling,  prosperous- 
looking  native  was  employing  his  left  hand  to 
twist  one  end  of  the  upturned  moustache  to  a 
finer  point. 

"  No ;  we  haven 't  been  here  long, ' '  Hal  smiled. 
"Three  days,  in  fact.' 

"And  you  do  not  yet  know  how  to  bargain 
with  these  sharp-witted  Chinos  (Chinese)?' 

"I'm  afraid  not,"  said  Sergeant  Overton. 

"May  I  ask,  senor,  what  you  wished  to  buy?' 

"This  box,"  Hal  answered. 

"And  how  much  did  the  Chino  want  for  it,  if 
I  may  make  bold  enough  to  ask  so  much  of  the 
senor 's  business?' 

"Why,  he  wants  a  hundred  dollars  in  gold,' 
Hal  responded. 


20  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

The  Filipino  dandy  inspected  the  box  critic- 
ally. 

"You  are  right,  seiior;  the  price  is  too  high. 
It  is  muy  caro  (very  dear),  in  fact.  It  could  be 
bought  for  less,  if  you  knew  better  how  to  deal 
with  these  smiling  yellow  heathen.' 

"I'd  be  greatly  obliged,  then,  if  you  would 
tell  me  how  to  put  the  bargain  through.' 

"You  should  get  this  rare  and  handsome  box, 
senor,  for  ninety  dollars,  gold — even,  perhaps, 
for  not  much  more  than  eighty.' 

"Even  that  would  be  a  fearful  price  for  me 
to  pay,'  murmured  Hal,  shaking  his  head  re- 
gretfully. "I  shall  have  to  give  up  the  idea, 
I  guess.' 

"Ah,  but  no!"  cried  the  Filipino,  as  though 
struck  suddenly  by  an  idea.  "Not  if  the  senor 
will  do  me  one  very  great  favor!" 

"What  favor  can  I  possibly  do  you?"  asked 
Sergeant  Hal,  regarding  the  little  brown  man 
with  considerable  astonishment. 

"Why,  it  is  all  very  simple,  senor.  Simply 
let  me  feel  that  I  have  been  permitted  to  do  a 
cour.tesy  to  an  Americano  to  one  of  the  race 
to  which  I  owe  so  much.  In  a  word,  senor,  I  am 
not — as  you  may  perhaps  guess" — here  the 
Filipino  swelled  slightly  with  a  pride  that  was 
plain — ' '  I  am  not  exactly  a  poor  man,  not  since 
the  Americanos  came  to  these  islands  and  gave 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  21 

us  the  blessings  of  liberty  and  just  government. 
I  have  many  business  ventures,  and  one  of  them 
lies  in  my  being  a  secret — no,  what  you  Amer- 
icanos call  a  silent  partner  of  the  Chino  who  con- 
ducts this  store.  Now  the  favor  that  I  ask — 
senor,  I  beg  you  to  let  me  present  you  with  this 
handsome  little  box,  that  you  may  send  it  over 
the  waters  to  your  sweetheart." 

"Make  me  a  present  of  it?7  demanded  Ser- 
geant Hal  in  amazement. 

"Ah,  yes,  exactly  so,  senor;  and  I  shall  be 
greatly  honored  by  your  very  kind  acceptance. 
And  your  friend — he  shall  select  anything — 
valuable  and  handsome — that  he  would  like  for 
his  sweetheart. ' r 

Neither  young  sergeant  had  a  sweetheart  out- 
side of  his  mother.  It  was  for  their  mothers 
that  they  sought  suitable-priced  curios.  In  their 
amazement,  however,  neither  Hal  nor  Noll  took 
the  trouble  to  correct  this  smiling,  polite 
stranger. 

' '  Thank  you, ' '  said  Overton  promptly.  l  i  We 
can't  accept,  of  course,  though  it  is  very  kind 
of  you  to  make  the  offer — so  very  kind  that  it 
almost  takes  our  breath  away." 

"And  why  can  you  not  accept!"  insisted  the 
Filipino.  He  was  still  smiling,  but  there  was 
now  something  so  insistent  in  his  voice  that  Noll 
answered  quickly: 


22  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"Because  we  cannot  accept  gifts  from 
strangers. ' 

"Ah,  but  you  do  not  yet  know  the  Orient. 
You  must  have  things  here;  you  must  have 
money  to  spend,  and  feel  the  pleasure  of  spend- 
ing it,  or  you  will  die. ' 

"Thank  you,"  laughed  Sergeant  Hal,  "but 
at  present  my  health  is  excellent.  As  for  dying, 
that  has  no  terror  for  the  soldier. ' 

"Ah,  yes,  to  die  like  a  soldier!' '  protested  the 
Filipino,  with  a  shrug  of  his  shoulders.  "But 
would  you  die  of  sheer  weariness  and  envy? 
There  are  pleasures  in  this  country  which  only 
money  will  buy.  Without  the  money,  without 
these  pleasures,  life  soon  becomes  bitter.  You 
do  not  know,  but  I  do,  for  I  have  watched  thou- 
sands of  your  Americano  soldiers  here.  Now,  I 
have  money — too  much!  It  is  my  whim  to  see 
that  the  soldados  enjoy  themselves.  I  have 
begged  many  a  soldier  to  honor  me  by  letting 
me  purchase  him  a  little  pleasure.  Come,  I  will 
show  you  now!  Wait!  I  will  send  for  a  car- 
riage— not  a  quilez,  but  a  victoria.  Say  the 
word,  give  the  consent,  and  I  will  show  you  at 
once  what  is  called  pleasure  here  in  the  East — 
in  Manila." 

Though  he  spoke  in  low  tones,  the  Filipino 
made  almost  extravagant  gestures.  As  he  kept 
on  he  warmed  up  to  his  subject. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  23 

" Shall  I  call  a  victoria?"  he  asked. 

' '  If  you  wish, ' '  replied  Sergeant  Hal  dryly. 

"Ah,  that  is  the  way  I  like  to  hear  you  say 
it!"  cried  the  little  Filipino,  and  hastened 
toward  the  door. 

He  went  away  so  rapidly,  in  fact,  that  he  did 
not  have  time  to  note  young  Sergeant  Overt  on 's 
altered  manner.  From  a  feeling  of  embarrass- 
ment over  having  to  repulse  a  stranger's  ill- 
advised  offer  of  generosity,  Hal,  his  eyes  watch- 
ing the  man's  face,  speedily  took  a  dislike  to 
the  Filipino. 

"Come  along,  Noll,"  Overton  whispered. 
' i  We  '11  get  out  of  this.  I  don 't  like  the  fellow. '  > 

"You  like  him  as  well  as  I  do,"  muttered 
Sergeant  Terry. 

At  the  door  of  the  store  they  again  caught 
sight  of  the  dandy,  who,  with  hand  extended, 
was  at  that  moment  signaling  a  cochero  to  drive 
his  victoria  in  to  the  curh. 

"It  could  not  have  been  better,"  cried  the 
little  brown  tempter.  "Just  as  I  came  out  I 
saw  an  empty  victoria.' 

"I  congratulate  you,"  smiled  Sergeant  Hal. 

"No,  but  this  is  the  carriage,  here,"  cried  the 
Filipino,  as  Hal  and  Noll  turned  to  walk  down 
the  Escolta. 

"Get  in,  then,  and  enjoy  yourself,'  called 
back  Hal. 


24  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

In  an  instant  the  Filipino  was  in  front  of 
them,  barring  their  way. 

"But  you  permitted  me  to  stop  a  carriage/ 
he  protested,  bewildered. 

"Exactly,"  nodded  Hal,  "and  we  hope  you 
will  enjoy  yourself.  Step  aside,  please,  for  we 
want  to  pass  on.' 

"But  you  are  not  going  with  me,  after ' 

"Nothing  was  said  about  that,'  Hal  an- 
swered, ' '  and  we  have  other  plans.  Good-bye. ' 

As  the  Filipino  dandy  once  more  tried  to 
place  himself  in  front  of  the  young  sergeant, 
Hal  gently  but  firmly  thrust  the  insistent  fellow 
aside. 

The  Filipino  stood  glaring  after  them  until 
the  two  Army  boys  were  out  of  sight.  The  glint 
in  his  eyes  was  far  from  pleasant. 

"Now,  what  on  earth  did  that  fellow  want  of 
us?'  demanded  Noll  wonderingly. 

"Nothing  good,  anyway,'  returned  Hal 
Overton.  "Intending  benefactors  don't  act  in 
that  fashion.  He  may  represent  a  bad  phase 
of  life  out  here.  Let's  forget  him.  Say,  here's 
a  store  we  must  have  overlooked  on  our  way  up 
here.  Let's  go  in." 

Half  an  hour  later  the  Army  boys  came  out 
of  the  store,  each  carrying  a  small  parcel.  For 
his  first  present  home  each  young  soldier  had 
bought  for  his  mother  a  small  assortment  of 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  25 

/ 

the  wonderfully  filmy  pina  lace  handkerchiefs 
made  by  the  native  women. 

' '  No  quilez  around  here  for  hire, ' '  said  Hal, 
after  looking*  up  and  down  the  Escolta.  "Let's 
walk  across  the  bridge  over  the  Pasig.  We'll 
be  more  likely  to  find  an  idle  cochero  on  the 
other  side  of  the  river. ' 

As  they -started  the  sky  was  darkening,  and 
the  lightning  beginning  to  flash,  for  this  was 
in  early  July,  at  the  height  of  the  rainy  season. 

"I  hope  we  find  a  cochero  soon,'  muttered 
Noll,  looking  up  at  the  dark  sky.  "I  don't 
fancy  the  idea  of  walking  all  the  way  out  to 
Malate  in  a  downpour.' 

They  were  not  quite  over  the  bridge  when 
the  storm  broke  in  all  its  force.  Tropical 
thunder  crashed  with  a  fury  that  made  artillery 
fire  seem  trifling.  Great  sheets  of  lightning- 
flashed  on  all  sides. 

"Hustle,  before  we  get  drowned,'  laughed 
Sergeant  Hal,  breaking  into  a  fast  run. 
"There's  shelter  just  beyond  the  end  of  the 
bridge." 

The  shelter  for  which  both  soldiers  headed 
was  a  kiosk,  barely  larger  than  a  sentry-box, 
that  had  once  been  erected  for  the  convenience 
of  the  native  boys  who  stood  there  with  relief 
horses  for  the  service  of  the  old  street  car  line. 

The  door  stood  open.     Eager  to  make  any 


26  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

port  in  a  storm,  Hal  and  Noll  bolted  inside  just 
in  time  to  hear  an  angry  voice  declare: 

"I  had  them  picked  out — two  young  sergentes, 
mere  boys.  At  first  they  were  very  polite — a 
minute  later  they  made  fun  of  me  to  my  face — 
me,  Vicente  Tomba!  But  I  shall  know  them 
again,  I  shall  see  them,  and  I  shall  make  them 
wish  they  had  never  been  born.  I ' 

The  Filipino  dandy  stopped  short  as  the  two 
Army  boys  stepped  briskly  inside.  He  gave 
a  gasp  as  he  recognized  them. 

"We  meet  again/'  remarked  Hal  dryly. 

The  dandy's  companion,  a  big,  florid-faced 
man  of  forty,  in  the  usual  immaculate  white 
duck  of  the  white  man,  eyed  the  boys  keenly. 


CHAPTER  II 

A  MEETING  AT  THE   NIPA  BARRACKS 

IT  was  only  for  a  moment. 
Then,  without  answering  Hal's  remark, 
the  Filipino  clutched  at  the  white  man's 
arm,  shoving  him  out  into  the  rain.    The  native 
followed. 

Just  then  a  cocker o  with  an  empty  quilez 
drove  up.  With  instant  presence  of  mind  Vi- 
cente Tomba,  as  the  dandy  had  called  himself, 
held  up  his  hand. 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  27 

It  was  all  done  in  an  instant,  and  native  and 
white  friend  were  driving  away  through  the 
gusts  of  rain. 

"Wonder  who  our  friends  are!'  Noll  re- 
marked curiously. 

"We  know  that  one  of  them  calls  himself 
Vicente  Tomba,"  replied  Sergeant  Hal. 

"But  he  spoke  of  having  us  picked  out  for 
something,  and  he  seemed  almost  peevish  be- 
cause we  didn't  suit  him/'  smiled  Noll. 

"I  can't  imagine  what  it  is,"  replied  Hal,  un- 
disturbed. "It  couldn't  be  anything  in  the  high 
treason  line,  anyway." 

"Why  not  even  that!"  demanded  Sergeant 
Noll. 

"Why,  look  here,  old  fellow,  we're  just  two 
plain,  kid,  doughboy  sergeants  of  the  line.  If 
that  fellow  had  wanted  anything  in  the  treason- 
able variety,  what  sort  of  goods  could  we  deliver 
him,  anyway?  Nothing,  much,  beyond  our  own 
arms  and  a  copy  of  the  company's  roll.' 

"Then  what  on  earth  was  the  fellow  up  to, 
anyway ! ' 

"I  don't  know,  Noll,  and  I  don't  much  care. 
I've  heard  that  there  are  sharks  of  all  sorts 
here  in  Manila,  ready  to  put  up  all  sorts  of 
games  to  get  the  easy-mark  soldier's  pay  away 
from  him.  Probably  Tomba  and  his  friend  be- 
long in  that  class. ' ' 


28  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"Pooh!      Tomba    has    plenty    of    inoney,? 
snorted  Noll  Terry.    "He  wouldn't  have  to  be 
out  for  a  poor,  buck-foot  soldier's  pay.' 

"Swindlers  sometimes  do  have  plenty  of 
money,  for  a  while,  until  the  law  rounds  them 
up  and  puts  them  where  they  ought  to  be, ' '  ob- 
served Sergeant  Hal  sagely.  "Let's  forget  the 
fellow,  Noll,  unless  we  see  him  again.  Tomba  is 
evidently  up  to  something  crooked,  and  we're 
not,  so  we  haven't  any  real  interest  in  him, 
have  we?" 

"Except  to  be  on  our  guard,"  said  Noll. 

"You  speak  as  though  you  had  some  forebod- 
ings regarding  Tomba,  or  Tomba  and  his 
friend,"  smiled  Hal  quizzically. 

"Well,  then,  I  have,"  returned  Noll  Terry. 

"Not  scared,  are  you?" 

"That's  a  fine  question  to  ask  a  soldier," 
sniffed  Noll. 

"Well,  I'm  not  going  to  waste  any  more 
thoughts  on  Tomba,  or  on  his  white-man  com- 
panion, either.  Wheel  Look  at  that  rain. 
It " 

But  a  fearfully  vivid  flash  of  tropical 
lightning  caused  Sergeant  Hal  Overton  to  step 
further  back  into  the  little  shed  and  close  his 
eyes  for  an  instant.  Eight  after  the  flash  came 
a  prolonged,  heavy  roll  of  thunder  that  made 
the  earth  shake. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  29 

"Cochero,  para!'  shouted  Noll  right  after 
that,  and  a  fareless  quilez  stopped  near  the 
door  of  the  shed. 

"Occupado  (occupied)!"  called  Noll. 

"No,  senor." 

Hal  and  Noll  bolted  through  the  rain,  darted 
into  the  quilez  through  the  door  at  the  rear, 
and  plumped  themselves  down  on  the  seats. 

"Sigue  directio,  Malate,  cuartel  nipa/  or- 
dered Hal,  thus  instructing  the  driver  to  go 
straight  ahead  to  Malate  and  to  take  them  to 
the  nipa  barracks. 

The  Filipino  driver  himself  was  drenched. 
In  his  thin  cotton  clothing  the  little  brown  man 
perched  on  the  box  outside,  shivered  until  his 
teeth  chattered.  He  did  not  propose,  however, 
to  let  personal  discomfort  stop  him  from  earning 
a  fare. 

Around  the  Walled  City  (Old  Manila)  the 
quilez  carried  the  young  soldiers.  These  mas- 
sive walls,  centuries  old,  enclose  perhaps  a 
square  mile  of  city.  Once  past  the  Walled  City 
the  little  vehicle  glided  on  through  pretty  Er- 
mita.  Here,  passing  along  Calle  Eeal  (Eoyal 
Street),  the  driver  turned  into  the  straight 
stretch  for  the  next  suburb,  Malate. 

For  months  before  sailing  for  the  Philippines 
both  young  sergeants  had  devoted  a  good  deal 
of  their  spare  time  to  the  study  of  Spanish. 


SO  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

They  had,  however,  learned  the  best  Spanish  of 
old  Castile.  First  Sergeant  Gray,  who  had  put 
in  three  terms  of  service  in  the  Philippines,  had 
taken  pains  to  teach  them  much  of  the  local 
Spanish  dialect  as  it  is  spoken  in  this  far-away 
colony  of  Uncle  Sam's. 

To-day  the  Filipino  children  speak  English 
rather  well  and  musically,  for  English  is  the 
language  of  the  public  schools  of  the  islands. 
Many  of  the  older  natives,  however,  even  those 
with  English-speaking  children,  know  only  a 
few  words  at  most  of  the  tongue  of  the  Amer- 
icanos. 

By  the  time  that  the  little  cab  turned  in  at 
the  barracks  grounds  much  of  the  fury  of  the 
storm  had  passed.  The  rain,  however,  continued 
at  a  steady  downpour,  and  seemed  good  for  the 
night. 

' '  We  may  have  to  be  campaigning  in  this  kind 
of  weather  in  another  fortnight, ' '  remarked  Hal. 

' '  Fine  business, '    commented  Noll  dryly. 

"Well,  it  all  goes  in  the  life  of  a  soldier.  It 
can't  hurt  the  soldier  much,  either,  for  somehow 
he's  healthier  than  fellows  who  clerk  or  work 
in  machine  shops." 

"Clerking!  Shops!"  repeated  Noll,  with  a 
smile  of 'mild  disgust.  "Did  we  ever  stand  that 
sort  of  life,  Hal!" 

"Once  upon  a  time,  Noll." 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  31 

"Thank  goodness  that  day  has  gone  by." 

"Here  we  are,'  announced  Sergeant  Hal, 
reaching  for  the  rear  door  and  opening  it.  "I'll 
pay  the  cochero  this  time,  Noll;  you  paid  for 
our  last  ride.' 

On  the  broad  veranda  of  the  barracks,  well 
out  of  the  rain,  lounged  half  a  hundred  of  the 
men  of  the  Thirty-fourth.  A  few  of  them  were 
at  tables  writing  home  letters. 

"Did  you  give  my  regards  to  the  Escolta, 
Sergeant?'  called  Private  Kelly,  from  one  of 
the  groups.  . 

"I  didn't  forget  you,  Kelly,"  laughed  Hal. 

"Get  those  picture  post  cards  for  me?"  called 
Corporal  Hyman. 

"Here  you  are,  Hyman,"  responded  Noll, 
opening  his  blouse  and  exploring  an  inner 
pocket.  "I  hope  I  haven't  got  them  too  wet,  and 
that  the  views  will  suit." 

'  *  Any  views  will  suit, ' '  retorted  Hyman.  '  *  My 
kid  brothers  and  cousins  have  never  been  out 
here  and  one  view  will  please  them  as  well  as 
another. ' ? 

A  few  more  soldiers  came  forward  to  ask 
about  errands  that  the  young  sergeants  had 
undertaken.  No  one's  commissions  had  been 
forgotten. 

1  i  Your  leave  didn  't  do  you  two  so  much  good 
this  afternoon,"  grinned  Corporal  Hyman. 


32  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"Why  not?"  Sergeant  Overton  wanted  to 
know. 

4 'On  account  of  the  weather  we  didn't  have 
parade,  anyway/ 

"  I  'm  no  parade  shirker, ' '  retorted  Hal.  ' '  On 
the  busiest  day  we're  not  being  overworked 
here.  We  may  strike  something  hard  in  the 
tropics  yet,  but  so  far,  since  reaching  Manila, 
the  men  of  this  regiment  haven't  been  worked 
more  than  a  quarter  as  hard  as  in  barracks  at 
home.  But  I  wonder  when  we  go  south?' 

"Haven't  you  heard!'  asked  .Corporal  Hy- 
man. 

"Not  a  word,"  Hal  declared. 

"I  haven't,  either.  But  we  heard  that  the 
4 Warren'  came  in  this  afternoon.' 

The  i  i  Warren ' '  was  the  United  States  Army 
transport  vessel  that  was  much  used  in  carry- 
ing troops  between  the  different  islands. 

' '  We  ought  to  be  under  way  soon,  then, ' '  Hal 
replied  thoughtfully.  "I  suppose  we're  still 
slated  to  go  down  among  the  Moros.' 

"That's  the  talk  in  the  regiment,  anyway,' 
replied  Corporal  Hyman. 

"I  hope  it's  true." 

"You're  one  of  the  few  that  does,  then,'  re- 
torted Hyman,  with  a  grimace.  "In  these 
islands  the  real  fine  place  for  a  regiment  to  be 
stationed  is  right  here  on  the  outskirts  of  Ma- 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  33 

nila.  Plenty  of  grub,  kitchen-cooked;  little 
work  to  do,  and  no  danger  of  anything  except 
guard  duty  to  call  us  out  of  our  bunks." 

"That's  altogether  too  lazy  for  a  soldier," 
objected  Hal,  with  spirit.  "I  don't  want  to 
see  any  trouble  start  in  these  islands,  but  if 
there's  going  to  be  any  campaigning,  I  want  to 
see  the  Thirty-fourth  right  in  the  thick  of  it." 

"You'll  get  over  that,  by  and  by,  Sergeant," 
responded  Corporal  Hyman.  "More  than  half 
of  the  fellows  in  the  Thirty-fourth  have  been 
out  here  in  other  years,  and  have  seen  plenty 
of  fighting.  Now,  getting  shot  at  by  a  lot  of 
strangers  is  all  right  enough  for  a  soldier  when 
it  has  to  be  done ;  but  you  '11  find  that  the  older 
men  in  this  regiment  are  not  doing  any  praying 
that  'Ours'  will  get  more  than  its  share  of 
fighting. ' ' 

"Perhaps  I  won't,  when  I've  seen  as  much 
fighting  as  some  of  you  fellows  have,'  Hal 
nodded.  "I've  never  been  in  a  real  battle  yet.'9 

"You've  been  under  stiff  enough  fire,  right 
back  in  the  good  old  Eocky  Mountains,'  re- 
torted Corporal  Hyman.  "You  don't  need  any 
more  by  way  of  training.' 

"Perhaps  not;  but  I  want  it,  just  the  same. 
I'm  a  hog,  ain't  If  laughed  the  boyish  young 
sergeant. 

"No;  you're  simply  a  kid  soldier,"  grumbled 

3 4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


• 


34  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

Hyman.  "All  the  kids  want  a  heap  of  fighting 
— until  after  they've  had  it.  When  you've  been 
with  the  colors  a  few  years  longer  you'll  be 
ready  to  agree  that  three  ' squares'  a  day  and  a 
soft  bed  at  night  are  miles  and  miles  ahead  of 
desperate  charges  or  last-ditch  business." 

"So  the  ' Warren'  is  in  port  from  her  last 
trip  south, ' 9  Hal  went  on.  ' '  Oh,  I  wonder  when 
we  start.' 

"So  do  a  lot  of  us,'  retorted  Private  Kelly. 
"But  we  hope  it  won't  be  soon,  Sarge.' 

"Oh,  you  coffee-coolers!'  taunted  Hal  good- 
naturedly. 

The  Army  "coffee-cooler'  is  the  man  who 
is  left  behind  in  stirring  times.  Uncle  Sam's 
soldiers  explain  that  a  coffee-cooler  is  a  man 
who  won't  go  forward,  in  the  morning,  until 
his  coffee  is  cool  enough  for  him  to  drink  it 
with  comfort.  Hence  a  coffee-cooler  is  a  man 
who  is  detailed  on  work  at  the  rear  of  the  fight- 
ing line  simply  because  he  is  of  no  earthly  use 
at  the  front. 

It  is  not  as  bad,  however,  to  be  a  coffee-cooler 
as  a  cold-foot.  A  "cold-foot"  is  a  soldier 
paralyzed  with  terror;  he  is  worse  than  use- 
less anywhere  in  the  Army.  The  cold-foot  is 
ironically  asked  why  he  didn't  bring  his  woolen 
socks  along.  If  a  cold-foot  gets  into  deadly 
action  it  is  said  that  the  cold  chills  chase  each 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  35, 

other  down  his  spine  and  all  settle  in  his  feet, 
so  that  he  is  frozen  in  his  tracks.  However,  a 
soldier  who  betrays  cowardice  in  the  face  of 
the  enemy  may  be  shot  for  his  cowardice,  for 
which  reason  "cold  feet"  sometimes  become  cold 
for  all  time  to  come. 

Soldiers  there  have  been  who  have  shown 
"cold  feet"  in  their  first  battle  or  two,  and  yet 
have  been  among  the  best  of  soldiers  later  on. 
But  the  cold-f ouot  is  a  rarity,  anyway,  among  the 
regulars. 

"Hello,"  broke  in  Kelly,  peering  out  through 
the  rain,  "there  goes  some  good  fellow  to  the 
rainmakers. ' 

Many  of  the  other  soldiers  looked.  Two 
hospital-corps  men  were  carrying  a  stretcher 
in  the  direction  of  the  post  hospital.  None 
could  make  out,  however,  who  was  on  the 
stretcher,  as,  owing  to  the  downpour  of  rain, 
the  unfortunate  one  was  covered  with  three  or 
four  rubber  ponchos. 

"I  hope  none  of  our  good  fellows  is  badly 
hurt,"  broke  in  Sergeant  Noll  Terry. 

"Eheumatism,  most  likely,"  grunted  Cor- 
poral Hyman.  "Did  you  ever  see  a  country 
where  the  rain  fell  as  steadily  when  it  got 
started!" 

"Well,  this  is  the  rainy  season,  isn't  it?" 
inquired  Noll. 


36  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

"Yes." 

"But  half  of  the  year  we  have  a  dry  season, 
don't  we!" 

"We  do,"  admitted  Hyman.  "Yet,  of  the 
two,  you'll  prefer  the  wet  season  a  whole  lot. 
In  the  dry  season  the  dust  is  blowing  in  your 
face  day  and  night.' 

An  orderly  stepped  briskly  out  on  the  ver- 
anda, 

"Sergeant  Overton  is  directed  to  report  im- 
mediately to  Lieutenant  Prescott  at  the  latter 's 
quarters. ' ' 

"I'll  be  there  before  the  words  are  out  of 
your  mouth,  Driggs,'  laughed  Hal,  rising  and 
starting. 

"Hold  on,  Sarge,"  called  Private  Kelly. 
"Look  at  the  sheets  of  dew  coming  down,  and 
you  haven't  your  poncho.  Here,  put  mine  on.' 

"Thank  you;   I  will,"  Hal  assented,  halting. 

The  poncho  is  a  thin  rubber,  blanket-like  af- 
fair. In  the  field  the  men  usually  spread  the 
poncho  on  the  ground,  under  their  blankets. 
But  in  the  middle  of  the  poncho  is  a  hole  through 
which  the  head  may  be  thrust,  the  poncho  then 
falling  over  the  trunk  of  the  body  like  a  rain 
coat. 

Getting  this  on  and  replacing  his  campaign 
hat,  Hal  started  briskly  toward  officers'  quar- 
ters. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  37 

Lieutenant  Prescott  was  in  his  room  when 
Hal  knocked,  and  promptly  called,  "Come  in." 

Hal  entered,  saluting  his  lieutenant,  who  was 
writing  at  a  table.  He  looked  up  long  enough 
to  receive  and  return  Hal's  soldierly  salute. 

"With  you  in  a  moment,  Sergeant,"  stated 
Lieutenant  Prescott,  who  then  turned  back  to  his 
writing. 

"Very  good,  sir." 

Hal  did  not  stir,  but  merely  changed  from  his 
position  of  attention  to  one  of  greater  ease. 

Lieutenant  Prescott  is  no  stranger  to  our 
readers.  He  was  second  lieutenant  of  Captain 
Cortland's  B  Company  of  the  Thirty-fourth. 
Eeaders  of  our  "HIGH  SCHOOL  BOYS  SERIES" 
recall  Dick  Prescott  as  a  schoolboy  athlete, 
and  readers  of  the  "WEST  POINT  SERIES" 
have  followed  the  same  Dick  Prescott  through 
his  four  years  of  cadetship  at  the  United  States 
Military  Academy. 

After  finishing  a  page  and  signing  it,  Lieu- 
tenant Prescott  wiped  his  pen,  laid  it  down  and 
wheeled  about  in  his  chair. 

"You  heard  about  Sergeant  Gray?"  asked 
the  young  West  Pointer. 

1 '  Nothing  in  especial,  sir. ' ' 

"He  was  badly  hurt  ten  minutes  ago  in  stop- 
ping the  runaway  horses  of  Colonel  Thorpe,  of 
the  Thirty-seventh  Infantry.  Colonel  Thorpe 


38  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

was  visiting  our  colonel,  and  only  the  two  little 
Thorpe  youngsters  were  in  the  carriage  when 
the  horses  bolted,  pitching  the  native  driver 
from  the  seat.' 

" Badly  hurt,  sir!"  cried  Hal  Overton  in  a 
tone  of  genuine  distress.  "That  will  be  bad 
news  in  the  company,  sir.  I  don't  think  any 
of  them  know  it  yet,  or  I  would  have  heard  it 
before.  Sergeant  Gray  is  a  man  we  swear  by, 
sir,  in  the  squad  rooms.' 

"Sergeant  Gray  is  a  splendid  soldier,'  ob- 
served Lieutenant  Prescott  warmly.  "It  is  not 
believed  that  he  will  have  to  be  retired,  but  he 
may  have  to  put  in  two  or  three  months  on  sick 
report  before  he  can  come  back  to  duty.  But 
that  is  not  what  I  sent  for  you  to  tell  you, 
Sergeant  Overton.  As  Sergeant  Hupner  was 
left  behind  on  detailed  duty  in  the  United 
States,  the  accident  to  Gray  now  leaves  you  the 
ranking  sergeant  in  the  company.  Until  further 
orders  you  will  take  over  the  duties  of  acting 
first  sergeant,  by  Captain  Cortland's  direc- 
tion." 

"Very  good,  sir." 

"This  is  Tuesday,  Sergeant.  Thursday,  at 
eleven  in  the  morning,  the  Thirty-fourth  is  due 
before  the  office  of  the  captain  of  the  port,  to 
take  boats  for  the  transport  *  Warren.'  This 
regiment  sails  for  Iloilo  and  other  ports.' 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  39 

• 

"May  I  repeat  that  to  the  men,  sir?" 

"It  is  going  to  be  necessary,  for  you  will  have 
to  see  to  it  that  all  the  personal  and  company 
baggage  is  ready  for  the  teamsters  at  four  to- 
morrow afternoon.' 

"Very  good,  sir/ 

"And,  Sergeant,  this  is  not  official,  but  I  be- 
lieve it  to  be  reliable ;  some  of  the  Moro  dattos 
(chieftains)  are  said  to  be  preparing  to  stir 
up  trouble  in  some  of  the  southern  islands.  In 
that  case  the  Thirty-fourth  will  bear  the  brunt 
of  it  all. " 

"I  am  really  very  glad  to  hear  that,  sir,' 
cried  Sergeant  Hal  eagerly. 

' '  So  am  I,  Sergeant, ' '  admitted  the  lieutenant, 
who,  like  most  of  the  younger  officers,  hungered 
for  active  service  against  an  enemy.  "You  un- 
derstand your  instructions,  Sergeant!' 

"Yes,  sir.' 

"Very  good;   that  is  all,  Sergeant.' 

Hal  Overton  saluted  his  officer  with  even  more 
snap  than  usual,  then  hastened  back  to  barracks. 

Supper  soon  followed,  and  before  the  meal 
was  over  the  rain  had  stopped.  After  supper 
several  of  B  Company's  men  went  out  into  the 
near-by  street  to  stroll  in  the  somewhat  cooler 
air  of  the  tropical  evening. 

A  little  later  Hal  and  Noll  followed.  Pres- 
ently, in  the  shadow  under  a  densely  foliaged 


40  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

yllang-yllang  tree,  they  came  upon  two  figures 
standing  there,  just  in  time  to  hear  Corporal 
Hyman's  voice  saying  heartily: 

' 'That  sounds  like  just  as  good  a  time  as 
you  make  it  out  to  be.  And  it  won't  take  us  over 
three  hours!  This  is  a  hard  night  to  get  off, 
as  the  packing-up  order  has  been  given.  I'll 
see  our  first  sergeant,  however,  and  find  out 
whether  there's  any  chance  of  my  getting  leave 
for  the  evening.  If  he  says  so,  I  can  put  it  by 
the  captain  all  right.  Wait  here,  and- 

"I  guess  it  won't  be  necessary,  Corporal  Hy- 
man, '  broke  in  Hal's  voice,  sounding  rather 
cool,  for  Hal  had  recognized  Hyman's  com- 
panion— none  other  than  Vicente  Tomba. 

"Hello!  There  you  are,  Sarge,'  cried  Hy- 
man,  while  the  little  Filipino  dandy  started, 
peered  at  the  young  sergeants  and  then  scowled. 

"I'll  try  to  fix  it  for  you  to  get  a  pass  to- 
night, Corporal,'  Hal  went  on,  "if  you  really 
want  one.  But  I  don't  exactly  believe  that  you 
do.  This  native  gentleman  tried  to  butt  in  with 
us  this  afternoon,  and  at  first  we  took  it  in  good 
part.  But  he  was  too  eager.  Then,  a  little  later 
in  the  afternoon,  we  heard  him  denouncing  us 
to  a  white  man  because  we  weren't  eager 
enough.  Corporal,  unless  you  know  a  lot  about 
this  man,  I  don't  believe  you  want  anything 
to  do  with  him." 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  41 

Tomba's  face  was  blazing  hotly,  while  his  eyes 
gleamed  angrily  at  Sergeant  Overton's  words. 

"If  that's  the  kind  of  fellow  he  is,  then  I 
don't  want  a  pass  to-night,'  Hyman  replied. 
"This  little  man  has  just  been  telling  me  how 
much  he  loves  American  soldados,  and  he  pro- 
posed  to  get  a  quilez  and  take  me  over  into  the 
city  for  the  time  of  my  life.' 

"From  what  happened  this  afternoon  I'm  a 
little  shaky  on  Seiior  Tomba,'  Hal  continued. 

"You  never  saw  me  before!"  cried  Tomba, 
wheeling  about  on  Hal.  "Liar!  Thief!' 

Hal's  reply  was  prompt,  sufficient,  military. 
He  delivered  a  short-arm,  right-hand  blow  that 
struck  the  native  in  the  neck,  felling  him  to  the 
sidewalk. 

But  Tornba  was  up  in  an  instant,  and  a  knife 
flashed  in  his  hands. 

Hal  did  not  flinch.  He  leaped  upon  the  little 
brown  man,  getting  a  clinch  that  held  the  rascal 
powerless.  Then  Noll  coolly  took  away  the 
knife,  striking  the  blade  into  the  tree  trunk  and 
snapping  the  steel  in  two. 

"Shall  I  call  the  guard,  Sergeant,  to  take 
this  little  brown  rat  ? ' '  demanded  Corporal  Hy- 
man. 

"No;  he  isn't  big  enough,  or  man  enough  to 
bother  the  guard  with, ' '  replied  young  Sergeant 
Overton.  "I'll  take  care  of  him  myself.' 


42  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

Whirling  the  Filipino  around,  Hal  gave  him 
a  vigorous  start,  emphasized  by  a  kick,  and 
Vicente  Tomba  slid  off  into  the  darkness. 

Malay  blood  is  not  forgiving.  There  were 
other  reasons,  too,  why  it  would  have  been  far 
better  had  Sergeant  Hal  turned  Tomba  over 
to  the  guard. 


CHAPTEE  III 

PLOTTERS  TRAVEL  WITH  THE  FLAG 

EOM  the  deck  of  the  "Warren"  only 
distant  glimpses  of  land,  on  the  horizon 
line,  were  visible. 

The  sea  to-day  was  without  a  ripple,  yet,  as 
it  was  not  raining,  the  sun  beat  down  with  a 
heat  that  would  have  wilted  most  of  the  pas- 
sengers, had  it  not  been  for  the  awnings 
stretched  over  every  deck. 

Up  on  the  saloon  deck  was  a  mixture  of  the 
field  uniforms  of  Army  officers,  the  white  duck 
or  cotton  of  male  civilian  passengers,  and  the 
white  dresses  of  the  women.  Most  of  the  mar- 
ried officers  of  the  Thirty-fourth  had  brought 
their  families  along  with  them,  and  so  children 
played  along  the  saloon  deck,  or  ran  down 
among  the  friendly  soldiers  on  the  spar  deck. 
Here  and  there,  among  the  women,  was  a 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  43 

Yankee  schoohna'am,  going  to  some  new  charge 
in  the  islands. 

A  number  of  the  male  cabin  passengers  were 
not  Army  people.  Some  belonged  to  the  pos- 
tals service,  the  islands  civil  service,  or  were 
planters  or  merchants  of  wealth  and  influence 
in  the  islands,  who  had  been  permitted  to  take 
passage  on  the  troop  ship. 

Between  decks  the  enlisted  men  of  "Ours' 
were  quartered  and  berthed  by  companies. 
Each  enlisted  man,  by  way  of  a  bed,  had  a  bunk 
whose  frame  was  of  gas  pipe,  to  which  frame 
was  swung  the  canvas  berth.  These  berths  were 
in  tiers,  three  high. 

Away  forward,  in  special  quarters  by  them- 
selves, as  a  sort  of  steerage  passengers,  were 
some  two  score  natives  of  the  islands  who  were 
making  the  journey  for  one  reason  or  another. 
These  natives,  however,  kept  to  themselves,  and 
the  soldiers  saw  little  of  them. 

Altogether,  the  "Warren"  carried  something 
more  than  fourteen  hundred  passengers,  which 
meant  that  quarters  were  at  least  sufficiently 
crowded.  Yet  the  soldiers,  with  the  cheerful 
good  nature  of  their  kind,  took  this  crowded  con- 
dition as  one  of  the  incidents  of  the  life. 

Noll  was  up  on  deck  enjoying  himself;  Hal, 
as  acting  first  sergeant,  was  otherwise  occupied 
during  the  greater  part  of  the  forenoon.  At 


44  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

the  head  of  B  Company's  quarters,  two  decks 
below,  young  Overton  sat  at  a  little  table,  busily 
working  over  a  set  of  papers  that  he  had  to 
make  up.  This  " paper  work'  is  one  of  the 
banes  of  first  sergeants  and  of  company  com- 
manders. 

It  was  after  eleven  o'clock  when  Sergeant 
Hal  finished  his  last  sheet.  The  papers  he 
folded  neatly  and  thrust  them  into  a  long,  official 
envelope,  which  he  endorsed  and  blotted.  Eis- 
ing,  he  thrust  the  envelope  into  the  breast  of 
his  blouse  and  started  for  the  nearest  com- 
panionway. 

"  I  'm  glad,  old  fellow,  that  you  are  the  acting 
first  sergeant, ' '  grinned  comfortable  Noll  Terry, 
as  his  chum  came  upon  deck  with  forehead,  face 
and  neck  beaded  with  perspiration. 

"Oh,  it  doesn't  hurt  a  fellow  to  have  a  little 
work  to  do,"  replied  Overton,  smiling.  "You 
see,  you've  just  been  loafing  this  morning, 
almost  ever  since  inspection,  while  I  have  a 
consciousness  of  work  well  performed.' 

"Keep  your  consciousness  and  enjoy  it,''  re- 
torted Noll,  as  the  two  boyish  sergeants  stepped 
along  the  deck. 

"I  wonder  if  Captain  Cortland  is  on  deck  at 
this  moment ?"  remarked  Sergeant  Hal. 

1  i  I  saw  him  five  minutes  ago, ' '  Noll  answered. 

Almost  at  that  moment  B  Company's  com- 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  45 

mander  came  to  the  forward  rail  of  the  saloon 
deck  and  looked  down.  Then  his  glance  rested 
on  Hal. 

"Are  the  papers  ready,  Sergeant ?'  the  cap- 
tain called  down. 

"Yes,  sir;  I  have  them  with  me,"  replied 
Hal.  Pressing  through  the  throng  of  soldiers, 
he  ascended  the  steps  to  the  saloon  deck,  salut- 
ing and  passing  over  the  envelope. 

"Thank  you,  Sergeant/ 

"I  think  you'll  find  them  all  right,  sir.  I'm 
somewhat  new  at  the  work,  but  I've  taken  a  lot 
of  pains.' 

"There's  always  a  lot  of  pains  taken  with 
any  work  that  you  do,  Sergeant." 

"Thank  you,  sir." 

Hal  saluted  and  was  about  to  turn  away  when 
he  heard  a  voice  saying: 

"What  we  need,  in  dealing  with  the  Moros 
in  these  southern  islands,  is  to  show  them 
that " 

Just  then  the  speaker  happened  to  turn,  and 
stopped  talking  for  a  moment. 

The  voice  was  new,  but  Sergeant  Overton 
started  at  sight  of  the  speaker's  face. 

"Why,  that's  the  same  big,  florid-faced  fel- 
low that  I  saw  in  the  shed  with  Tomba,  that 
time  it  rained  so  hard,'  flashed  through  the 
young  sergeant's  astonished  mind.  "What  can 


46  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

lie  be  doing  here — a  cabin  passenger  on  a 
United  States  troop  ship!" 

Unconsciously  Hal  was  staring  hard  at  the 
stranger.  It  appeared  to  annoy  the  florid-faced 
man. 

"Well,  my  man,"  he  cried  impatiently,  look- 
ing keenly  at  Hal,  "are  you  waiting  to  say 
something  to  me?" 

"No,  sir,"  Sergeant  Hal  replied  quickly. 

"Perhaps  you  thought  you  knew  me?" 

"No,  sir;  I  merely  remembered  having  once 
seen  you." 

*  '  You  've  seen  me  before  f  Then  your  memory 
is  better  than  mine,  Sergeant.  Where  have  you 
ever  seen  me  before?" 

"The  other  afternoon,  sir,  on  the  south  side 
of  the  Pasig  River  at  Manila.  You  were  in  a 
shed,  out  of  the  rain,  with  a  native  calling  him- 
self Vicente  Tomba." 

The  florid-faced  man  betrayed  neither  un- 
easiness nor  resentment.  Instead,  he  smiled 
pleasantly  as  he  replied: 

"I  thought  you  were  in  error,  Sergeant,  and 
now  I'm  certain  of  it,  for  I  don't  know  any 
Vicente  Tomba." 

"Then  I  beg  your  pardon  for  the  mistake, 
sir,'  Hal  replied  quickly. 

"No  need  to  apologize,  Sergeant,  for  you  have 
done  no  harm, ' '  replied  the  florid-faced  man. 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  47 

Here  Captain  Cortland's  voice  broke  in,  cool 
and  steady: 

"Yet  I  know,  Mr.  Draney,  that  Sergeant 
Overton  feels  embarrassed  by  the  mere  fact  of 
his  having  made  a  mistake.  Sergeant  Overton 
is  one  of  our  best  and  most  capable  soldiers, 
and  he  rarely  makes  a  mistake  of  any  kind.' 

"I'm  glad  to  hear  that  he's  one  of  your  best 
soldiers, ' '  replied  Draney  pleasantly.  *  *  It  seems 
odd,  doesn't  it,  Captain,  to  see  so  boyish  a  chap 
wearing  sergeant's  chevrons  I9 

i  i  Sergeant  Overton,  Mr.  Draney,  is  more  than 
merely  a  sergeant.  He  is  acting  first  sergeant 
of  B  Company,  and  is  likely  to  continue  as  such 
for  some  months  to  come.' 

"He  has  risen  so  high!'  cried  Draney.  "I 
certainly  congratulate  the  young  man.' 

There  appeared  to  be  no  further  call  for  Hal 
to  remain  on  the  saloon  deck.  After  flashing 
an  inquiring  look  at  his  company  commander, 
and  saluting  that  officer,  Hal  next  raised  his 
uniform  cap  to  Draney,  then  turned  and  made 
his  way  down  to  the  spar  deck. 

"Your  sergeant  looks  like  a  very  upright 
young  man,  Captain,'  observed  Mr.  Draney. 

"Overton?'  rejoined  Captain  Cortland.  "I 
am  certain  that  he  is  the  soul  of  honor.' 

"His  loyalty  has  often  been  tested,  I  pre- 
sume?" persisted  the  florid-faced  fellow. 


48  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

"He's  a  very  thoroughly  trustworthy  young 
man,  if  that's  what  you  mean." 

Captain  Cortland  was  beginning  to  feel 
somewhat  annoyed,  for,  truth  to  tell,  he  did 
not  like  Draney  very  well. 

"Is  your  sergeant,"  asked  Draney,  "a  young 
man  much  interested  in  the  joys  of  life,  or  is 
he  of  the  quiet,  studious  sort  who  seldom  care 
for  good  times?' 

"You  seem  to  be  uncommonly  interested  in 
Sergeant  Overton,  Mr.  Draney,"  remarked  the 
captain  almost  testily. 

"Only  as  a  type  of  American  soldier,'  re- 
plied Draney  blandly.  "I  was  wondering  if 
my  estimate  of  the  young  man  were  borne  out 
by  your  experience  with  him.' 

"Sergeant  Overton  is  fond  of  the  joys  of 
life,  if  you  mean  the  quiet  and  decent  pleasures. 
He  is  a  good  deal  of  a  student,  and  that  type 
is  never  interested  in  drinking  or  gambling, 
or  any  of  the  vices  and  dissipations,  if  that  is 
what  you  mean.' 

Then,  noting  that  Colonel  North  had  just 
stepped  out  on  deck  from  his  stateroom,  Cap- 
tain Cortland  added  hastily: 

"Pardon  me;  I  wish  to  speak  with  the  com- 
manding officer." 

As  colonel  and  captain  met  they  exchanged 
salutes. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  49 

"I  told  Draney,  sir,  that  I  wished  to  speak 
with  you, ' '  Captain  Cortland  reported,  in  a  low 
voice.  "I  did  not  tell  him,  however,  that  I 
wished  to  speak  with  you  mainly  as  a  pretext 
for  getting  away  from  his  society/ 

"You  don't  like  Draney ?"  smiled  Colonel 
North,  eying  his  captain  shrewdly. 

"I  certainly  do  not,7    Cortland  confessed. 

"And  I'm  almost  as  certain  that  I  don't, 
either,"  replied  the  regimental  commander. 
"However,  Cortland,  we  shall  have  to  treat  him 
with  a  fair  amount  of  courtesy,  for  Draney  is 
an  influential  man  down  in  the  part  of  the 
world  for  which  we  are  headed.  He  is  influ- 
ential with  the  Moros,  I  mean.  Often  he  is  in 
a  position  to  give  the  military  authorities  use- 
ful information  of  intended  native  mischief. 
Draney  is  a  very  big  planter,  you  know,  and 
white  planters  are  somewhat  scarce  in  the  Moro 
country.  It  is  one  of  the  great  disappointments 
of  our  government  that  more  American  capital 
is  not  invested  in  establishing  great  plantations 
in  the  extremely  rich  Moro  country.  But,  as 
you  know,  Cortland,  some  of  the  Moro  dattos 
are  given  to  heading  sudden,  unexpected  and 
very  desperate  raids  on  white  planters,  and  that 
fact  has  discouraged  Americans,  Englishmen 
and  Germans  from  investing  millions  and  mil- 
lions of  capital  in  the  Moro  country.' 

4  4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


50  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

"Yet  the  fellow  Draney  is  a  planter  there, 
sir?" 

"Draney  owns  half  a  dozen  very  successful 
plantations." 

"And  is  he  never  molested  by  the  Moros, 
sir  I"  inquired  Captain  Cortland. 

"Never  enough  to  discourage  him  in  his  in- 
vestments. Eather  odd,  isn't  it,  Cortland?" 

"Very  odd,  indeed,  sir,"  replied  Captain 
Cortland  dryly. 

That  same  afternoon  Captain  Cortland,  after 
finishing  a  promenade  on  the  saloon  deck,  went 
forward,  descending  to  the  spar  deck.  There, 
under  the  awning,  he  came  upon  Sergeants  Hal 
and  Noll,  who  saluted  as  he  addressed  them. 

"Sergeant  Overton,"  began  the  captain  in  a 
low  tone,  "you  seemed,  this  forenoon,  to  feel 
a  good  deal  of  surprise  at  seeing  Mr.  Draney 
on  board." 

"I  was  surprised,  sir.' 
"Tell  me  what  you  know  about  the  man.' 
Sergeant  Hal  briefly  related  the  adventure 
that  he  and  Noll  had  had  with  Vicente  Tomba 
on  the  Escolta,   and  their  subsequent  meeting 
with  Tomba  and  Draney  on  the  south  side  of 
the  Pasig.     Hal  also  repeated  what  they  had 
overheard  Tomba  saying  to  Draney.    Hal  then 
described  the  flight  of  the  pair  in  the  quilez. 
"Yet  Draney  declares  that  he  never  heard 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  51 

* 

of  Tomba,'  said  the  captain  musingly. 
"Sergeant  Overton,  do  you  think  it  possible 
that  you  have  mistaken  Mr.  Draney  for  some- 
one else?" 

"It  may  be,  of  course,  sir,"  Hal  admitted. 
"But  I  hardly  believe  it  possible.  Besides,  I 
have  pointed  out  Mr.  Draney  to  Sergeant  Terry 
and  he  also  is  positive  that  it  is  the  same  man. ' 

At  that  moment  all  three  turned  to  look  for- 
ward. There  was  some  sort  of  commotion  going 
on  there.  It  proved,  however,  to  be  nothing 
but  the  herding  of  the  Filipino  passengers  on 
deck  near  the  bow,  while  one  of  the  regiment's 
officers  was  inspecting  their  quarters  below. 

The  three  officers  returned  to  their  conver- 
sation, but  presently  Hal  murmured: 

"Don't  look  immediately,  Noll,  but  presently 
take  a  passing  glance  at  the  Filipino  standing 
away  up  in  the  bow.  Tell  Captain  Cortland 
who  the  fellow  is." 

"It's  Vicente  Tomba,  although  I'd  hardly 
know  him  in  that  costume  of  the  peon 
(laborer),"  Noll  answered. 

"You  are  both  certain  that  the  man  is 
Tomba?"  inquired  Captain  Cortland  keenly. 

"Yes,  sir,'  both  young  sergeants  declared, 
and  Hal  added : 

"There's  Corporal  Hyman  up  forward,  sir. 
If  you'll  go  up  and  speak  to  the  corporal,  and 


52  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

allow  us  to  accompany  you,  sir,  you  can  see 
whether  Hyman  knows  the  fellow.  He,  too,  was 
approached  by  Tomba,  at  the  nipa  barracks/ 

Accordingly  the  test  was  made. 

"Why,  certainly,  the  fellow  is  Tomba,"  re- 
plied Hyman,  "though  he  looks  a  lot  different, 
sir,  from  the  dandy  who  was  talking  to  me  last 
Tuesday  night.' 

Captain  Cortland  asked  all  three  of  the  non- 
commissioned officers  some  further  questions  as 
they  stood  there.  None  of  the  quartette  dis- 
covered the  fact  that,  close  to  them,  crouching 
under  the  canvas  cover  of  a  life  boat  as  it  swung 
at  davits,  lay  one  of  the  keen-eyed  Filipino  pas- 
sengers. This  swarthy  little  fellow  was  only 
about  half  versed  in  English,  but  he  understood 
enough  of  the  talk  to  realize  what  was  in  the 
wind. 

In  some  mysterious  manner  what  this  swarthy 
little  spy  overheard  traveled,  less  than  an  hour 
later,  to  Mr.  Draney,  planter,  and  that  gentle- 
man, as  he  sat  in  his  stateroom  and  thought  it 
all  over,  was  greatly  disturbed. 

Still  later  that  afternoon — not  long  before 
sundown — while  the  "Warren"  was  still 
ploughing  her  way  through  the  sea,  the  little 
brown  spy  drew  Vicente  Tomba  to  one  side  in 
the  native  steerage. 

To  make  assurance  doubly  sure,  both  Fili- 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  53 

pinos  spoke  in  their  own  Malay  dialect,  the  Tag- 
alos. 

"Tomba!" 

"Luis!" 

"Tomba,  the  Senor  Draney  is  greatly  dis- 
turbed. Sergeant  Overton  and  Sergeant  Terry 
have  recognized  him  as  one  whom  they  saw  with 
you  in  Manila.7' 

"Bah!  That  amounts  to  little.  Senor 
Draney  can  deny." 

"But  they  have  recognized  you  also,  my 
Tomba,  and  so  has  Corporal  Hyman.  More, 
they  have  told  Captain  Cortland  all  they  know, 
and  all  they  can  guess. " 

"The  dogs!"  growled  Vicente  Tomba,  his 
snarl  showing  his  fine,  white  teeth. 

"You  do  well  to  call  them  dogs,"  grinned 
Luis.  "Senor  Draney  bids  me  to  remind  you 
what  becomes  of  dogs  that  are  troublesome. 
You  have  others  here  with  you  who  can  help. 
At  the  first  chance,  then,  Overton,  Terry  and 
Hyman  are  to  bite  the  bone  that  kills — and  Cap- 
tain Cortland,  too,  if  you  can  manage  it!" 


54  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 


CHAPTER  IV 

CERVERRA'S  INNOCENT  SHOP 

'YE  know  what  I'm  thinking  about?" 
demanded  Private  Kelly,  as  he  turned 
to   look   out    southward    from    Fort 
Benjamin  Franklin. 

"Not  being  a  mind  reader — no,"  replied  Hal. 
"I'm  thinking  this  country  is  a  fine  place  to 
dream  about." 

"It's  worth  it,"  declared  Sergeant  Overton, 
with  unsullied  boyish  enthusiasm. 

"Worth  it — huh!"  retorted  Kelly,  who  had 

•/   7 

served  longer  in  the  Army.  "Mind  ye,  I  said 
this  was  a  good  country  to  dream  about.  But 
to  live  in — give  me  *  God's  country.'  " 

The  United  States  soldier  on  foreign  service, 
invariably  alludes  to  home  in  this  way. 

Send  him  to  the  fairest  spot  on  which  the 
human  eye  ever  rested,  and  the  soldier  will  still 
longingly  speak  of  home  as  "God's  country." 

"Then  I'll  be  polite,"  retorted  Sergeant  Hal, 
^and  say  that  I  wish,  Kelly,  that  you  could  be 
at  home.  But  as  for  me,  I'm  glad  Irm  here." 

"Wait  until  you  are  in  your  third  enlistment, 
and  have  put  in  another  two  years  in  the  islands, 
after  this  time,"  growled  Kelly. 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  55 

"Why,  where  can  you  find  a  more  beautiful 
spot  than  this?"  demanded  Hal  Overton,  gaz- 
ing across  the  fields  toward  the  town  of  Bantoc. 
"I  never  saw  a  more  beautiful  spot.  I  wonder 
if  there  are  many  like  it  in  the  tropics?" 

"Beautiful?"  rumbled  Kelly.  "Sure!  But 
ye  can't  eat  beauty.  'Tis  a  long  way  from  any- 
where, this  spot,  and  that's  what  I've  got 
against  it.' 

"Grumbling  again,  Kelly?"  asked  Sergeant 
Noll  Terry,  joining  them. 

"Not  grumbling,'  retorted  Kelly.  "Just 
giving  my  opinion.  But  this  boy  sergeant  is 
trying  to  make  me  think  this  swamp  on  northern 
Mindanao  is  an  earthly  paradise.' 

"Well,  isn't  it?"  challenged  Noll.  "I  know 
what  ails  you,  Kelly.  When  all  is  peace  and 
comfort,  with  three  t squares'  a  day,  and  not  a 
heap  to  do,  your  old  soldier  is  always  kicking. 
But  just  send  you  and  the  rest,  Kelly,  hiking 
up  through  those  mountains  yonder,  give  you 
twenty  miles  a  day  of  rough  climbing,  drown 
you  out  with  rain  and  let  you  use  up  your  shoes 
chasing  a  lot  of  ugly  brown  men,  and  never  a 
kick  will  we  hear  coming  from  you. ' 

"Sure,  no,"  replied  Kelly  philosophically. 
"  'Tis  then  we'd  be  doing  a  soldier's  work,  and 
a  kicker  on  a  hike  is  as  useless  as  a  coffee-cooler 
at  an  afternoon  tea." 


56  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"In  other  words,'  laughed  Hal,  "a  real  sol- 
dier of  the  Regular  Army  is  as  patient  as  a 
camel  when  things  are  all  going  wrong.  The 
only  time  when  your  real  soldier  kicks  is  when 
he's  having  it  easy  and  is  too  comfortable  to 
be  patient.  Curious,  isn't  it!' 

"Oh,  well,   'tis  no  use  talking  to  you  two,' 
retorted  Private  Kelly,  shaking  his  head  and 
strolling  away.    "Ye've  not  seen  much  of  serv- 
ice yet." 

"That's  another  joke,"  laughed  Hal  in  a  low 
voice,  as  soon  as  Kelly  had  stepped  out  of  hear- 
ing. "Here's  a  man  like  Kelly,  with  fairly 
long  service  to  his  credit,  but  he's  a  private 
still,  and  probably  always  will  be.  If  the  colonel 
made  him  a  corporal,  Kelly  wouldn't  rest  until 
he  had  the  chevrons  taken  from  his  sleeve  so 
that  he  could  be  a  private  soldier  again.  Now 
you  and  I,  Noll,  work  like  blazes  all  the  time, 
and  win  our  promotion,  yet  Kelly  considers  us 
only  boys,  and  boys  who  don't  know  much, 
either.  Either  one  of  us  can  take  Kelly  out  in 
a  squad  and  work  him  until  he  runs  rivers  of 
perspiration,  and  he  can't  talk  back  without 
danger  of  being  disciplined.  Yet  all  the  time, 
Kelly,  under  our  orders,  is  thinking  of  us,  half 
contemptuously,  as  boys  who  don't  really  know 
anything  about  soldiering.' 

"That's  because  we're  young,"  laughed  Noll. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  57 

"And  because  we're  also  boyish  enough  to 
have  a  little  enthusiasm  left  in  our  make-ups. 
Noll,  how  do  you  really  like  our  new  station  ?' 

"I  wouldn't  be  anywhere  else/  retorted 
Sergeant  Terry,  "  except  some  where  else  in 
the  Philippines,  possibly.  One  of  the  prospects 
that  caught  me  for  the  service  was  the  chance 
of  seeing  some  of  our  foreign  possessions.' 

"It's  what  catches  half  the  young  fellows  who 
enlist  to-day, ' '  went  on  Hal.  "  I  've  been  looking 
forward  to  the  Philippines  from  the  day  I  first 
took  the  oath  in  the  recruiting  station.' 

"Well,  we're  here,"  replied  Noll,  breathing 
in  the  warm  air  with  lazy  satisfaction.  "And 
I'm  mighty  glad  that  we're  in  for  two  years 
of  it." 

The  Thirty-fourth  had  come  out  to  the  islands 

•/ 

as  a  complete  regiment.  They  had  reembarked 
at  Manila  also  as  a  regiment,  but  now  the  time 
had  come  when  "Ours'  was  well  scattered 
through  the  southern  islands  of  the  archipelago. 
The  second  battalion  and  headquarters,  with 
the  band,  had  disembarked  at  Iloilo;  two  com- 
panies had  been  left  on  the  island  of  Negros, 
and  two  more  on  Cebu.  B  and  C  Companies 
had  been  left  at  Fort  Franklin,  in  the  Misamis 
district  on  northern  Mindanao,  and  the  remain- 
ing two  companies  had  been  carried  on  to  Zam- 
boanga. 


58  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

On  its  return  trip  the  "Warren"  had  picked 
up  the  scattered  military  commands  which  the 
Thirty-fourth  had  relieved.  Two  companies  of 
the  Thirty-second  infantry  had  gone  from  Ban- 
toe  the  day  before. 

Mindanao  is  the  second  largest  and  the  most 
fertile  island  in  the  Philippine  group.  The 
natural  beauty  is  as  great  as  the  fertility.  If 
it  were  not  for  the  occasional  ferocity  of  some 
of  the  tribes  this  island  could  be  turned  into  one 
vast  net-work  of  plantations  as  rich  as  any  that 
the  world  can  show. 

Bantoc  was  a  sleepy,  sunlit  little  town,  half 
Spanish  and  half  Moro.  Thanks  to  American 
rule,  the  streets  were  clean  and  order  reigned. 
There  were  about  forty  stores  and  other  mer- 
cantile establishments  in  Bantoc,  for  this  town 
was  headquarters  for  a  large  country  district. 
The  people  of  Bantoc,  outside  of  the  small  white 
population,  were  more  than  half  Moros,  the 
other  islanders  belonging  to  the  Tagalo  and 
other  allied  tribes.  Almost  without  exception 
these  people  were  lazy  and  good-natured.  A 
newcomer  would  have  difficulty  in  believing  that 
such  men  as  he  met  in  Bantoc  could  ever  give 
the  soldiers  trouble.  It  was  to  this  town  that 
the  few  planters  and  many  small  native  farmers 
sent  rich  stores  of  rice,  cocoa,  hemp,  cotton, 
indigo  and  costly  woods. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  59 

There  was  also  the  port  of  Bantoc,  through 
which  these  products  were  sent  out  to  do  their 
part  in  the  world's  commerce. 

The  native  leaders  of  the  population  of  Ban- 
toe  were  wealthy  little  brown  men.  There  was 
much  money  in  circulation,  the  leading  Moros 
and  Tagalos  having  handsome  homes  and  enter- 
taining lavishly.  There  was  a  native  fashion- 
able set,  just  as  exclusive  and  autocratic  as  any 
that  exists  in  a  white  man's  country. 

Fort  Franklin  overlooked  the  bay  at  the  op- 
posite end  from  the  port.  Yet  it  was  a  "fort' 
only  in  being  a  military  station.  There  was  no 
artillery  here,  and  the  only  fortifications  were 
semi-permanent  earthworks,  fronted  by  ditches, 
thrown  up  around  the  officers'  quarters  and  the 
barracks  and  other  buildings.  The  parade 
ground  and  recreation  spaces  were  outside  these 
very  ordinary  fortifications. 

"The  whole  scene  looks  too  peacefully  lazy 
to  match  with  the  yarns  we  hear  of  trouble 
breeding  among  the  Moros  in  those  mountains 
yonder,"  remarked  Hal  musingly. 

"If  trouble  is  coming,  I  hope  it  will  come 
soon,"  returned  Sergeant  Noll.  "The  only  one 
thing  that  I  have  against  our  life  out  here  is 
that  it  threatens  to  become  too  lazy  an  ex- 
istence. If  there's  going  to  be  any  active  serv- 
ice for  us,  I  want  to  see  it  happen  soon,  for 


60  UNCLE ,  SAM'S   BOYS 

active  service  is  what  I  came  to  the  Philip- 
pines for,  anyway,  as  far  as  I  had  any  interest 
in  the  trip." 

"From  the  gossip  of  the  town  and  barracks, 
I  think  we'll  have  our  trouble  soon  enough," 
Hal  replied.  "You  have  fatigue  duty  this  after- 
noon, haven't  you,  Noll?" 

"Yes;  thanks  to  your  detail,"  replied  Noll. 

"But  I  couldn't  help  the  detail,  old  fellow. 
Fatigue  was  for  you  in  your  turn.  I  'm  sorry  it 
came  to  you  to-day,  though,  for  Pve  a  pass  and 
I'm  going  to  run  over  into  Bantoc.  I  want  to 
see  more  of  that  queer  little  town." 

"Going  to  be  back  for  parade!" 

"Yes;  my  pass  extends  only  to  parade.  I 
never  want  to  miss  that  when  I  can  help  it." 

Hal  glanced  at  his  watch,  then  back  at  bar- 
racks, where  hardly  a  soldier  showed  himself, 
for  all  had  caught  the  spirit  of  indolence  in 
this  hot,  moist  climate  of  Mindanao. 

"Well,  I  must  be  going,  Noll.  Don't  work 
your  fatigue  party  too  hard  until  the  men  get 
used  to  this  heat." 

' '  Small  danger  ot  my  working  'em  too  hard, ' 9 
laughed  Noll.  "It's  only  as  a  sort  of  special 
favor  that  the  fellows  will  work  at  all. ' ' 

Hal,  with  a  nod  to  his  chum,  stepped  out 
on  to  fhe  hard,  level,  white  road  that  led  from 
Fort  Franklin  to  Bantoc. 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  61 

It  was  a  pretty  road,  shaded  at  points  by 
beautiful  palms;  yet  the  shade  was  not  suffi- 
cient to  protect  the  young  soldier  all  the  way 
into  town.  Ere  he  had  gone  far  he  found 
it  necessary  to  carry  his  damp  handkerchief  in 
one  hand,  prepared  to  rnop  his  steaming  face. 

"Mindanao  is  certainly  some  hot,'  he  mut- 
tered. "It  keeps  a  fellow  steaming  all  the 
time.' 

Yet  there  was  plenty  to  divert  one's  thoughts 
from  himself,  for  along  this  road  lay  some  of 
the  prettiest  small  farms  to  be  found  on  north- 
ern Mindanao.  Instead  of  farms  they  really 
looked  more  like  well-kept  gardens. 

"It's  the  finest  spot  in  the  world  to  be  lazy 
in, '  thought  the  young  sergeant,  as  he  glanced 
here  and  there  over  the  charming  scene.  "If  I 
settled  down  here  for  life  I'd  want  money 
enough  to  pay  other  fellows  to  do  all  the  work 
for  me. ' ' 

Though  Hal  did  not  know  it,  from  the  window 
of  one  room  in  a  house  that  he  passed  a  pair 
of  unusually  bright,  keen  eyes  glared  out  at 
him. 

"That  is  he,  the  sergente,  Overt  on,"  growled 
Vicente  Tomba  to  himself.  "Since  we  have 
Senor  Draney's  orders  that  the  sergente  is  to 
leave  this  life  as  soon  as  possible,  why  not  to- 
day? He  is  going  to  Bantoc,  where  it  will  be 


62  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

easy  to  snare  him.  And  his  friend  Terry  is 
not  with  him.  That  pair,  back  to  back,  might 
put  up  a  hard  fight — but  one  alone  should  be 
easy  for  our  ~bravos.  Then,  another  day,  we 
can  plan  to  get  the  Sergente  Terry. " 

Hal  was  not  quite  in  Bantoc  when  a  Tagalo 
on  a  pony  rode  by  him  at  a  gallop.  Hal  glanced 
at  the  fellow  indolently,  but  did  not  recognize 
him,  as  it  was  not  Tomba,  but  one  of  that 
worthy's  messengers. 

Up  and  down  the  principal  street  Sergeant 
Overton  wandered.  He  glanced  into  shops, 
though  only  idly,  for  to-day  he  was  not  on  a 
buying  mission. 

At  last  the  cool-looking  interior  of  a  little 
restaurant  attracted  him.  He  entered,  ordering 
aL  ice  cream.  When  this  was  finished  he  ate 
another.  It  was  so  restful,  sitting  here,  that 
when  he  had  disposed  of  the  second  order,  he 
paid  his  account  but  did  not  rise  at  once. 

"The  sergente  is  newly  arrived  here?"  asked 
a  white-clad  Filipino,  rising  from  another  table 
and  joining  Overton. 

"Yes." 

"Then  you  have  not  seen  much  of  Bantoc?" 
asked  the  Filipino,  speaking  in  Spanish. 

"Not  as  much  as  I  mean  to  see  of  the  town," 
Hal  answered  in  the  same  tongue. 

v  *  Then  possibly,  Senor  Sergente,  you  have  not 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  63 

yet  seen  the  collection  of  ancient  Moro  weapons 
in  the  shop  of  Juan  Cerverra.' 

"I  haven't,"  Hal  admitted. 

' i  Then  you  have  missed  much,  senor,  but  you 
will  no  doubt  go  to  see  the  collection  one  of 
these  days.77 

"I'd  like  to.    Where  is  the  shop?" 

"Four  doors  below  here.  If  you  have  time, 
Senor  Sergente,  I  am  walking  that  way  and  will 
show  you  the  place.' 

"Thank  you;  I'll  be  glad  to  go,'  answered 
Hal,  rising  promptly.  His  was  the  profession 
of  arms,  and  a  display  of  any  unfamiliar 
weapons  was  sure  to  attract  the  young  sergeant. 

Juan  Oerverra,  despite  his  Spanish-sounding 
name,  proved  to  be  a  full-blooded  Moro.  He 
wore  his  Moro  costume,  with  its  tight-fitting 
trousers  and  short,  embroidered  blouse.  There 
were  no  customers  in  the  shop  when  Hal  and 
his  Tagalo  acquaintance  entered. 

In  another  moment  Sergeant  Hal  was  deeply 
absorbed  in  several  wall  cases  of  swords  and 
knives,  all  of  them  of  old-time  patterns.  It 
was  a  sight  that  would  have  bewildered  a  lover 
and  collector  of  curios  of  past  ages. 

One  case  was  filled  entirely  with  fine  speci- 
mens of  that  once-dreaded  weapon,  the  Moro 
"campilan."  This  is  a  straight  sword,  usually, 
with  a  very  heavy  blade,  which  gradually  widens 


64  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

i 

towards  the  end.  This  is  a  heavy  cutting  sword, 
and  one  that  was  placed  in  Sergeant  Hal's 
hands,  though  Cerverra  claimed  that  it  was 
two  hundred  years  old,  had  an  edge  like  a 
razor. 

"How  much  is  such  a  sword  as  this?'  Hal 
inquired. 

' '  Forty  dollars, ' '  replied  Cerverra. 

"Gold?" 

"No;   Hex." 

Hal  felt  almost  staggered  with  the  cheapness 
of  things  here,  as  compared  with  the  curio  stores 
in  Manila.  Forty  dollars  "Mex"  meant  but 
about  twenty  dollars  in  United  States  currency. 

"I  have  some  cheaper  ones,'  went  on  Cer- 
verra. "Here  is  one  at  eighteen  dollars.' 

"I'm  going  to  have  one  of  these  campilan,' 
Hal  told  himself. 

In  his  interest  he  did  not  note  that  the  Tagalo 
who  had  brought  him  to  the  shop  had  left  him 
and  was  standing  on  the  sidewalk  outside. 

"Are  you  interested  in  these  creeses?'  in- 
quired Cerverra,  passing  down  the  shop  and 
pointing  to  another  wall  case. 

The  creese  is  an  ancient  Malay  knife,  with  a 
waved,  snaky  blade — a  weapon  with  which  the 
Malay  pirates  of  the  past  used  to  do  fearful 
execution. 

Hal  stepped  before  the  wall  case. 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  65 

"They  are  very  interesting  looking,'  he  re- 
plied. "What  does  a  good  creese  cost?' 

The  young  sergeant  did  not  wait  for  an  an- 
swer. 

Click!  A  spring  bolt  on  the  under  side  of 
a  trap  door  on  which  he  was  standing  shot  out 
of  place. 

Down  dropped  the  trap  door  with  such  sud- 
denness that  Hal  Overton  did  not  have  even 
time  to  clutch  at  anything. 

Then  the  trap  door,  relieved  of  his  weight, 
flew  back  into  place. 

Sergeant  Hal  shot  down  a  steep  incline,  too 
smooth  for  him  to  be  able  to  stay  his  downward 
progress. 


CHAPTER  V 

ENOUGH  TO  "  RATTLE ''    THE  VICTIM 

UMP ! 

Sergeant  Hal  landed  at  least  twenty 
feet  below  with  a  suddenness  that  jarred 
all  the  breath  out  of  him  for  a  moment. 

Ere  he  could  recover  his  half-scattered 
senses  he  felt  himself  seized.  Nor  had  the  Army 
boy  fallen  into  one  pair  of  hands.  Four  or 
five  men,  as  nearly  as  he  could  judge,  seized 
hold  of  different  parts  of  his  body. 

Uncle  Sanfs  Boys. 


66  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

There  was  little  use  in  a  prostrate  youth  fight- 
ing against  such  odds.  Hal  was  swiftly  rolled 
over  on  to  his  face,  in  the  dark,  and  two  of  his 
captors  threw  themselves  upon  him,  holding  him 
down. 

At  the  same  time  another  thrust  an  armful 
of  hemp  under  his  face,  holding  it  close  against 
Ms  mouth. 

Then  the  light  of  a  dark  lantern  was  flashed 
on  the  scene.  With  the  speed  of  skilled  hands 
at  the  game  these  brown-skinned  captors  bound 
the  young  sergeant  hand  and  foot. 

"Quit  this!"  Sergeant  Overton  tried  to  shout 
angrily,  but  the  wad  of  hemp  was  forced  be- 
tween his  teeth  and  only  a  faint  sound  came 
forth. 

"Help!'  he  tried  to  shout,  but  the  sound 
came  hardly  louder  than  a  sigh. 

Now  he  was  whirled  over  on  his  back,  help- 
less, and  two  of  the  brown  rascals  finished  their 
work  by  thrusting  the  hemp  far  enough  into 
Ms  mouth  to  shut  off  all  speech.  Then  the  gag 
was  bound  into  place. 

Hal  could  form  little  idea  of  his  prison,  save 
that  it  was  an  oblong,  cellar-like  place,  perhaps 
a  dozen  feet  wide  by  twenty  feet  long. 

As  nearly  as  the  Army  boy  could  guess,  this 
cellar  must  be  located  under  the  street  itself. 

"They  Ve  got  me  for  fair,"  thought  the  young 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  67 

soldier  in  a  rage  that  included  himself  as  well 
as  Ms  captors.  "What's  their  game,  I  wonder? 
Robbery?  If  it  is,  they'll  feel  sold  when  they 
find  how  little  money  they  are  going  to  get." 

By  the  light  of  the  dark  lantern,  as  he  lay 
on  his  back  on  the  damp  ground,  Hal  made  out 
the  fact  that  his  captors  numbered  eight.  Five 
men  had  the  look  and  wore  the  costumes  of 
Moros ;  the  other  three  rascals  looked  as  though 
they  might  be  Tagalos. 

One  after  another  the  wretches  looked  down 
at  the  young  soldier  and  grinned,  though  not 
one  of  them  spoke. 

Of  a  sudden  the  light  went  out.  Hal,  his  ears 
unusually  acute  now,  heard  their  moving  foot- 
steps. Then  all  became  intensely  still. 

"I  wonder  whether  I'm  a  tremendously  big 
fool,  or  whether  I'm  merely  unfortunate!" 
thought  Hal  bitterly.  "However,  how  was  I 
to  guess  ?  In  this  Moro  country  must  it  be  con- 
sidered unsafe  even  to  step  into  a  store  and 
look  at  the  merchandise0?' 

There  was  no  answer  to  this.  By  degrees 
Hal  began  to  feel  decidedly  uncomfortable  as 
to  the  fate  that  he  might  expect. 

"If  they  meant  only  to  rob  me,"  he  reflected, 
"then  why  didn't  they  proceed  at  once?  But 
not  a  single  brown  rascal  of  the  lot  took  the 
trouble  to  thrust  an  exploring  hand  into  my 


68  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

pockets.    What,  then?    Do  they  want  an  Army 
prisoner,  and  if  so,  for  what!" 

The  longer  the  young  soldier  thought  it  over, 
the  greater  the  puzzle  became.  Nor  did  it 
escape  his  imagination  that  possibly  he  was  not 
to  be  allowed  ever  to  see  his  comrades  again. 
That  thought,  of  course,  sent  a  chill  of  horror 
chasing  up  and  down  young  Overtones  spine. 
He  was  not  afraid  to  die  in  battle,  if  need  be — 
but  to  be  treated  like  a  rat  in  a  trap — that  was 
different. 

"Well,  they've  got  me,  and  I  don't  see  any 
likelihood  of  getting  away,'  decided  Hal  at 
last,  after  fully  an  hour  devoted  largely  to  futile 
efforts  to  wriggle  out  of  the  bonds  that  held  his 
wrists  secure  behind  his  back.  "These  knots 
have  been  tied  by  masters.  I  don't  believe  I 
could  get  out  of  them  in  hours.  If  they  had 
only  tied  my  hands  in  front  of  me,  so  that  I 
could  work  them  loose.  Confound  the  pirates ! ' ' 

After  what  seemed  like  the  passage  of  hours, 
the  boy  heard  a  slight  sound.  Listening  in- 
tently, he  heard  it  repeated. 

Next  a  light  was  turned  on — from  the  same 
dark  lantern. 

Behind  the  light  Hal's  dazzled  eyes  could 
make  out  the  figure  of  a  man. 

Toward  him  the  light  came,  Hal  blinking  in 
the  glare  until  the  newcomer  halted  beside  him. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  69 

"Ah,  Senor  Sergente!"  cried  a  mocking 
voice. 

Then  the  new  comer  bent  over  the  Army  boy, 
and  Overton  knew  him  in  an  instant — Vicente 
Tomba. 

"That  hemp  in  your  mouth  looks  as  though 
it  might  give  you  discomfort — a  thousand 
pardons/'  observed  Tomba  mockingly,  as  he 
removed  the  cord  that  held  the  hemp  in  place. 

Tomba  now  squatted  on  the  ground  beside 
the  young  soldier's  head  and  drew  out  the  wt.d 
of  hemp. 

"So  you  are  in  this,  Tomba?'  inquired  the 
Army  boy  coldly.  "What's  the  game,  any- 
way?" 

"Possibly,"  sneered  the  Filipino,  "when  you 
know  more,  you  '11  feel  like  making  a  noise.  Let 
me  assure  you  that  no  friend  will  hear  if  you 
do  call.  But  any  great  amount  of  noise  on  your 
part  might  provoke  me,  and  that  would  not 
be  wise  under  the  circumstances." 

Showing  his  white,  even  teeth  in  an  evil  smile, 
Tomba  took  out  of  the  breast  of  his  blouse  a 
small,  bright-bladed  creese  that  might  have  been 
borrowed  from  one  of  the  wall  cases  in  Cer- 
verra's  shop. 

"Why  has  this  trick  been  played  on  me?"  de- 
manded Sergeant  Hal  angrily. 

"A  trick?"  laughed  Tomba  softly.     "Is  that 


70  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

what  you  think  it  is?  My  friend,  you  will  find 
that  it  is  much  more  than  a  trick — it  is  a  de- 
cree!" 

"A  decree?"  raged  Sergeant  Overton. 
"What  do  you  mean?" 

"It  is  a  decree  from  Senor  Draney,'  went 
on  Tomba  coldly,  maliciously.  "It  can  do  no 
harm  to  mention  that  name  since  you  can  never 
repeat  it  to  anyone  but  me,  for  Senor  Draney's 
decree  is  that,  when  you  go  forth  from  here — 
to-night — you  will  know  nothing  afterwards,  for 
you  will  be  past  knowing." 


CHAPTER  VI 

LIFE   HANGS   ON   A  WORD 

OU  are  talking  like  a  madman,"  sneered 
Hal. 

"And  next  you  will  be  begging  like 
one,"  returned  Tomba,  with  that  same  easy 
but  deadly  laugh. 

Hal,  despite  his  grit,  felt  a  start  of  terror. 

Cold  sweat  was  now  gathering  on  his  forehead. 

"You  refused  my  friendship  some  days  ago," 

continued  Tomba.     "You  did  not  know  how 

valuable  it  might  be.' 

"Can  the  friendship  of  a  scoundrel  like  you 
ever  be  valuable?"  asked  Overton. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  71 

"In  the  present  case  it  would  be  worth  a  lit- 
tle to  you — your  life!' 

"What  did  you  want  of  me,  when  you  sought 
my  acquaintance?'  demanded  Hal. 

He  had  suddenly  become  seized  with  a  desire 
to  prolong  the  talk  with  this  little  brown  monster 
-to  gain  time ! 

"There  was  something  that  you  could  have 
done  for  me,7  replied  Vicente  Tomba. 

The  Tagalo,  like  others  of  his  race,  was  not 
averse  to  talking,  either.  The  little  Filipino 
knew  that  he  had  the  whole  situation  in  his 
hands.  With  the  cruelty  of  a  cat,  Tomba  de- 
lighted in  the  feline'  pastime  of  playing  with  a 
victim  that  could  not  escape  him. 

"What  did  you  want  me  to  do?"  Hal  asked 
almost  blandly. 

"I  wanted  your  services." 

"Yes,  but  what  kind  of  services?" 

"What  is  the  use  of  telling  you — now?9 

"Tell  me  one  thing,  though,  Tomba." 

"Why?" 

"Just  to  gratify  my  curiosity,"  explained 
Sergeant  Hal,  and  he  spoke  slowly  while  his 
eyes  watched  those  of  the  Filipino.  "Did  you 
want  me  to  betray  my  Flag?" 

"Not  the  Flag  itself." 

"But,  in  some  way,  you  wanted  me  to  turn 
against  my  comrades — to  serve  you  and  your 


72  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

friends   at  the  expense   of  the  United   States 
Government. ' 

"Yes/  assented  Tomba.  "But  do  not  think 
to  deceive  me.  It  is  too  late  now  to  save  your- 
self by  promising  what  I  would  have  wanted 
of  vou." 

v 

"I  don't  intend  to  serve  you  and  your  rascal 
friends  at  any  price — at  least,  I  haven't  yet 
come  to  that  decision,"  Hal  added,  in  a  more 
conciliatory  tone.  "However,  I  am  curious.' 

"Curiosity  can  do  you  no  good  now,"  re- 
torted Tomba  softly,  with  a  shrug  of  his  shoul- 
ders. 

"What  part  is  Draney  playing  with  you 
brown-skinned  men  1 ' 

Tomba  again  shrugged  his  shoulders,  this 
time  more  mockingly. 

"Sefior  Draney  serves  the  same  cause  that 
I  do,'  laughed  the  Filipino. 

"And  what  cause  is  that!' 

"His  purse.' 

"Then,  in  other  words,  Tomba,  you  are  not 
even  a  Filipino  patriot.  You  are  merely  a 
twentieth-century  type  of  pirate.' 

"If  you  like  the  word,"  replied  Tomba,  in  a 
tone  of  indifference. 

Then  he  yawned — next  placed  the  creese  on 
the  ground  beside  him,  while  his  right  hand  ex- 
plored his  pockets.  He  soon  brought  to  light 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  73 

a  package  of  Manila  cigarettes.     Tomba's  left 
hand  produced  a  box  of  matches. 

4 'Do  you  care  for  one  last  smoke,  Senor 
Sergente  I '  inquired  the  Filipino  with  mocking 
politeness,  as  he  held  out  the  package. 

"Thank  you;    I  never  picked  up  the  vice,' 
Sergeant  Hal  answered,  but  he  said  it  good- 
naturedly,  for  he  had  an  object  now  in  not  pro- 
voking the  enemy. 

"So?     You  call  smoking  a  vice?" 

"The  vice  of  pigs/  declared  Hal,  but  again 
he  laughed  good-humoredly. 

"Oh,  I  do  not  mind  your  insolence,'  replied 
Tomba,  striking  a  match  and  holding  it  to  the 
end  of  the  cigarette  in  his  mouth.  "Abuse  me 
all  you  please,  Sefior  Sergente. ' 

' '  Thank  you ! " 

V 

Hal  had  had  a  desperate  motive  in  gaining 
time  by  prolonging  the  talk.  As  he  lay  on  his 
side  before  the  Filipino  the  young  soldier  had 
at  last  employed  his  fingers  in  a  way  that  he 
hoped  would  lead  to  his  being  able  to  free  his 
hands.  And  now  the  instant  had  come!  His 
hands  were  free! 

As  he  uttered  that  "thank  you,'  Sergeant 
Overton  suddenly  summoned  all  the  muscles  in 
his  body  to  obey  him  in  one  frantic  effort  for 
safety  and  freedom. 

Like  a  flash  he  rolled,  both  of  his  bound  feet 


74  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

kicking  Vicente  Tomba  and  bowling  over  that 
astounded  little  brown  man. 

Like  lightning  the  Army  boy  reached  for  the 
creese,  and  the  finish  of  that  general  movement 
found  Sergeant  Hal  Overton  sitting  up  and  aim- 
ing a  desperate  slash  at  the  cord  about  his 
ankles. 

It  needed  a  second  slash,  and  in  that  fleeting 
interval  Vicente  Tomba,  uttering  a  wild  cry  of 
rage,  hurled  himself  upon  the  Army  boy. 

Hal  Overton  had  now,  however,  entire  control 
of  his  body.  He  engaged  with  the  little  brown 
man  in  a  desperate  struggle.  Over  and  over 
they  rolled,  the  Army  boy  controlling  the  battle 
and  carrying  them  both  further  from  the  creese 
that  he  had  dropped  on  the  ground. 

Then,  all  in  an  instant,  Hal  freed  his  right 
hand,  clenched  his  fist  and  struck  Tomba  a  stag- 
gering blow  between  the  eyes. 

When  Tomba  came  to  himself  again,  after 
a  few  moments,  he  found  the  youth  in  Uncle 
Sam's  Army  uniform  leaning  over  him. 

"I  have  the  creese,  Tomba,"  warned  Overton. 
"You  can  guess  what  a  sound  or  a  move  that 
is  not  permitted  will  mean  to  you!' 

To  do  his  courage  full  justice,  Tomba  showed 
himself  no  coward. 

"You  have  the  upper  hand,  Seiior  Sergente. 
But  it  will  do  vou  no  good." 

•/  o 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  75 

"No?"  questioned  Uncle  Sam's  young  sol- 
dier. "Why  not?" 

"There  is  but  one  way  out  of  here.' 

"And  then!" 

"To  pass  out  that  way  you  must  go  by  a 
dozen  of  my  men,  and  you  can  judge  for  your- 
self what  that  will  mean.' 

"Yes;  I  have  an  idea,"  nodded  Hal  thought- 
fully. 

"Then  you  see  the  folly  of  thinking  you  can 
escape  ? ' 

"No;  I  am  thinking  that  your  men  will  be 
able  to  get  me. ' 

"To  be   sure." 

i  i  Yet  I  am  quick,  Tomba,  and  before  they  can 
finish  me,  I  shall  have  settled  my  score  with 
you  for  good  and  all.' 

"And  thrown  awav  vour  own  life?" 

V  «/ 

"You  forget  that  I  am  a  soldier,  Tomba. 
I  am  inclined  to  feel  that  it  will  be  worth  even 
my  own  life  to  make  sure  that  you  are  where 
you  can  no  longer  plot  against  the  American 
Government. ' 

"But  your  own  life,  Senor  Sergente?' 

"Mv  own  life  is  less  than  worthless  to  me 

V 

if  I  may  be  permitted  to  lose  it  in  doing  one 
last  valuable  act  for  the  Flag  of  my  country.' 

"You  are  boasting  now!' 

"As  to  that.  Tomba,  you  will  soon  be  in  a 

7  7        •/ 


76  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

position  to  know.  And  I  warn  you  that  the 
slightest  sign  of  treachery  on  your  part  will 
be  my  excuse  for  ridding  these  islands  of  the 
disgrace  of  your  presence. " 

"You  are  attempting  too  much/'  jeered  the 
little  brown  man.  "I  see  and  I  admit  that  you 
are  brave,  yet  you  are  bound  to  lose." 

"The  time  for  talking  is  past,  Tomba,  and 
now  we  come  to  action,"  returned  the  Army 
boy,  speaking  slowly  and  easily.  "Come,  get 
upon  your  feet  and  obey  every  order  of  mine 
the  instant  that  you  receive  it.  In  another  min- 
ute or  two  you  and  I  will  be  in  the  sunlight 
again — or  else  you  and  I  have  both  already 
had  our  last  glimpse  of  the  light  of  day. 

Tomba  smiled,  though  he  felt  the  mastery  of 
this  young  wearer  of  Uncle  Sam's  uniform. 

' '  Get  up  on  your  feet, ' '  ordered  Hal.  ' '  Stand 
right  before  me,  your  back  to  me.  Do  you  feel 
the  point  of  the  creese?" 

"Yes,'  answered  Tomba  in  a  low  voice, 
though  the  brown  man  spoke  steadily. 

"You  will  walk  before  me,  very  slowly.  "If 
you  attempt  to  turn,  or  to  disobey,  I  shall  know 
what  to  do  with  this  wavy-bladed  creese.  If 
you  make  a  move  to  spring  away  from  me,  I 
shall  show  you  how  good  a  jumper  I  am — and 
then  the  creese!  Now,  walk,  very  slowly, 
toward  the  exit  from  this  place." 


Steady,  Now,  Tomba! 

77 


T1IK  M<:\Y  YMIK 


ASTOtt,  LKNOX 
TILDiiN 
B 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  79 

As  they  started  Hal  held  the  lantern  with  his 
left  hand  so  that  the  rays  of  light  flashed  ahead 
of  them. 

Vicente  Tomba  walked  to  the  far  end  of  this 
•underground  room.  As  far  as  young  Overton's 
eyes  could  see  they  were  moving  toward  a  blank 

wall. 

"Halt!"  commanded  the  young  sergeant 
easily. 

Tomba  obeyed. 

"You  are  taking  me  to  a  secret  door!" 

"It  is  so,  senor.' 

"And  you  know  how  to  open  it!' 

"Yes;   it  is  simple.' 

"Then  step  to  the  door.     But,  Tomba!" 

"Si,  senor." 

"Do  not  let  any  wild  plan  run  through  your 
mind  that  you  will  open  the  door  suddenly,  bolt 
through  it  and  close  it  in  my  face.  Do  you 
still  feel  the  creese!  Well,  I  am  on  the  alert!' 

In  truth  that  had  been  Vicente  Tornba  's  very 
plan.  Now  he  gave  up  the  idea,  for  Sergeant 
Hal's  tone  and  manner  made  it  very  plain  that 
treachery  would  prove  but  another  name  for 
suicide. 

' '  Then  look  out,  Senor  Sergente,  that  when  I 
open  the  door  there  is  no  rush  on  the  part  of 
my  brave  ones. ' 

"Whether  you  or  they  plan  the  rush,  it  will 


80  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

be  the  end  of  the  world  for  you,  Tomba, ' '  Over- 
ton  warned  him  steadily. 

"I  will  do  my  best,  senor,"  replied  Tomba 
in  a  voice  well  nigh  as  steady  as  the  Army  boy's. 

Then  he  bent  forward,  pressing  until  he  found 
a  hidden  spring.  In  the  seemingly  solid  stone 
wall  a  large  block  of  stone  swung  around  on  a 
pivot,  disclosing  a  larger  cellar  room  beyond. 

"Steadv,  now,  Tomba!" 

«/    7 

Sergeant  Overton  flashed  the  lantern's  rays 
over  the  Filipino's  left  shoulder. 

Nor  was  it  a  reassuring  sight  that  the  light  of 
the  lantern  revealed  to  the  young  soldier. 

Instead  of  a  dozen  brown-skinned  men  in  the 
next  room,  there  were  eight*  if  Hal's  hurried 
count  was  correct.  Moreover,  he  believed  them 
to  be  the  same  eight  who  had  first  received  and 
bound  him. 

The  most  disquieting  fact,  however,  was  that 
five  of  the  men  wore  revolvers  at  their  belts, 
and  a  pistol  usually  has  a  knife  at  a  disad- 
vantage. 

"Explain  to  them,  Tomba,"  muttered  the 
young  soldier  in  English,  "that  any  move  of 
your  own,  or  any  move  of  theirs  to  help  you, 
will  be  expensive  for  you.  Warn  them,  for  I 
am  watching  all  the  rascals  at  once  and  I  shall 
not  endure  an  instant's  treachery  or  disobedi- 
ence of  my  orders." 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  81 

Tomba  spoke  to  them  rapidly,  partly  in  the 
Tagalo  and  partly  in  the  Aloro  dialect.  Ser- 
geant Hal  listened,  watched,  waited  in  keen 
anxiety,  for  life  and  death  hung  on  the  issue. 


CHAPTER  VII 

THE    KIND    OF    MAN    WHO    MASTERS    OTHERS 

EVERY    one    of    the    eight    sullen    fellows 
stood  as  though  rooted  in  his  tracks. 

While  Tomba  spoke  none  answered, 
but  many  baleful  glances  were  cast  at  Sergeant 
Hal  Overton  of  the  Thirty-fourth  Infantry. 

When  Tomba  had  ceased  speaking  two  or 
three  of  the  rascals  spoke,  slowly,  briefly. 

"What  do  the  scoundrels  say!"  demanded 
the  Army  boy. 

"They  do  not  like  the  situation,  senor." 

"Can  you  blame  them?  Or  can  they  help 
the  situation  in  the  new  turn  that  it  has  taken  1 ' ' 

The  Filipino  shrugged  his  shoulders. 

"Well,  ask  the  brown  pirates  what  they  in- 
tend to  do  ? '  > 

Tomba  spoke  as  though  translating  the  ques- 
tion into  the  two  tongues  that  these  surly  fellows 
understood. 

"They  say  that  they  do  not  know,'  replied 
Vicente  Tomba  presently. 

i  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


82  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

" Can't  make  up  their  minds,  eh?"  jeered  Hal. 
"Then  I'll  form  their  decisions  for  them. 
There's  a  further  way  out  of  this  place?" 

Vicente  Tomba  hesitated,  muttering. 

"Now,  don't  you  try  my  old  trick  of  trying 
to  gain  time,'  warned  the  boyish  sergeant 
crisply.  "I  know  all  about  that  little  trick  and 
I  don't  intend  to  put  up  with  it  in  the  enemy. 
Tomba,  tell  your  fellows  to  open  the  way  out 
of  here,  and  to  get  out  as  quickly  as  they  know 
how.  Tell  them  that,  as  soon  as  you  stop  talk- 
ing, I'm  going  to  begin  to  count  ten  in  English, 
and  that  the  instant  I  count  ten  I  shall  drive 
this  creese  deep  into  the  back  of  your  neck. 
Tell  them  that  I  know  how  to  handle  a  weapon 
like  this,  and  that  I'll  finish  you  with  one 
blow. ' ' 

As  he  spoke,  Sergeant  Hal  dropped  the 
lantern  that  he  had  been  holding  with  his  left 
hand.  It  fell  with  a  crash,  and  the  light  went 
out,  but  he  needed  it  no  longer,  for  there  were 
two  other  lighted  lanterns  in  the  room. 

"Go  on,  Tomba!  Tell  them  just  what  I  told 
you  to  say.  Be  sure  you  get  it  straight,  too. 
Eemember  how  much  hangs  in  the  balance  for 
you!' 

Tomba  began  speaking,  his  voice  wonderfully 
steady.  Sergeant  Hal  could  not  help  admiring 
the  evident  courage  of  this  little  Filipino,  who 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  83 

knew  well  enough  that  his  life  was  hanging  on 
a  thread  from  second  to  second. 

HaPs  left  hand  now  rested  tightly  on  the  lit- 
tle brown  manrs  shoulder.  Tomba's  body  was 
no  slight  protection  against  the  pistols  of  these 
surly  fellows  in  case  they  evidenced  a  dispo- 
sition to  shoot.  And  the  Army  boy  did  not 
intend  to  let  this  human  bulwark  get  away  from 
him. 

"You  have  told  them,  Tomba?"  queried  Hal 
Overton,  as  soon  as  the  Filipino's  voice  ceased. 

"Even  so,  sefior." 

* '  They  understand ! ' ' 

"If  they  do  not,  then  they  are  idiots,  Senor 
Sergente. ' ' 

"Then  tell  them  I  am  going  to  begin  to 
count. ' 

Again  Tomba  spoke,  this  time  briefly. 

The  grip  of  young  Overton 's  hand  on  the 
Filipino 's  shoulder  tightened.  A  slight  shudder 
ran  through  the  brown  man's  frame,  but  other- 
wise he  showed  no  fear. 

"One!"  began  Hal. 

From  the  surly  ones  beyond  an  angry  babel 
of  protest  went  up. 

But  Hal  coolly  disregarding  the  clamor, 
merely  raised  his  own  voice  enough  to  make  it 
heard : 

"Two!" 


84  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

Sergeant  Overton  now  let  go  of  the  Filipino's 
shoulder,  but  only  to  throw  his  arm  around  the 
fellow's  neck.  Tornba's  head  was  drawn  back, 
almost  chokingly,  against  the  boyish  sergeant's 
shoulder. 

"Three!" 

Still  no  motion  among  the  dark-skinned  eight, 

"Four!" 

And  then: 

"Five!  Tomba,  your  friends  are  cheerful 
about  your  fate,  aren't  they!  Six!" 

Vicente  Tomba  spoke,  sharply,  hissingly. 
Now  some  stir  was  noticeable  among  the 
wretches,  though  whether  they  meant  to  obey  or 
to  try  to  rush  the  lone  soldier  was  more  than 
Overton  could  guess. 

"Seven!" 

Hal's  voice,  as  steady  as  ever,  must  have  car- 
ried conviction  with  it.  Certainly  Tomba 's 
shuddering  had  increased,  though  the  little 
brown  man,  no  match  in  muscle  for  the  white 
soldier,  made  not  the  least  effort  to  wrest  him- 
self away  from  that  dangerous  grip. 

"Eight!'  announced  Hal  Overton,  his  voice 
on  the  verge  of  absolute  cheeriness. 

Again  Tomba  spoke,  this  time  still  more 
angrily. 

There  was  a  shuffling  of  feet,  as  the  men 
moved  further  away.  Then  one  of  the  wretches 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  85 

stepped  forward  and  threw  open  a  door,  just 
as  Hal  came  calmly  out  with: 

"Nine!" 

"Stop  counting,  senor,'  urged  Vicente 
Tornba  quite  coolly.  "These  men  have  yielded 
and  are  going.  They  will  open  the  other  door, 
pass  through  it  hurriedly,  and  leave  the  way 
open  for  you." 

"Lucky  for  you,  if  they  do,  my  Tagalo  friend ! 
I  will  suspend  the  count  for  an  instant  only." 

Another  stone  door  was  suddenly  swung  open, 
by  one  of  the  surly  fellows,  revealing  a  passage 
beyond.  Into  this  the  eight  fairly  raced. 

"Do  not  follow  too  quickly,  senor,  or  one  of 
the  rascals  may  forget  himself  and  turn  to 
fight,"  declared  Tomba. 

"It  will  be  bad  for  you  if  it  happens!' 

"It  is  of  myself  that  I  am  thinking,  seiior!" 
returned  the  Filipino  dryly.  Then,  after  a 
pause : 

1 t  Come,  senor.    Surely  we  can  pass  out  safely 


now.: 


"Then  we'll  do  so,'  agreed  Sergeant  Hal, 
"and  your  life  be  upon  our  success!  Don't  try 
to  go  more  quickly  than  I  move,  or  I  shall  sus- 
pect you,  and  with  me  to  suspect  is  to ' 

"Say  no  more,  senor,'  interrupted  the  little 
Filipino.  "I  understand  you  better  than  I  did, 
and  I  am  taking  no  chances. ' 


86  UNCLE  SAM;S  BOYS 

Sergeant  Overton  still  retained  his  left-handed 
hold  on  Tomba  as  the  pair  passed  out  to  what 
might  mean  safety. 

Through  this  second  doorway  they  passed,  to 
find  themselves  ascending  a  slope  paved  only 
with  tightly  packed  dirt.  Glancing  up  the  slope 
Sergeant  Hal  made  out  three  or  four  stars  low 
down  in  the  sky  beyond. 

''Night  time?"  he  queried  in  mild  astonish- 
ment. 

"Yes,  senor,  and  you  will  even  believe  that 
it  is  the  night  of  another  day,"  laughed  Vicente 
Tomba,  "for  you  must  have  lived  ages  in  the 
last  few  hours." 

"It  wasn't  quite  as  bad  as  that,"  the  Army 
boy  returned  graciously.  ' '  In  your  way,  Tomba, 
you  helped  excellently  to  pass  the  time  for  me." 

At  the  top  of  this  interior  slope  the  pair 
passed  out  through  a  doorway  ordinarily  closed 
by  means  of  a  stout  wooden  door.  The  pair 
found  themselves  in  the  yard  back  of  Cerverra's 
house.  At  one  side  was  an  alley  way  leading  to 
the  street. 

"I  will  leave  you  here,  senor,  with  your 
gracious  permission." 

"Oh,  no,  no,  Tomba!  You  will  go  with  me, 
and  still  held  by  me,  at  least  as  far  as  the  mid- 
dle of  the  street." 

Wilth  sullen  assent  the  Filipino  consented  to 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  87 

this.  On  their  way  through  the  alley  they  en- 
countered no  one. 

But,  just  as  they  reached  the  sidewalk,  they 
were  met  with  a  sharp  hail  of : 

"Halt!" 


CHAPTER  VIH 

THE    RIGHT    MA^    IN    THE    GUARD    HOUSE 

THAT  command,  however,  in  a  good, 
strong  American  voice,  had  very  far 
from  the  effect  of  startling  Hal  Over- 
ton. 

Down  the  street,  barely  a  hundred  feet  away, 
a  squad  of  a  dozen  soldiers  of  B  Company  had 
just  halted  in  column  of  twos. 

At  the  head  of  the  squad  stood  Sergeant 
Terry  and  Corporal  Hyman. 

"Sergeant  Terry,"  called  the  self-rescued 
Army  boy  briskly,  "march  your  men  here  and 
halt  them  again.' 

"Very  good,  Sergeant  Overton,'  answered 
Noll's  voice,  precise  and  formal  as  though  on 
parade,  but  there  was  a  note  of  joy,  none  the 
less,  in  Terry's  voice. 

"I  will  go  now,  seiior,"  suggested  Vicente 
Tomba,  struggling  slightly  to  free  himself  as 
the  squad  again  halted  close  to  the  Army  boy. 


88  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"Yon  will  do  nothing  of  the  sort,  Tomba," 
retorted  Overton  dryly.  "Yon  are  going  to 
Fort  Franklin  as  a  military  prisoner. " 

"This  is  ingratitude!"  snarled  the  little 
brown  man,  looking  decidedly  crestfallen. 

"No;  it  is  not.  I  owe  you  nothing  for  my 
freedom.  Corporal  Hyman,  you  will  take 
charge  of  the  prisoner.  See  that  he  does  not 
escape. ' 

"Very  good,  Sergeant,"  replied  Hyman,  mo- 
tioning to  two  of  the  men  to  place  themselves 
on  either  side  of  the  prisoner. 

"Now,  Sergeant  Terry,  inform  me  how  you 
came  to  be  here  with  this  detachment?" 

"I  was  sent  into  town,  Sergeant  Overton, 
under  orders  from  Captain  Cortland.  You 
were  missed  from  parade,  and  the  captain  knew 
that  could  not  happen  with  you,  unless  there 
was  something  decidedly  wrong.  So,  at  seven 
this  evening,  the  captain  directed  me  to  take 
this  detachment  and  scour  the  town  for  you. 
If  we  did  not  find  you  by  half -past  nine  I  was 
to  report  back  to  the  post  by  messenger,  and 
a  larger  detachment,  under  an  officer,  was  to 
be  sent  in." 

"What  time  is  it  now?" 

"About  nine  o'clock.' 

"We  shall  be  back,  then,"  nodded  Hal, 
"within  the  time  mentioned  in  your  orders. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  89 

But  I  shall  leave  some  of  the  detachment  here 
until  Captain  Cortland  has  acted  upon  the  re- 
port that  I  shall  make/ 

At  that  moment  Sergeant  Hal,  glancing  into 
Cerverra 's  store,  caught  sight  of  the  bright, 
eager  eyes  of  the  proprietor. 

4 'Corporal  Hyman,  arrest  that  man,  also," 
commanded  young  Overton  sharply,  pointing 
into  the  shop.  ' i  The  fellow 's  name  is  Cerverra, 
and  he  had  a  part  in  the  plot  against  me. ' 

With  two  other  soldiers  Hyman  darted  into 
the  shop,  from  which  they  soon  came  out  with 
Cerverra,  who  protested  strongly. 

Meanwhile  Vicente  Tomba  had  discovered  a 
cause  of  discomfort. 

"Senor  Sergente,'  he  complained,  "during 
our  struggle  in  the  cellar  you  knocked  my 
cigarettes  from  my  hand.  I  beg  that  you  let 
one  of  your  soldiers  take  this  piece  of  money 
into  a  shop  and  buy  me  more  cigarettes.' 

"Shall  I  do  it,  Sergeant?'    inquired  Hyman. 

' '  Tomba, ' '  laughed  Hal,  ' '  after  all  the  trouble 
that  that  last  cigarette  cost  you  I  should  think 
you'd  feel  like  cutting  out  the  habit  forever. 
I  know  I  would  drop  any  habit  that  had  gotten 
me  into  such  a  mess.  Had  you  not  wanted  to 
smoke  underground  I  would  not  have  had  such 
a  fine  chance  to  upset  you.  Very  likely  you 
would  have  won,  instead  of  me.' 


90  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

"But  I  want  cigarettes,  now,'  retorted 
Tomba  almost  fiercely.  "It  is  ungenerous  to 
deprive  me  of  them. ' 

"Shall  I. let  a  man  get  them  for  him?"  asked 
Hyinan. 

"Yes;  if  he  insists,"  nodded  Hal.  "What 
an  idiot  a  man  is  to  allow  cigarettes  to  make 
such  a  slave  of  him  that  he  can't  pass  an  hour 
without  one.' 

A  soldier  was  accordingly  dispatched  to  the 
nearest  tobacconist  on  Tomba 's  errand.  While 
this  was  taking  place  Hal  hurriedly  told  his 
chum  and  Corporal  Hyman  what  had  happened 
to  him,  and  how  he  had  escaped. 

In  all  this  time  perhaps  two  score  of  curious 
natives  had  gathered  in  the  street,  though  all 
of  them  kept  at  a  respectful  distance.  Ser- 
geant Hal  examined  these  people  keenly,  though 
he  failed  to  see  any  of  the  eight  from  whom  he 
had  had  such  difficulty  in  escaping. 

"Captain  Cortland  told  me,7  Noll  broke  in 
at  last,  "that  the  former  military  commander 
here  informed  him  that  he  had  had  about  a 
dozen  of  his  men  disappear  most  unaccount- 
ably, and  that  not  one  of  them  had  ever  been 
heard  from  afterward.  So,  when  you  failed 
to  return,  Hal,  the  captain  declared  that  he  was 
going  to  sift  this  business  to  the  bottom  before 
he  stopped." 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  91 


"I  guess,  then,  that  all  of  our  poor  com- 
rades in  the  other  regiment  who  have  disap- 
peared in  this  miserable  town  of  Bantoc  have 
gone,  as  I  did,  through  visiting  Cerverra's 
store.  Now,  Noll,  I  am  going  to  leave  you  here, 
with  eight  of  the  men,  to  take  possession  of 
Cerverra's  store  and  premises  until  you  receive 
further  orders  from  the  post  commander. 
Hyman  and  I,  and  the  other  four  men,  will  take 
the  prisoners  out  to  Fort  Franklin.  I  would 
leave  you  a  couple  more  men,  Noll,  only  I  do 
not  forget  that  it  is  possible  that  there  may  be 
some  attempt  made  to  rescue  our  prisoners.' 

"If  the  natives  try  that "  broke  in  Cor- 
poral Hyman. 

"In  the  event  of  an  attempted  rescue,  Cor- 
poral, direct  your  men  that  they  are  to  shoot 
the  two  prisoners  at  the  first  sign  of  an  attempt 
at  rescue/ 

Tomba  heard  Hyman  give  the  order,  and 
spoke  in  a  low  tone  to  Cerverra.  Both  rascals 
thereupon  looked  disconcerted. 

"You  have  your  instructions,  Sergeant 
Terry, "  continued  Hal  Overton.  "March  the 
guard,  Corporal  Hyman.' 

As  the  guard  started,  Hal  fell  in  beside  Cor- 
poral Hyman,  telling  him  more  of  what  had 
happened  in  the  cellar  under  the  Moro  curio 
shop. 


92  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"I  reckon,  Sarge,  you've  made  the  biggest 
discovery  of  the  year  in  this  point  of  the 
woods,"  was  Hyman's  terse  comment.  "I 
reckon,  too,  the  captain  will  see  it  that  way." 

It  was  cooler  by  night,  though  this  was  due 
mainly  to  the  absence  of  the  sun.  The  air  was 
full  of  sticky  moisture,  and  mosquitoes  buzzed 
about  and  bit  viciously. 

"I  was  born  and  reared  in  isTew  Jersey,' 
laughed  Hal,  striking  at  the  winged  pests,  ' i  and 
I  have  had  to  stand  a  lot  of  guying  about  the 
mosquitoes  of  my  state.  But  Jersey  has  been 
libeled.  Compared  with  these  Philippine  pests 
the  Jersey  mosquito  is  mild  enough  to  be  a 
source  of  delight.' 

There  was  no  moon  up,  but  the  starlight  was 
bright — and  how  big  and  glowing  the  stars  are 
in  the  tropics! 

Marching  at  an  easy  route  step  over  the  firm, 
white  road,  it  did  not  take  the  returning  de- 
tachment more  than  twenty  minutes  to  cover 
the  distance  to  Fort  Franklin. 

"Halt  your  prisoners  here,  Corporal,  and 
watch  'em  until  Captain  Cortland  gives  his 
orders  about  them,"  directed  Hal.  Then  the 
young  sergeant  turned  down  the  street  leading  4 
to  officers'  quarters,  for  the  administrative 
office  of  the  post  had  been  closed  for  hours. 

Two  minutes  later  Sergeant  Hal  Overton  was 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES    -          93 

detailing  what  had  happened  him  to  the  post 
commander. 

"But  wait  before  you  go  any  further,  Ser- 
geant,' cried  Captain  Cortland,  interrupting 
his  tale.  "I  want  the  other  officers  to  hear  the 
whole  of  this  villainous  business.' 

By  the  use  of  the  telephone  the  other  five 
commissioned  officers  on  duty  at  Fort  Frank- 
lin were  soon  summoned. 

"Now,     begin    again,     Sergeant    Overton,' 
ordered  Cortland,  when  all  the  officers  had  gath- 
ered in  his  parlor. 

The  Army  boy  retold  the  entire  story,  leav- 
ing out  nothing — not  even,  the  reader  may  be 
sure,  what  Vicente  Tomba  had  said  to  Hal  about 
Draney's  connection  with  the  natives. 

"Ray,  you're  officer  of  the  day,'  broke  in 
the  post  commander  suddenly.  "Go  out  to 
Corporal  Hyman  and  see  that  he  turns  Tomba 
and  Cerverra  over  at  the  guard  house.  In- 
struct the  sergeant  of  the  guard  to  make  abso- 
lutely certain  that  the  prisoners  have  no  chance 
to  escape.  Also,  Eay,  you  will  send  Corporal 
Hyman  and  his  four  men  back  to  Sergeant 
Terry.  Direct  the  sergeant  to  keep  his  whole 
detachment  on  the  ground  to-night,  setting  a 
regular  guard.  Hampton,  as  you  're  in  charge  of 
the  commissary  and  quartermaster  details  at  this 
post,  the  first  thing  in  the  morning  you  will 


94  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

make  sure  that  Sergeant  Terry's  detachment  is 
supplied  with  rations  enough  for  breakfast. 
Early  in  the  morning  I  shall  look  further  into 
that  plague  spot  of  Cerverra's.  Now,  Sergeant 
Overton,  continue  your  story." 

When  it  was  finished  the  officers  sat  in  silence 
for  a  few  moments. 

"Well,  gentlemen,'  inquired  Captain  Cort- 
land  at  last,  "have  you  anything  to  offer!" 

"Are  you  going  to  arrest  the  man,  Draney?' 
inquired  Captain  Freeman,  of  C  Company. 

"Frankly,"  replied  Cortland,  "that  is  what 
is  puzzling  me.  What  do  you  think,  Free- 
man?" 

"We  cannot  doubt  Sergeant  Overton,  and  he 
tells  us  that  Tomba  boasted  that  Draney  is  in 
league  with  the  natives  in  some  conspiracy 
here. ' 

"It  is  a  matter  of  evidence, ' '  replied  Captain 
Cortland  musingly.  "Not  one  of  you  gentlemen 
would  doubt  Sergeant  Overton 's  word  on  any 
question  of  fact  on  which  he  has  knowledge. 
But  his  report  is  based  only  on  what  Vicente 
Tomba  told  him.  Now,  at  the  test,  not  one  of 
you  gentlemen  doubts  that  Tomba  would  deny 
it  all  point  blank.  I  believe  that  Draney  is  a 
scoundrel.  I  never  liked  the  looks  of  the  man 
from  the  first  moment,  but  I  can't  arrest  him 
on  account  of  my  bad  opinion  of  him.  Nor 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  95 

would  any  military  or  civil  court  hold  him  on 
account  of  what  Sergeant  Overton  says  Tomba 
told  him.  That  evidence  would  not  satisfy  the 
requirements  of  any  court  of  trial.' 

"Sir,  is  Draney  really  an  American  or  an 
Englishman?7  inquired  Lieutenant  Hampton. 

"I  don't  know,  Hampton,  nor  do  I  believe 
any  one  else  knows  for  certain.  Englishman 
or  American,  it  is  equally  bad  either  way.  If 
he's  an  American,  then  I  am  sorry  to  say  that 
there  are  multitudes  of  people  back  in  our  own 
country  who  would  welcome  only  too  gladly  a 
chance  to  attack  the  government  for  locking 
an  American  up  on  what  they  would  call  a 
flimsy  charge.  On  the  other  hand,  if  Draney 
is  an  Englishman,  and  we  arrest  him  on  any- 
thing but  the  most  satisfactory  evidence,  then 
the  British  government  would  be  sure  to  make 
a  noise  about  the  affair.  Hang  it  all,  I  wish 
we  had  just  a  shade  more  evidence,  and  I'd 
have  Draney  behind  steel  curtains  in  the  guard 
house  before  daybreak,  for  his  plantation  is 
only  eight  miles  out  from  here.  Personally,  I 
haven't  a  doubt  that  Draney  is  behind  all  the 
trouble  of  which  we're  hearing  rumors." 

"What  can  be  Draney 's  object?"  asked  Cap- 
tain Freeman. 

"Perhaps  he  hasn't  really  a  sane  object,"  re- 
sponded Cortland.  "Whatever  his  motive  for 


96  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

standing  in  with  the  worst  of  the  Moros,  and 
plotting  against  the  government  that  we  rep- 
resent, there  is  sure  to  be  something  that  he 
regards  as  being  in  line  with  his  own  advan- 
tage." 

"Everything  connected  with  this  fellow, 
Draney,  seems  to  be  a  puzzle, ' '  muttered  Lieu- 
tenant Hampton. 

During  this  discussion  the  two  youngest 
officers  of  all,  Lieutenants  Prescott  and  Holmes, 
sat  listening  intently,  and  looking  from  face  to 
face,  though  neither  ventured  any  opinions.  As 
"youngsters''  it  was  their  place  to  wait  until 
they  were  asked  to  speak. 

So  notable,  in  fact,  did  their  silence  become 
that  at  last  Captain  Cortland  remarked: 

"Mr.  Prescott,  Mr.  Holmes,  you  know  that 
you  are  not  forbidden  to  speak  in  the  presence 
of  your  elders." 

«/ 

"I  was  listening,  sir/  replied  Lieutenant 
Prescott,  with  a  smile.  t  i  I  haven 't  anything  to 
offer  sir,  but  whatever  orders  I  may  receive, 
I'll  follow  them  all  the  way  across  the  island 
of  Mindanao  and  out  into  the  ocean  as  far  as  I 
can  swim  or  float.' 

"That's  my  answer,  too,  sir,'  supplemented 
Lieutenant  Greg  Holmes. 

' i  Spoken  like  soldiers  and  officers, ' '  said  Cap- 
tain Cortland  heartily. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  97 

And,  indeed,  these  two  young  officers  were 
soldiers !  Young  as  they  were,  they  commanded 
the  respect  of  the  men  in  their  companies.  B 
and  C  Companies  could  be  depended  upon  to  fol- 
low Prescott  and  Holmes  wherever  these  two 
young  "West  Pointers  cared  to  lead  them. 

"Gentlemen,"  announced  Captain  Cortland 
at  last, 1 1  we  have  the  two  prisoners  in  the  guard 
house,  and  we  have  a  guard  over  Cerverra's 
place.  We'll  take  counsel  of  the  night  and  of 
sleep.  In  the  morning,  at  eight  o'clock,  we'll 
meet  here  to  deliberate  further  on  this  puz- 
zling matter.  By  the  morning  our  whole  duty 
may  be  extremely  clear  to  us.' 

The  visiting  officers  arose,  saluted  and  took 
their  leave. 

"That  is  all  for  to-night,  Sergeant  Overton,' 
announced  the  captain.     "But  on  one  point  I 
want  to  caution  you.    You  have  heard  the  dis- 
cussion here  to-night.    Do  not  repeat  it  to  any 
of  the  enlisted  men.' 

"No,  sir." 

"That  is  all,  Sergeant.  One  of  these  days  I 
may  have  the  time  to  tell  you  what  a  fine  piece 
of  work  you  have  done  for  us  to-day.  Good 
night,  Sergeant.' 

"Good  night,  sir." 

The  Army  boy  saluted,  receiving  his  supe- 
rior's acknowledgment.  Then  Hal  stepped 

Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


98  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

outside  and  made  his  way  down  the  white  road- 
way of  ground  shell  and  went  to  his  own  squad 
room  in  barracks. 

"One  point,  anyway,  is  highly  satisfactory, ' ' 
mused  Sergeant  Hal,  as  he  crawled  in  under 
the  mosquito  netting  that  hung  over  his  cot. 
"Vicente  Tomba,  the  fellow  with  a  dislike  for 
seeing  me  alive,  is  safe  behind  bars  in  a  guard- 
house cell!" 

But  was  he? 


CHAPTEE  IX 

NEWS   COMES    OF    THE    UPKISING 

FIVE  officers  of  the  garrison  at  Fort  Frank- 
lin  had    assembled   in   the   post    com- 
mander 's  office,  at  eight  o  'clock  the  next 
morning,  and  awaited  the  arrival  of  Lieutenant 
Ray,  who  was  still,  for  a  matter  of  another  hour, 
to  be  officer  of  the  day. 

Nor  did  Eay  keep  his  brother  officers  wait- 
ing more  than  a  moment.  Then  his  brisk  step 
was  heard  on  the  shell  road  outside,  followed 
by  his  sudden  entrance  into  the  office. 

But  behind  him  came  two  soldiers  of  the 
guard,  dragging  between  them  an  insignificant- 
looking  little  Filipino  who  seemed  thoroughly 
terror  stricken. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  99 

" How's  Tomba  this  morning,  Bay?'  in- 
quired Captain  Cortland,  wheeling  about. 
"And  who  is  this  prisoner?" 

"This,  sir,"  declared  Eay,  in  a  tone  that 
quivered  with  disgust,  "is  all  that  is  left  to 
us  of  Tomba!" 

"But  this  isn't  Vicente  Tomba  at  all." 

"I  know  it,  sir." 

"Explain  yourself,  Ray." 

"Why,  Captain,  I  have  just  made  an  inspec- 
tion of  prisoners  at  the  guard  house.  Huddled 
in  the  back  of  the  cell  where  I  personally  put 
Tomba  last  night  crouched  this  shivery  little 
object,  looking  as  if  he  expected  to  be  called 
upon  to  face  a  firing  squad." 

Captain  Cortland  had  leaped  to  his  feet,  look- 
ing mightily  concerned. 

"But,  Mr.  Eay,  where  is  Tomba?" 

"I  wish  with  all  my  heart  that  I  knew,  sir," 
replied  the  officer  of  the  day,  even  more  dis- 
turbed than  his  superior.  "Last  night  I  put 
Tornba  in  the  cell  and  turned  the  key  in  the 
lock  myself.  Then  I  turned  the  key  over  to 
the  sergeant  of  the  guard.  When  I  found 
Tomba  missing,  and  this  worthless  object  in 
his  place,  I  made  an  investigation.  The  ser- 
geant of  the  guard  declared  that  the  key  had 
not  been  out  of  his  pocket  since  I  gave  it  to 
him.' 

4".         * 


100  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

"Who  is  sergeant  of  the  guard?" 

"Sergeant  Jones,  C  Company,  sir." 

"And  Jones  is  as  honest,  capable  and  ener- 
getic a  man  as  we  have  in  C  Company,"  spoke 
up  Captain  Freeman,  in  defense  of  his  sergeant. 

"Have  there  been  any  visitors  at  the  guard 
house  this  morning,  Bay?"  demanded  Captain 
Cortland.  ' '  Especially,  any  native  visitors  ? ' ' 

"Yes,  sir;  so  Sergeant  Jones  informs  me. 
You  know,  sir,  it  has  been  permitted  that  na- 
tive prisoners  be  allowed  to  have  their  friends 
come  and  bring  them  their  native  food  and 
coffee." 

"I  know,"  nodded  Captain  Cortland.  "But 
that  rule,  gentlemen,  is  revoked  from  this  min- 
ute. Thanks  to  that  rule  Tomba  has  gotten 
away  from  us." 

"I  hope  you  don't  suspect  Sergeant  Jones, 
Cortland,"  interposed  Captain  Freeman.  "Be- 
cause, if  you  do,  I'm  satisfied  that  you're  doing 
the  sergeant  an  injustice." 

"I  don't  suspect  your  sergeant,  Freeman.  I 
am  more  to  blame  than  any  one  else,  for  hav- 
ing allowed  the  old  rule  of  my  predecessor  here 
to  remain  in  force.  Quite  a  group  of  natives 
came,  eh,  Bay?" 

"Seven  or  eight  of  them,  sir." 

"Exactly,"  nodded  Cortland,  "and  this 
wretched  little  half-price  native  was  one  of 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  101 

them.  He  was  brought  along  on  purpose. 
Probably  he  was  threatened  with  having  his 
throat  cut  if  he  didn't  do  what  he  was  told  by 
the  scoundrels.  Then,  while  some  of  the  na- 
tives were  passing  food  and  drink  through  the 
bars  to  Tomba  and  the  prisoners,  Jones  must 
have  had  his  attention  attracted.' 

"Sergeant    Jones    remembers    that    he    was 
called  to  the  guard-house  door  for  an  instant,' 
interjected  Lieutenant  Eay. 

"  Exactly,  Eay,  and  at  the  same  time  a  light- 
fingered  native  slipped  a  cunning  brown  hand 
into  the  sergeant's  pocket  and  the  key  was 
taken.  The  cell  door  was  swiftly  unlocked, 
this  native  stole  in,  and  Vicente  Tomba  stole 
out.  Friends  swiftly  slipped  Tomba  one  or 
two  articles  of  clothing  with  which  to  help  dis- 
guise himself.  Then  the  whole  party  filed 
quickly  out,  and  by  this  time  Vicente  Tomba 
is  headed  for  the  mountains  and  going  fast. ' 

"But  Sergeant  Jones  found  the  key  in  his 
pocket,  sir,  when  I  asked  him  for  it.' 

"Certainly,  Eay.  The  little  brown  man  who 
was  clever  enough  to  pick  the  pocket  of  the 
sergeant  of  the  guard  found  it  even  less  trouble 
to  return,  the  key.' 

"Cerverra  didn't  get  away,  anyway,'  mut- 
tered Lieutenant  Eay,  who  had  grown  suddenly 
tired  and  careworn  in  appearance. 


102  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

"Undoubtedly  that's  because  Tomba  is  of 
more  importance  to  the  Moro  plotters  than 
Cerverra.  Besides,  Cerverra  owns  property 
here,  and  he  can't  well  afford  to  be  a  fugitive 
from  justice.' 

"What  shall  I  do  with  this  little  wretch  of 
a  substitute,  sir?"  queried  the  officer  of  the 
day. 

"Have  you  questioned  this  prisoner!" 

"Yes,  sir,  and  not  a  word  will  he  say.  He 
only  shakes  his  head  and  pretends  that  he  can- 
not understand  a  word  of  English  or  Span- 
ish." 

"Then  take  him  back  and  lock  him  in  the 
same  cell,"  instructed  the  post  commander. 
"Keep  him  there  until  he  does  talk.' 

"Very  good,  sir.' 

Barely  had  Lieutenant  Bay  reentered  the 
guard  house  when  two  shots  sounded  on  the 
road  toward  Bantoc. 

"What's  that?  Trouble  starting?"  de- 
manded Captain  Freeman,  darting  to  the  door 
and  listening. 

"It  may  be  only  a  shooting  affray,  but  we 
must  soon  know,"  replied  Captain  Cortland. 

All  of  the  officers  save  Bay  were  now  out  on 
the  veranda  of  the  building. 

Two  more  shots  sounded,  close  together. 
Then  came  a  light  volley,  sounding  lighter  still. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  103 

"It  may  be  that  Sergeant  Terry  is  having 
trouble  in  town/  muttered  Captain  Cortland, 
wholly  alert  in  a  second.  i  l  In  any  case  we  must 
let  these  Moros  see  a  show  of  military  force. 
Freeman,  detail  thirty  of  your  men  and  let 
Lieutenant  Holmes  march  them  into  Bantoc  in 
quick  time.  Each  man  to  carry  fifty  rounds  of 
ammunition. ' ' 

"Very  good,  sir. 

"Lieutenant  Holmes,  you  will  go  first  of  all 
to  Cerverra's  shop,  unless  the  firing  seems  to 
be  in  another  direction.  But  remember  that 
if  trouble  breaks  loose  we  will  take  care  of  it 
from  here,  and  that  your  essential  orders  are 
not  changed  until  you  receive  them  from  me, 
or  from  your  company  commander.' 

"Very  good,  sir,'  replied  young  Holmes, 
saluting. 

Freeman  and  his  second  lieutenant  hurried 
away  to  execute  the  orders  without,  loss  of 
time. 

At  the  sound  of  the  shots  many  of  the  men 
from  barracks  had  run  out  into  the  street  to 
see  if  they  could  find  any  explanation  of  the 
hostile  sounds. 

' l  Second  platoon,  C  Company,  fall  in ! '  rang 
the  order,  repeated  three  or  four  times. 

That  caught  several  of  the  curious  ones  in 
the  street,  calling  them  to  the  parade  ground. 


104  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

Acting  First  Sergeant  Hal  Overton,  B  Com- 
pany, was  among  those  in  the  street.  And  he 
was  the  first  to  catch  sight  of  a  horse  coming 
up  the  road  at  a  wavering  gallop. 

"We'll  soon  know,"  the  Army  boy  called  to 
those  nearest  him.  "This  looks  like  a  mes- 
senger coming." 

The  man  who  was  astride  the  horse,  and  who 
was  attired  in  white  duck  blouse  and  trousers, 
was  bending  forward  over  the  neck  of  the  ani- 
mal. 

"Second  platoon,  fall  in!"  rang  Greg 
Holmes 's  command  on  the  parade  ground, 
showing  how  quickly  military  orders  may  be 
carried  out. 

"The  messenger  is  bleeding,"  cried  Hal.  "I 
can  see  the  stains  on  his  white  clothing.  And 
the  horse  has  been  hit,  too!" 

"Trouble  with  a  big  *T,'  "  muttered  Private 
Kelly. 

Sergeant  Hal  said  no  more.  He  walked 
quickly  down  the  road  as  horse  and  rider  drew 
nearer.  The  mount  was  running  more  feebly 
now.  Fifty  feet  away  from  the  young  sergeant 
the  animal  pitched  suddenly,  staggered,  then 
fell. 

For  an  instant  it  looked  as  though  the  rider 
would  also  be  stretched  in  the  dust.  Then  he 
recovered,  leaped  painfully  away  from  the 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  105 

horse — and  just  then  Hal  Overton  reached  and 
caught  him. 

" Shall  I  carry  you,  friend?'  demanded  the 
Army  boy,  for  the  stranger  was  a  white  man, 
doubtless  an  American. 

At  the  stranger's  belt  hung  a  holster,  the 
flap  unbuttoned.  He  was  wild-eyed  and  breath- 
ing hard,  but  there  was  no  sign  of  cowardice 
in  the  man's  sternly  set  face. 

Bloodstains  showed  over  three  wounds  in  the 
trunk  of  his  body.  The  right  shoulder,  also, 
had  been  touched. 

"I  can  walk — but  give  me  your  arm,"  gasped 
the  wounded  man.  "Take  me  to  your  com- 
manding officer!' 

Hal  started,  but  had  not  far  to  go,  for  Cap- 
tain Cortland  was  coming  forward  on  the  run. 

"Take  that  man  to  the  porch  of  barracks,' 
called    the    captain,    whose    eye,    practised    in 
wounds,   saw  much.     "Don't  make  him  walk 
far." 

Kelly  sprang  to  Hal's  aid.  Between  them 
they  lifted  the  wounded  stranger  to  a  seat  on 
their  arms.  The  man  put  his  arms  about  their 
necks,  and  thus  they  conveyed  him  to  a  broad 
armchair  on  the  porch. 

' '  My  man,  there,  run  for  a  hospital  steward, ' 
shouted  Captain  Cortland.    Then  the  post  com- 
mander came  to  the  wounded  stranger. 


106  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

Now  that  lie  found  himself  at  the  end  of  his 
journey  the  stranger  appeared  to  lose  rapidly 
the  strength  of  his  voice.  He  lay  back  in  the 
chair,  his  eyes  half  closed. 

" Where  do  you  come  from,  friend?"  asked 
Captain  Cortland. 

"The  Seaforth  Plantation." 

"I  know  where  the  place  is — twelve  miles 
from  here,  in  the  interior,"  answered  the  cap- 
tain. 

' i  Eight, ' '  murmured  the  wounded  one. 

"Your  name?" 

"Edwards.  I'm  bookkeeper  and  correspond- 
ent for  Mr.  Seaforth." 

"Platoon  fours  right,  march!"  sounded  from 
the  parade  ground. 

Edwards  heard  the  command,  then  the  steady 
whump-whump  of  the  feet  of  marching  men. 
The  wounded  man  turned  in  his  chair  and 
gazed  at  the  detachment  marching  away  in 
quick  time  behind  Lieutenant  Holmes. 

"You  act  quickly,  Captain,'  murmured  Ed- 
wards gratefully. 

"Those  men  are  marching  to  Bantoc  to  keep 
order  in  the  town,"  replied  Captain  Cortland. 
"Tell  me,  as  quickly  as  you  can,  what  is  wrong 
at  Seaforth 's." 

"We  were  attacked  just  before  daylight  this 
morning,"  Edwards  replied  weakly. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  107 

"In  force?7    pressed  the  post  commander. 

"Just  at  a  guess  there  must  have  been  two 
or  three  hundred  of  the  Malay  fiends. " 

"Any  of  the  defending  party  killed?" 

"Not  when  I  left,  Captain.  But  four  of  our 
native  Moro  laborers  were  shot  dead  before 
they  could  reach  the  main  house.  The  main 
house  was  being  defended  by  Seaforth  when  I 
left." 

"How  many  white  men  there?' 

"Seaforth,  his  son,  his  superintendent  and  a 
blacksmith. ' 

"They  all  escaped  into  the  house  at  the  at- 
tack!" 

"Yes." 

"Any  natives  helping  Seaforth  in  the  de- 
fense?" 

"Yes;  eight  of  the  most  trusted  Moro  work- 
men. But,  Captain,  you  never  can  tell  when 
you  can  trust  any  of  these  natives.' 

* { I  know, '  murmured  Cortland,  nodding  his 
head. 

At  this  moment  the  hospital  steward  arrived 
on  the  run,  carrying  a  case  of  instruments, 
bottles  and  bandages.  There  was  no  surgeon- 
officer  at  Fort  Franklin,  the  post  commander 
being  compelled  to  rely,  at  need,  on  a  German 
physician  in  Bantoc. 

"Get  right  to  work,  steward,"  ordered  Cap- 


108  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

tain  Cortland.  "And  I  must  question  this  man 
while  you  work  over  him.  Edwards,  are  there 
any  American  women  at  Seaf orth  's  ? ' ' 

"Three." 

' l  Good  heavens ! ' '  uttered  the  captain,  paling. 

"Mrs.  Seaf  orth,  the  superintendent's  wife, 
and  Miss  Daly,  the  school  teacher." 

"How  did  you  get  away!" 

"The  Moros  didn't  appear  to  be  in  force 
on  the  side  toward  the  stable,  and  I  wriggled 
through  in  the  dark,  traveling  flat  on  my 
stomach.  I  reached  a  horse  at  the  stable,  sad- 
dled fast,  and  then  galloped  away  just  as  the 
Moros  turned  loose  a  volley  that  covered  the 
noise  of  the  horse's  hoofs." 

Edwards 's  voice  was  becoming  much  weaker. 
He  paused  frequently  between  words.  The  hos- 
pital steward,  standing  behind  the  wounded 
man,  glanced  up  at  Captain  Cortland,  shaking 
his  head. 

"Was  the  road  infested  with  roving  parties 
of  guerillas'?"  inquired  Captain  Cortland. 

"No,  sir,"  replied  the  bookkeeper.  "I  didn't 
run  into  any  trouble  until  I  reached  Bantoc. 
The  natives  here  must  have  known  that  the 
trouble  was  coming,  for  concealed  rascals  fired 
on  me  just  as  I  got  alongside  the  town.  They 
wounded  me  and  my  horse." 

The  other  officers,  with  the  exception  of  the 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  109 

absent  Lieutenant  Holmes,  were  now  at  the 
.porch,  listening  quietly. 

"Freeman,  I  must  keep  the  rest  of  your  com- 
pany here/'  explained  Captain  Cortland.  "And 
Hampton,  your  duties  here  are  such  that  I  can't 
very  well  spare  you  from  post.  So  I  shall  have 
to  send  Lieutenant  Prescott  to  Seaforth's. 
Lieutenant  Prescott,  assemble  the  company 
without  an  instant's  delay.' 

There  was  little  need  to  speak  of  delay. 
Every  soldier  left  on  the  post  and  not  engaged 
in  actual  duty  was  as  near  to  the  spot  as  he 
could  be,  for  all  were  interested  in  this  latest 
news. 

"Mr.  Prescott,  don't  take  the  time  to  march 
your  men  to  the  parade  ground.  Assemble  B 
Company  right  here.  Pick  out  the  sixty  men 
you  want.  Sergeant  Overton  will  help  you. 
Take  sixty  men,  two  days '  rations  and  a  hundred 
and  fifty  rounds  of  cartridges  per  man.  Take 
blankets,  ponchos  and  shelter  tents.  Detail  your 
men  and  be  ready  to  march  at  the  earliest  pos- 
sible moment.' 

As  the  call  for  formation  sounded  Edwards 
uttered  a  fervent: 

"Thank  heaven!" 

The  hospital  steward  forced  a  draught  of 
medicine  down  the  wounded  man's  throat. 

Quickly  the  sixty  men  were  detailed,   those 


110  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

who  had  been  on  sick  report  lately,  or  those  who 
for  any  other  reason  were  unfitted  for  a  long, 
swift  march  being  rejected. 

"Detachment,  fall  out/'  ordered  Lieutenant 
Prescott.  "Sergeant  Overton,  see  to  the  equip- 
ping of  the  men  for  this  hike.  Don't  let  any 
man  idle  any  time  away.  I'll  soon  be  with  you 
in  barracks,  for  minutes  may  be  invaluable.' 

Edwards  had  fallen  back  once  more,  lying 
with  his  eyes  closed.  The  hospital  steward,  one 
hand  on  the  wounded  one's  pulse,  looked  at 
Captain  Cortland  and  shook  his  head. 

"Mr.  Edwards,"  called  the  captain. 

There  was  no  answer. 

"Is  he  dead?"  asked  the  post  commander  in 
a  low  voice. 

"No,  sir,  but  he  is  unconscious  and  there's 
only  a  feeble  flutter  at  the  pulse." 

As  if  to  prove  that  he  was  still  conscious,  Ed- 
wards's  lips  tried  to  frame  the  words: 

"Thank  heav " 

A  sigh,  and  Edwards 's  head  sank  forward  on 
his  chest. 

"He's  gone,  sir;  there's  no  pulse,"  said  the 
hospital  steward. 

Edwards 's  brave  mission  was  ended.  He 
had  carried  the  word  of  danger  to  Fort  Frank- 
lin, but  he  could  not  live  to  see  the  relief  or 
vengeance  detail  set  out. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  111 

As  soon  as  it  was  certain  that  the  bookkeeper 
had  really  ceased  to  breathe,  Captain  Cortland 
had  the  hospital  steward  summon  men,  who 
carried  the  remains  away. 

From  the  portion  of  the  barracks  allotted  to 
B  Company  there  came  hardly  a  sound  of  un- 
usual activity.  Yet  men  were  preparing  for 
the  "hike,"  as  the  long,  swift  march  is  called, 
in  record  time. 

"All  ready  in  this  room!"  called  Sergeant 
Hal  at  last. 

A  chorus  of  low-toned  replies  answered  him. 

"Tumble  out,  then,  lively!" 

An  instant  later  the  men  hastened  from  other 
squad  rooms.  There  was  no  flourish  of  bugles 
this  time.  At  a  quietly  spoken  word  the  sixty 
men  fell  in.  Non-commissioned  officers  made 
a  hasty  inspection,  while  Captain  Cortland  and 
Lieutenant  Prescott  glanced  up  and  down  the 
line  with  keen  eyes. 

"March  your  detachment,  Lieutenant,"  di- 
rected Captain  Cortland,  a  minute  later. 

"Twos  right,  route  step,  quick  time — march!" 
called  Lieutenant  Prescott. 

As  one  man  they  swung,  and  their  feet  were 
in  motion.  At  the  head  of  the  line  marched 
acting  First  Sergeant  Overton,  setting  a  stiff 
pace. 

For   an   instant   Prescott   stood   still,    eying 


112  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

his  men  as  they  swept  by.  Then  he  ran  to  the 
head  of  the  line,  falling  in  beside  the  young  ser- 
geant. 

They  were  off  on  the  Flag's  business! 


CHAPTER  X 

THE  INSULT  TO  THE  FLAG 

T  was  a  deserted  road  over  which  the  de- 
tachment marched. 

When  there  is  fighting  in  Mindanao, 
and  troops  are  scurrying  along  the  roads,  those 
inhabitants  who  are  non-combatants  keep 
within  their  doors — at  all  events,  they  remain 
out  of  sight.  It  is  as  though  every  native  feared 
to  be  shot  as  a  possible  rebel. 

But  Uncle  Sam's  troops  have  no  quarrel  with 
men  and  women  following  peaceful  occupations. 
If  these  brown  natives  understood  our  people 
better  they  would  not  scurry  to  cover  when  the 
khaki-clad  men  are  passing  on  fighting  bent. 

For  three  miles,  or  until  Bantoc  was  left  well 
behind,  the  quick  time  continued.  Then  the 
young  lieutenant  decided  that  it  would  be  neces- 
sary to  slacken  the  pace  for  a  while.  Soldiers 
must  not  only  reach  their  destination  as  early 
as  possible ;  they  must  also  be  fit  for  fighting  on 
arrival. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  113 

It  was  not  difficult  to  find  the  way.  An  almost 
straight  road  led  out  to  the  Seaforth  plantation. 
Lieutenant  Prescott  had  a  map  of  the  country 
for  use  in  case  he  found  it  necessary. 

Twice  on  the  way  the  men  halted,  for  five 
minutes  each  time. 

Then,  about  eight  miles  out,  they  came  upon 
outlying  scenes  of  plantation  life.  There  were 
broad  fields,  rich  with  crops,  but  to-day  no 
laborers  were  to  be  seen  at  work. 

Then  the  main  buildings  of  the  Draney  plan- 
tation were  sighted. 

About  the  buildings,  too,  all  was  unwontedly 
quiet.  In  fact,  the  main  house  was  closed  and 
had  the  air  of  being  in  a  state  of  siege. 

6 '  Humph ! ' '  muttered  the  young  lieutenant  to 
the  boyish  sergeant.  "If  all  we  hear  about 
Draney  is  true,  or  even  the  half  of  it,  he  has 
no  need  to  fear  the  Moros." 

Just  as  the  detachment  was  passing  opposite 
the  main  building  the  front  door  opened,  and 
Draney,  bearing  a  rifle  in  the  hollow  of  his  left- 
arm,  hastened  out,  holding  up  his  right  hand. 

"Detachment  halt!'7  commanded  Prescott  in 
a  wearied  tone.  Then  the  young  commanding 
officer  stepped  rapidly  toward  the  planter. 

"Well,  Mr.  Draney,  what  is  it?"  Prescott  in- 
quired. 

"I'm  thankful  you've  come,  Prescott.' 

8 4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


114  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

1  i  Mr.  Prescott,  if  you  please, ' '  interposed  the 
officer  coldly. 

"I'm  mighty  glad  you've  come.  Off  yonder 
we  've  been  hearing  firing  at  intervals  ever  since 
daylight. ' 

"How  recently  have  you  heard  it!"  queried 
Prescott. 

"Within  ten  minutes." 

"Thank  heaven,  then!"  muttered  the  lieu- 
tenant. "The  Seaforth  people  are  holding 
out." 

"Is  it  at  Seaforth 'sf"  demanded  Draney, 
with  assumed  eagerness. 

"Sol  imagine.  But  I  must  hurry  on  my  way. 
Take  care  of  yourself,  Mr.  Draney.' 

Perhaps  that  last  bit  of  advice  was  delivered 
in  a  tone  of  some  sarcasm.  Draney  appeared 
to  feel  very  uneasy. 

"Prescott — Mr.  Prescott — aren't  you  going 
to  leave  some  of  your  men  here  to  protect  this 
place?" 

"I  don't  believe  it  will  be  necessary,"  replied 
the  lieutenant,  and  again,  no  doubt,  there  was 
some  hidden  irony  in  his  words. 

"But  the  Moros  may  attack  us  here  at  any 
moment,"  urged  Draney  pleadingly. 

"I  hope  they  won't  attack  you,  Mr.  Draney. 
But,  in  any  event,  I  have  no  orders  to  leave  any 
of  my  men  here." 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  115 

"Yet,  surely,  as  an  officer  commanding  troops 
in  the  field,  you  have  some  discretion  in  the 
matter." 

"I  fear  it  would  be  an  abuse  of  my  discretion 
to  weaken  my  detachment  by  leaving  men  here. ' 

At  that  moment  four  or  five  shots  sounded 
faintly  in  the  distance. 

"You  must  see  my  present  duty  as  clearly  as 
I  do,  Mr.  Draney,"  uttered  the  young  lieuten- 
ant quickly.  "Good-bye,  sir." 

"Can't  you  leave  me  even  six  men?" 

Prescott  did  not  reply,  but  called : 

"March  the  detachment,  Sergeant." 

Hal  gave  the  moving  order  instantly,  the  lieu- 
tenant cutting  off  the  column  obliquely  and  thus 
rejoining  its  head. 

"The  impudence  of  that  fellow!"  growled 
Lieutenant  Prescott,  under  his  breath,  but 
Sergeant  Hal  heard  the  words. 

Two  or  three  minutes  later,  when  the  plan- 
tation buildings  were  out  of  sight,  the  young 
sergeant  chanced  to  look  back  along  the  line. 

As  he  did  so  something  in  the  sky  caught  his 
attention. 

"Look  at  that,  sir,"  urged  Hal,  stepping  out 
of  the  way  of  the  column  and  pointing  back- 
ward. 

Lieutenant  Prescott  uttered  an  exclamation  of 
anger. 


116  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

"I  wish  we  had  men  to  spare.  I  certainly 
would  send  some  of  them  back  to  that  con- 
founded Draney!"  quivered  Prescott. 

The  object  at  which  both  gazed  was  a  blood- 
red  kite,  flying  high,  and  apparently  sent  up 
not  far  from  the  Draney  house. 

"It  must  be  a  signal,  sir,"  suggested  Ser- 
geant Hal. 

"Of  course  it  is!"  stormed  the  lieutenant. 
' '  It 's  the  easiest  way  in  the  world  of  sending  the 
news  to  the  brown  fiends  swarming  around  Sea- 
forth's  that  a  military  column  has  passed 
Draney 's  place." 

"I  could  take  a  few  men,  sir,  go  back  and  ar- 
rest Draney  and  bring  him  to  you,"  suggested 
Hal  quietly. 

"What  would  be  the  use?"  demanded  the 
young  officer,  a  scowl  of  disgust  settling  on  his 
face.  "In  the  first  place,  you  wouldn't  find 
Draney  in  an  hour,  for  probably  he  has  hidden 
himself.  Even  if  you  found  him  sitting  on  his 
back  porch  he'd  be  prepared  to  swear  that  some 
native  had  sent  up  the  kite  without  his  knowl- 
edge or  permission.  Sergeant,  a  fellow  of 
Draney 's  type  is  always  hard  to  catch,  and  it's 
bad  judgment  to  try  to  catch  him  until  you  have 
evidence  enough  to  hang  him.  So,  for  the 
present,  I'm  certain  that  we'd  better  let  the 
scoundrel  go.  But  the  flying  of  that  kite  means 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  117 

that  there's  danger  of  an  ambuscade.  This  is 
the  first  time  I've  commanded  in  the  field  and 
I  don 't  intend  to  be  cut  to  pieces  in  ambush. ' 

Eaising  his  voice,  Lieutenant  Prescott  called : 

"Detachment,  halt!" 

As  the  column  of  twos  came  to  a  stop  Lieu- 
tenant Prescott  announced: 

"Men,  you  can  see  that  red  kite  flying,  back 
at  the  plantation.  It's  a  signal  to  a  possible 
enemy  ahead  of  us.  The  enemy  may  try  to 
ambush  us.  Therefore,  from  now  on,  every  man 
will  move  as  quietly  as  he  possibly  can.  No 
unnecessary  word  will  be  spoken  in  ranks.  You 
will  take  pains  to  keep  your  equipments  from 
jingling.  I  am  going  to  march  you  off  the  road 
and  send  a  l point'  ahead.  Corporal  Cotter!' 

"Sir?" 

"Take  the  first  four  files  for  a  '  point'  and 
march  two  hundred  yards  ahead  of  the  detach- 
ment. Halt  and  signal  back  to  us  if  at  any  time 
you  hear  anything,  or  have  any  other  reason, 
to  believe  that  you  are  nearing  an  ambush. 
Take  the  first  path  to  the  left,  which  you  will 
find  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  here.  If  I 
have  further  orders  for  you  I  will  send  them  for- 
ward. ' 

"Very  good,  sir." 

"March  the  *  point,'  Corporal." 

When  the  last  file  of  Cotter's  men  was  two 


118  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

hundred  yards  in  advance  Lieutenant  Prescott 
nodded  to  Sergeant  Hal  to  march  the  main 
column. 

Not  a  soldier,  now,  but  understood  that  the 
command  was  probably  close  to  the  enemy.  At 
all  events,  fighting  within  the  hour  seemed 
almost  certain,  for  occasional  shots  still  sounded 
in  the  country  ahead. 

No  word  was  now  spoken.  Cotter  found  the 
path,  and  led  his  men  into  it.  Prescott  knew, 
from  his  map,  that  the  path  would  lead  his  men 
to  Seaf orth  's,  though  by  a  wide  detour  from  the 
highway. 

Sergeant  Hal  Overton  felt  a  queer  little  thrill 
when  he  realized  that  they  were  now  nearing  an 
enemy  reported  to  be  much  superior  in  numbers. 
The  thrill  was  not  exactly  of  fear,  though  there 
was  some  uneasiness  in  it.  Every  soldier  has 
felt  this  sensation  when  marching  into  battle. 
But  Hal  was  curious  to  know  how  the  feeling 
affected  the  other  men. 

If  Lieutenant  Prescott  felt  any  of  it,  there 
was  nothing  in  his  face  or  manner  to  betray  the 
fact.  He  appeared  to  be  "all  business,7'  and  to 
have  a  keen  sense  of  responsibility  which,  how- 
ever, did  not  dismay  him  in  the  least.  No  sol- 
dier could  gaze  at  that  young  officer  and  feel 
that  the  detachment  was  badly  commanded. 
Such  is  the  West  Point  training. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  119 

Kelly  and  some  of  the  other  soldiers  who  had 
seen  much  active  service  plodded  along  like  so 
many  laborers  going  unconcernedlv  to  their 
work. 

Some  of  the  newer  enlisted  men,  who  had 
never  before  been  in  real  action,  betrayed  their 
newness  only  by  the  eager  light  that  shone  in 
their  eyes.  These  new  men,  too,  took  pains  to 
walk  still  more  softly  along  the  forest  path  than 
did  any  of  the  old  hands  at  campaigning. 

To  any  but  the  most  hardened  old  soldier 
there  is  something  ' '  creepy '  in  plodding  along 
over  a  narrow  path  in  a  rather  dense  forest,  not 
knowing  at  what  moment  a  lurking  enemy  may 
pour  in  a  volley  that  will  bowl  over  half  of  the 
command. 

Yet  every  man  clutches  a  rifle  and  feels  at 
his  belt  enough  ammunition  for  putting  up  a 
good  and  long  fight.  There  is  something  ex- 
ultant in  the  consciousness  that,  if  attacked,  one 
can  render  back  a  good  account  of  himself,  and 
that  the  American  soldier  has  no  cause  to  be 
afraid  of  any  troops  on  earth.  It  is  man's  work 
— and  it  takes  a  man  to  do  it! 

To  the  "point,'  naturally,  came  the  real 
danger — in  the  first  moment  of  possible  ambush 
along  the  path.  It  would  run  into  trouble  first. 
That  is  what  it  is  for.  If  the  "point"  meets  an 
enemy  every  man  in  it  may  be  bowled  over  by  a 


120      ,        UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

sudden  shower  of  hostile  bullets.  But  the  main 
column  is  warned,  and  the  commander  can  bring 
up  the  bulk  of  his  force  in  battle  line  armed  with 
the  knowledge  of  where  the  enemy  is.  When  the 
" point"  marches  but  two  hundred  yards  in  ad- 
vance of  the  main  body  of  the  command  then 
it  can  be  promptly  supported  if  trouble 
comes. 

Now  the  distant  firing  broke  out  again,  and 
briskly. 

"The  Moro  fiends  are  trying  to  rush  the 
planter's  house  before  help  can  reach  him!' 
muttered  Lieutenant  Prescott  to  himself. 
"We'll  spoil  some  of  the  joy  of  those  savages 
when  we  get  close  enough  to  send  them  a  raking 
volley.  I  hope  they're  lined  up  so  that  we  can 
give  them  a  flank  fire  before  the  scoundrels 
know  that  we're  on  the  ground  at  all.' 

Two  miles  covered,  then  a  third  was  left  be- 
hind. 

Now,  a  nervous  or  too  eager  commander 
might  have  hurried  his  men  over  the  remaining 
ground,  but  Prescott,  at  West  Point,  had  been 
taught  the  value  of  cool,  deliberate  work. 

It  was  noticeable,  however,  that  now  the  men 
marched  along  with  more  spirit  and  swing. 
Those  who  may  have  been  secretly  nervous  were 
at  least  certain  that  soon  their  suspense  would 
be  over.  A  few  minutes,  and  they  would  be  en- 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  121 

gaged  in  something  more  definite  than  merely 
tramping  in  the  direction  of  danger. 

Suddenly  Corporal  Cotter  halted  his  men, 
and  the  same  gesture  was  visible  at  the  head 
of  the  column  behind. 

' '  Softly, ' '  whispered  Lieutenant  Prescott,  but 
his  gesture  carried  further  than  did  his  voice. 
The  main  column  closed  slowly  up  with  the 
"point." 

"I  couldn't  go  further,  sir,  without  running 
into  those  fellows  yonder,"  whispered  the  cor- 
poral. "I  didn't  know  that  you  would  want 
me  to  do  it.' 

Cotter  pointed  through  the  rows  of  trees  to 
a  clearing  beyond. 

In  the  center  of  the  clearing  stood  a  little 
building — plainly  the  schoolhouse  in  which  the 
few  white  children  on  the  plantation  and  prob- 
ably many  native  children  of  the  neighborhood 
were  taught,  five  days  in  the  week,  by  some 
clear-eyed  Yankee  schoolma'am  furnished  by 
Uncle  Sam's  Government. 

Seven  Moros  were  visible  at  or  close  to  the 
schoolhouse.  All  of  them  were  armed.  One  fel- 
low was  hurrying  up  with  a  can  of  oil,  which, 
while  the  soldiers  waited  and  watched,  he 
sprinkled  over  the  woodwork  of  the  doorway, 
carrying  a  trail  of  the  oil  inside  the  building. 

" That's  a  Filipino  estimate  of  the  value  of 


122  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

education/  whispered  Lieutenant  Prescott 
savagely  to  his  sergeant. 

But  then  something  happened  that  made  Hal 
Overton  boil  with  indignation. 

Just  as  the  fellow  had  finished  scattering  the 
oil  and  was  about  to  strike  a  match,  one  of  the 
other  Moros  seized  the  fellow's  arm,  then 
pointed  up  to  the  flag  pole  over  the  front  of  the 
building. 

All  of  the  brown  rascals  began  to  chuckle. 
Then  one  of  them  climbed  up.  With  a  keen- 
edged  creese  he  cut  the  Flag  loose,  hurling  it 
down  to  the  ground. 

Now  began  an  orgy  of  derision.  First  the 
Moros  spat  upon  the  Flag;  then,  howling  glee- 
fully, they  commenced  to  dance  upon  it.  Every 
now  and  then  one  of  the  brown  men  bent  down 
to  slash  at  the  Flag. 

It  was  hard  for  some  sixty  of  Uncle  Sam's 
men  to  stand  there,  with  guns  in  their  hands, 
and  witness  such  desecration  as  that.  Some  of 
the  soldiers  began  to  mutter. 

'  *  Silence ! ' '  hissed  Lieutenant  Prescott. 

One  soldier  rested  his  rifle  forward,  as  though 
bent  on  taking  a  shot,  but  Sergeant  Hal,  like 
a  flash,  knocked  up  his  arm. 

"No  man  is  to  fire  unless  ordered,' '  muttered 
Overton,  and  Lieutenant  Prescott  nodded  his 
approval. 


IN    THE   PHILIPPINES  123 

Soon  the  Flag  lay  torn  and  trampled,  all  but 
covered  in  the  dust  of  the  roadway  before  the 
school.  Then  one  of  the  Moros  again  struck  a 
match.  In  a  moment  the  flames  began  to  crackle 
and  the  smoke  to  ascend. 

Then,  as  if  satisfied  with  their  work,  the  brown 
rascals  set  out  at  a  steady  trot  in  the  direction 
of  Seaforth's. 

"Men,"  spoke  Lieutenant  Prescott,  in  a  low 
voice,  "it  would  have  been  fine  to  have  poured 
a  volley  into  those  wretches,  but  it  would  have 
told  their  main  body  our  exact  location.  We 
must  sink  all  other  feelings  until  we  have 
reached  the  plantation  and  rescued  those  im- 
periled there.  Corporal  Cotter,  lead  your  men 
to  the  left,  through  the  woods  and  around  the 
schoolhouse.  On  the  other  side  you  will  find  a 
path  that  you  will  follow." 

As  the  detachment  started  Hal  saluted. 

"Sir,  have  I  your  permission  to  run  out  into 
the  clearing,  recover  the  Flag  and  then  rejoin 
you?" 

Lieutenant  Prescott  shot  a  keen  look  at  the 
Army  boy,  then  answered  briefly: 

"Yes,  Sergeant." 

Hal  ?s  task  was  quickly  executed.  In  the  open 
he  encountered  no  one;  when  he  rejoined  the 
column  in  the  woods  he  reverently  carried  a 
Flag,  torn,  slashed  and  dirt-stained. 


124  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"One  of  these  days,  sir,"  quivered  the  Army 
boy  to  his  officer,  "I  hope  to  be  able  to  teach 
those  Moros  a  lesson  with  this  very  Flag!" 


CHAPTER  XI 

IN  THE  FIRST  BEUSH  WITH  MOROS 

AT  times,  while  the  detachment  in  the 
woods  covered  that  last  mile  the  firing 
ahead  cropped  up  briskly.  Then  it 
died  down  into  an  occasional,  sputtering  shot  or 
two.  But  every  discharge  of  a  rifle  ahead  was 
now  distinctly  audible  to  Uncle  Sam's  men 
marching  to  the  relief. 

At  last  the  marching  men  came  so  close  that 
the  young  lieutenant  whispered  to  the  boyish 
sergeant : 

" I 'm  going  to  join  the  ' point, '  Overton.  Bring 
the  men  on  at  the  same  interval,  but  keep  your 
eyes  ahead  for  signals  from  me.' 

"Very  good,  sir." 

Ahead  the  marching  men  could  now  see  that 
the  trees  were  thinning  out.  Still  further  ahead 
they  knew  that  there  must  lie  either  plantation 
fields  or  the  houses  themselves. 

Many  a  soldier  in  the  column  tightened  his 
grip  on  his  rifle  as  he  thought  how  soon,  now, 
the  raiding  Moros  would  find  that  they  had 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  125 

more  fighting  on  hand  than  they  had  bargained 
for. 

The  " point77  presently  halted  at  the  edge  of 
the  forest  and  Lieutenant  Prescott  signaled  back 
by  raising  his  hand  with  a  downward  gesture. 
Sergeant  Overton  halted  the  main  detachment. 

Over  a  broad  field  the  soldiers  looked,  but 
it  was  now  plain  that  the  besieged  planter's 
house  lay  on  the  other  side  of  a  belt  of  timber 
at  the  further  edge  of  the  field.  Then  the  officer 
signaled  for  the  main  column  to  be  brought  up. 

"I  don't  see  any  of  the  enemy  in  sight,  men/ 
declared  Prescott.    "You  will  deploy  into  line 
of  skirmishers  and  then  we'll  run  across  the 
field.    Be  prepared  for  the  order  to  lie  down  in 
case  the  enemy  develops. " 

A  moment  later,  and  the  men,  in  one  straight, 
thin  line,  with  considerable  intervals  between 
them,  charged  silently  across  the  field. 

At  the  edge  of  the  timber  they  halted  again. 
Lieutenant  Prescott,  revolver  in  hand,  moved 
forward,  accompanied  only  by  Corporal  Cotter. 

After  some  minutes  the  pair  came  back  agairu 

"You'll  go  forward  as  skirmishers,"  said 
Prescott.  "Keep  your  intervals.  Forward!' 

No  further  word  was  spoken,  but  the  lieuten- 
ant, at  the  right  of  the  line  and  slightly  in  ad- 
vance, moved  so  stealthily  that  those  nearest 
him  felt  that  the  enemy  could  not  be  far  off. 


126  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

Suddenly  the  stick  that  the  lieutenant  carried 
in  place  of  a  sword  was  held  aloft,  then  the 
point  lowered.  The  advancing  line  halted. 

"When  you  move  forward  again, "  went  the 
low,  almost  whispered  and  repeated  order  down 
the  line,  "crouch  low  and  do  not  hurry.  A 
hundred  yards  ahead  is  a  position  from  which 
we  can  rake  the  rascals  with  a  flanking  fire. 
Forward!7' 

Very  soon  the  advancing  soldiers  caught  sight 
of  the  planter's  house  between  the  trees.  It 
stood  some  seven  hundred  yards  from  this 
nearer  edge  of  the  clearing. 

Now  the  soldiers,  crouching  as  they  moved, 
until  they  appeared  to  he  bent  nearly  double, 
came  in  sight  of  a  trench.  It  spread  away 
obliquely  before  them,  but  everything  in  the 
trench  was  visible  to  them.  At  a  rough  estimate 
there  were  some  seventy-five  brown-skinned 
Moros  crouching  in  the  trench  behind  a  line  of 
hard-packed  dirt  thrown  up  before  them. 

At  this  moment  most  of  the  brown  fellows 
were  loafing  in  the  trench.  Only  occasionally 
one  of  them  showed  himself,  raising  his  gun 
quickly  and  firing  toward  the  house.  The 
planter's  return  fire  did  not  come  toward  Pres- 
cott's  command,  but  well  to  the  right  of  the 
soldiers. 

"The  Moros  are  up  to  their  same  old  rascally 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  127 

tricks/  whispered  Lieutenant  Prescott  to  Ser- 
geant Hal  Overton.  "They  fire  heavily,  once 
in  a  while,  and  then  pepper  the  house  occasion- 
ally with  single  shots.  Their  idea  is  to  keep 
those  in  the  house  firing  until  the  defenders 
have  used  up  all  their  ammunition.  When  the 
Moros  are  satisfied  that  Seaforth's  party  have 
no  more  cartridges,  then  those  brown  pirates 
plan  to  rush  the  house,  with  little  loss  to  them- 
selves, and  run  creeses  through  every  defender 
left  alive." 

A  moment  later  Prescott 's  order  was  repeated 
down  the  line  of  soldiers,  now  lying  prone  on 
the  ground: 

"Load  magazines!  Eemember  to  fire  low. 
At  the  pistol  shot  begin  firing  at  will,  but  keep 
cool  and  try  to  make  every  cartridge  tell.  Bet- 
ter to  shoot  slowly  than  to  waste  any  ammu- 
nition.7' 

As  noiselessly  as  they  could  the  prostrate  men 
opened  the  magazines  of  their  rifles  and  slipped 
the  cartridges  in. 

Lieutenant  Prescott,  revolver  in  hand,  waited 
until  he  saw  that  all  had  had  time  to  obey  the 
order.  Then  the  stick,  now  in  his  left  hand, 
pointed  ^forward,  and  the  various  squad  leaders 
whispered : 

"At  four  hundred  yards,  aim!" 

It  was  a  tense  moment  for  the  new  men. 


128  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

Bang!  Lieutenant  Prescott's  revolver  rang 
out,  the  muzzle  pointed  toward  the  enemy. 

Instantly  following  it  came  a  sputtering  of 
reports,  then  a  settled,  heavy  fire.  The  noise 
of  so  many  soldiers,  firing  at  will  was  like  that 
made  on  Fourth  of  July  by  a  hundred  packs  of 
cannon  crackers  all  going  off  at  once. 

Yet  over  all  the  din  rose  the  yells  of  the  sur- 
prised Moros  in  the  trench.  It  had  caught  them 
hard,  for  most  of  the  soldiers  were  doing  good 
shooting. 

Heedless,  now,  of  the  fire  from  the  planter's 
house,  the  Moros  in  the  trench  rose  to  flee. 
Some  of  them  dropped  where  they  stood. 
Others  ran  away  as  fast  as  their  brown  legs 
could  carry  them,  some  brandishing  their  rifles 
with  defiance,  a  few  others  throwing  down  their 
firearms  as  they  started  to  bolt. 

About  a  dozen  of  the  rascals  tried  to  re- 
turn the  fire  of  the  soldiers,  but  fired  too  high. 
None  of  the  khaki-clad  men  were  hit. 

' ' Cease  firing!"  shouted  Lieutenant  Prescott, 
but  he  addressed  his  order  to  the  bugler  who 
stood  beside  him.  No  voice  could  carry  over 
such  a  din  of  firing. 

Ta-rar-ta-ra-ta !  rang  the  bugle.  As  the  men 
obeyed  the  command  to  cease  firing  one  would 
again  have  been  reminded  of  exploding  packs 
of  fire  crackers,  for  the  fire  died  down  sputter- 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  129 

ingly,  with  here  and  there  another  report  or 
two  from  soldiers  who  felt  that  they  had  a  fine 
bead  drawn  and  ached  to  "get"  another  enemy 
or  two. 

Fully  twenty-five  of  the  Moros  had  fallen, 
either  in  the  trench  at  the  first  crash  of  fire,  or 
else  while  running  to  cover. 

These,  however,  were  not  the  only  enemies 
at  hand,  for,  from  a  grove  off  to  the  left  of  the 
planter's  house  a  heavy  fire  now  crashed  out, 
and  bullets  began  to  clip  twigs  from  the  trees 
among  which  the  soldiers  lay. 

Other  bullets  whizzed  by  over  the  heads  of 
Uncle  Sam's  men  as  they  lay  there.  There  was 
a  peculiarly  spiteful  sound  to  the  passage  of 
these  bullets.  "  Whew-ew-ew ! "  they  sang,  for 
most  of  the  Moros  were  using  the  .43  Reming- 
ton, with  the  brass-jacketed,  heavy  bullet,  this 
being  a  favorite  arm  in  the  islands  among  the 
natives.  There  are  always  adventurers  at  .Hong 
Kong  who,  for  a  price,  will  land  any  number 
of  Remingtons  and  any  amount  of  ammunition 
at  lonely  spots  along  the  coast  of  the  islands. 

Shading  his  eyes  with  his  left  hand  Lieutenant 
Prescott  tried  to  locate  this  other  firing  party 
of  Moros.  Smokeless  powder  gives  no  clue  to 
the  hiding  places  of  an  enemy,  and  even  if  there 
be  any  kind  of  echo  it  is  a  confusing  guide. 

But  at  last  Prescott  was  sure  he  had  located 


•4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


130  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

the  second  Moro  fighting  party  and  he  pointed 
out  the  place  to  his  men. 

"Send  them  a  volley  over  there,  all  together," 
ordered  the  young  officer.  "Ready;  load!  At 
six  hundred  and  fifty  yards,  aim.  Fire ! ' ' 

Prescott's  face  beamed  with  satisfaction  as 
he  held  his  field  glass  to  his  eyes  and  saw  where 
the  bullets  threw  up  the  dirt. 

"Splendidly  done,  men!'  he  cried.  "We'll 
send  'em  another.  Ready;  load.  Aim — fire!' 

Once  more  the  volley  crashed  out  splendidly. 
Then  the  men  lay  on  their  hot-barreled  rifles. 

No  more  shots  came  their  way  just  then. 

"We've  silenced  their  fire  for  the  time 
being,"  chuckled  the  officer.  "I  wonder  if  the 
enemy  are  retiring?' 

In  the  silence  Uncle  Sam's  men  could  hear 
a  frantic  cheer  rise  from  the  interior  of  the 
planter's  house. 

"Yes;  I'll  warrant  they're  glad,"  cried  Pres- 
cott,  his  eyes  shining  mistily.  "But  we  haven't 
reached  them  yet!' 

It  looked  easy.  All  the  detachment  had  to 
do  was  to  run  across  a  field  and  halt  before  the 
planter's  house. 

Yet  how  could  the  young  commanding  officer 
know  that  he  would  not  lose  half  his  men  by 
ambushed  fire  while  crossing  that  open  space! 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  131 


CHAPTER  XII 

THE  BROWN   MEN   AT  BAY FOR.  HOW   LONG? 

IF  Sergeant  Hal,  or  any  other  soldier  in 
that  detachment  of  sixty  men,  had  felt 
any  nervousness  before  the  fight  started, 
everyone  of  them  had  forgotten  it  by  this  time. 
So  far,  not  a  man  had  they  lost,  and  none 
had  been  even  lightly  hit.  The  bravery  of  sol- 
diers is  usually  founded  on  their  confidence  in 
their  officers.  Every  man  in  the  detachment 
now  knew  that  Lieutenant  Kichard  Prescott  was 
an  officer  who  would  do  all  that  lay  before  him 
to  do,  yet  an  officer  who  would  not  needlessly 
sacrifice  the  life  or  safety  of  any  man  in  his 
command.  That  discoveiy  by  the  men  goes  far 
to  make  an  officer  capable.  Let  the  men  once 
think  their  commander  careless  about  slaugh- 
ter, and  they  will  not  respond  as  quickly. 

"Men,'  presently  spoke  the  young  officer,  as 
coolly  and  slowly  as  though  he  were  explaining  a 
manoeuvre  in  his  once  favorite  game  of  football, 
"we  have  now  to  reach  the  house  yonder,  and 
there's  a  likelihood  of  our  being  fired  upon 
when  we  move  forward.  When  I  give  the  order 
you'll  run  slowly,  at  the  gait  set  by  Sergeant 
Overton,  who  will  be  ahead  of  you.  If  you 


132  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

hear  the  command  to  lie  down,  drop  in  your 
tracks.  But  let  no  man  lie  down  until  he  hears 
the  word.  We  may  have  to  employ  half  a 
dozen  rushes  in  reaching  the  house.  Eise! 
Sergeant  Overton  to  the  front.  Forward! 
Charge! " 

Steadily  and  gallantly  the  little  line  swept 
forward.  Hal  Overton,  who  knew  the  pace  ex- 
actly, went  forward  at  a  trot  that  did  not  vary 
by  as  much  as  a  step  to  the  minute. 

In  the  distance  half  a  dozen  rifles  popped 
out  singly.  Some  of  the  bullets  whistled  by, 
others  struck  the  ground  near  them,  ploughing 
up  the  dirt. 

If  any  soldier  looked  for  Lieutenant  Pres- 
cott  to  order  them  down,  he  was  in  error.  An- 
other hundred  yards  they  covered.  Then  a 
volley  rang  out  from  the  men  hidden  in  the 
grove,  and  Private  Danes  dropped,  though  with- 
out a  cry. 

"Lie  down!"  shouted  Prescott  steadily, 
though  he  remained  with  his  field  glass  to  his 
eyes,  searching  the  grove.  "Sergeant  Overton, 
see  how  badly  Danes  is  hurt." 

Hal  strode  over  to  where  the  wounded  man 
lay. 

"Oh,  it  ain't  nothing,  Sarge,"  growled  Pri- 
vate Danes  disgustedly.  "Just  enough  to  give 
me  a  toothache  in  the  hip." 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  133 

\ 

Yet  the  poor  fellow  pointed  to  a  blood- 
stained spot  right  over  the  center  of  the  hip 
bone.  Danes 's  left  leg  would  never  again  be 
sound  enough  to  march  with  his  comrades. 
Perhaps  the  man  realized  it,  but  he  was  a  sol- 
dier, and  therefore  made  no  fuss. 

"You'll  have  to  lie  quiet,  Danes, "  returned 
Sergeant  Hal.  "We'll  get  you  out  of  this." 

Just  then  Private  Kelly  raised  his  head  for 
a  look  at  the  adjacent  grove. 

As  he  did  so  a  shot  rang  out  over  in  the  grove 
and  Kelly  uttered  an  exclamation  of  disgust. 

"Hit,  Kelly ?'?  queried  Sergeant  Hal,  step- 
ping over  to  him. 

Private  Kelly  spat  out  two  loose  front  teeth 
and  some  blood. 

"Ye  see  what  happened,  Sarge,"  retorted 
Kelly.  "It's  a  good  thing  the  fellow  drew  a 
bead  on  me  profile.  But  I  ain't  kicking  at  get- 
ting a  dentist's  services  for  nothing.  No,  that 
ain  't  my  kick. ' ' 

"What  is  wrong,  then?"  laughed  Hal. 

"Why,  that  blamed  bullet  was  hot,  and  the 
Moro  made  me  swallow  it !  It  was  so  hot  that 
it  burned  all  the  way  down!  Got  any  ice, 
Sarge  f ' > 

A  burst  came  from  a  dozen  distant  rifles  at 
once.  Bullets  tore  through  the  air  around  Lieu- 
tenant Prescott  as  he  stood,  still  with  his  field 


134  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

glass  to  his  eyes.  Looking  around,  however,  he 
saw  Hal  standing,  and  commanded  severely: 

4 1  If  you  're  through  with  your  work,  Sergeant 
Overton,  lie  down.  Beady,  men,  for  just  one 
volley.  Load ;  aim — at  the  front  timber  line  of 
that  grove.  Fire!' 

Hardly  had  the  crashing  volley  ripped  out 
when  again  the  young  officer  's  voice  was  heard : 

"llise,  forward,  charge!' 

This  time  the  line  moved  with  a  yell,  the  two 
men  who  carried  Danes  yelling  as  loudly  as  the 
rest. 

"Halt!    Lie  down!" 

They  were  within  two  hundred  yards  of  the 
Seaforth  house  now.  The  front  door  of  that 
building  had  been  thrown  open,  though  no  one 
appeared  as  yet  in  the  doorway. 

It  began  to  look  as  though  the  Moros  had 
withdrawn,  or  else  were  waiting  for  something, 
for  no  shots  came  from  the  enemy. 

Again,  at  command,  the  detachment  rose  and 
rushed  forward,  this  time  without  cheering. 

"Lie  down!" 

Uncle  Sam's  men  dropped  in  their  tracks, 
close  to  the  house. 

Now,  Seaforth,  the  planter,  appeared  in  the 
doorway. 

"Captain,  I  hope  I  needn't  tell  you  that  you 
and  your  men  are  welcome,"  came  Seaforth 's 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  135 

greeting.  He  was  hardly  a  middle-aged  man, 
but  three  years  of  planter's  life  in  Mindanao  had 
brought  deep  gray  streaks  into  his  hair. 

"I've  a  wounded  man  to  bring  inside,'  an- 
nounced young  Prescott. 

"Bring  him  right  in,  sir;  we'll  make  him  as 
comfortable  as  we  can. ' ? 

Private  Danes  fainted  while  being  lifted  and 
carried  into  the  house.  He  was  soon  after  re- 
vived, however.  The  two  men  who  had  brought 
him  in  now  used  a  first-aid  package  in  dressing: 
the  wound,  after  they  Tiad  washed  it. 

In  the  meantime  Lieutenant  Prescott  dis- 
covered that  none  of  the  whites  in  the  house 
had  been  hit,  though  one  of  the  loyal  Moro  de- 
fenders of  the  house  had  been  killed  and  two 
others  wounded. 

Then  the  lieutenant  told  of  Edwards 's  death. 
A  young  woman  in  the  room  promptly  fainted. 

"That's  Miss  Daly,  the  school  teacher,'  ex- 
plained Mr.  Seaf orth.  ' i  She  and  Edwards  were 
engaged  to  be  married." 

Outside  more  shots  sounded.  Lieutenant 
Prescott  ran  to  the  door. 

Sergeant  Hal,  however,  had  detailed  twenty 
of  his  men  to  answer  the  fire,  whenever  they 
saw  anything  to  shoot  at,  while  the  others  had 
been  ordered  to  get  to  work  with  their  intrench- 
ing tools. 


136  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

This  tool,  in  appearance,  is  about  half  way 
between  a  bayonet  and  a  trowel.  With  it  a 
soldier  can  lie  on  the  ground,  digging  and  throw- 
ing up  dirt  before  him,  while  he  opens  a  shallow 
trench  in  which  to  lie  and  conceal  himself  from 
the  enemy's  fire. 

"Don't  waste  any  ammunition.  Sergeant. 
Have  your  men  shoot  to  hit,"  directed  the  offi- 
cer. "I'm  going  back  into  the  house,  but  send 
for  me  if  you  see  any  suspicious  move  on  the 
part  of  the  Moros.  '*' 

"Yes,  sir,"  and  Sergeant  Overton  turned  his 
face  towards  the  enemy. 

Though  he  made  his  men  remain  prostrate  on 
the  ground,  Hal  Overton  stood  up.  He  was 
using  the  lieutenant's  field  glass. 

The  walls  of  the  planter's  house  were  riddled 
with  bullets,  for  this  house  had  not  been  con- 
structed as  a  fort.  Along  the  outer  walls,  how- 
ever, bags  of  earth  had  been  piled  in  such  a  way 
as  to  afford  comparative  safety  to  the  defenders. 

"Those  of  us  who  weren't  fighting,'  ex- 
plained Mr.  Seaforth,  "have  been  engaged  for 
hours  in  digging  dirt  in  the  cellar  and  bringing 
it  up  in  the  sacks.  But  it  was  a  fearful  morning 
until  you  arrived.  Now,  our  only  danger  is 
from  a  stray  bullet.  The  Moros  won't  come  any 
Closer — they  won't  dare  to  charge  the  house  with 
such  a  force  of  troops  here  to  defend  the  place." 


>  .IS^J^-  *"'^?<U 


Lieutenant  Prescott  Climbed  One  of  the  Wooden  Porch  Columns. 

137 


THE  NEW 
PUBLIC  UflHAHY 

AHTOR.  LENOX   AND 

PI! 
B 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  139 

"Not  unless  the  rascals  are  reinforced,'  re- 
plied Prescott.  "There  is  no  telling  how  many 
of  the  natives  are  concerned  in  this  uprising. 
Hello — pardon  me  a  moment.' 

Through  the  open  doorway  Prescott  had 
caught  sight  of  something  moving  down  the 
highway.  He  ran  speedily  outside,  got  his 
glasses  from  Sergeant  Hal  and  returned  to  the 
porch,  where  he  climbed  one  of  the  wooden 
columns.  Now  he  brought  the  glass  to  his  eyes. 

"What  do  you  see?"  asked  Mr.  Seaforth. 

"I  see,'7  chuckled  the  lieutenant  quietly, 
"that  it  was  well  for  us  that  we  left  the  road 
and  came  through  the  forest.  Yonder  are  at 
least  two  hundred  Moros  marching  along. 
There,  they  are  debouching  into  the  forest  and 
will  soon  be  added  to  the  attacking  party  here. 
Those  fellows  went  down  the  road  to  ambush 
us  on  the  way,  for  they  received  a  signal  that 
we  were  on  the  road.  "We  fooled  them,  but  we 
shall  have  to  reckon  with  them  here,  and  within 
fifteen  minutes.  Mr.  Seaforth,  send  all  your 
people  down  into  the  cellar  of  the  house.  There 
they  will  be  safe.  This  is  a  job  for  the  Army 
alone ! ' 

"But " 

"I  am  in  command  here,  sir,  and  I  direct  you 
to  send  all  of  your  own  people  to  the  cellar  at 
once.  That  will  free  our  minds  of  any  dread 


140  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

for  the  safety  of  your  people,  and  will  leave 
us  open  to  handle  the  problem  that  is  coming 
to  us." 

Then,  quite  regardless  of  the  fine  mark  that 
he  presented  to  possible  sharpshooters  over  in 
the  grove,  Lieutenant  Prescott  stepped  outside. 

"Sergeant  Overton!" 

"Sir!" 

Hal  stepped  beside  his  officer.  Thereupon  the 
enemy's  riflemen  took  heart  and  drove  in  a 
score  of  bullets.  Lieutenant  Prescott 's  hat  was 
shot  from  his  head.  Two  bullets  passed  through 
the  edge  of  the  sergeant's  right  trousers'  leg, 
one  hole  showing  just  above  the  other.  The 
back  of  Hal's  left  hand  was  grazed  just  enough 
to  show  the  blood.  The  stick  that  the  lieuten- 
ant carried  was  cut  in  two  by  a  bullet  and  half 
of  the  stick  carried  away  from  him. 

"Sergeant,"  chuckled  the  lieutenant,  "you've 
heard  the  expression,  '  observed  of  all  observ- 
ers.' Now  you  know  just  how  it  feels." 

"Yes,  sir." 

"Now,  we've  got  to  be  quick,  Sergeant,  We 
must  throw  our  men  all  around  the  house,  and 
dig  trenches  as  fast  as  we  can.  Unless  I  miss 
my  guess,  the  enemy  will — well,  what!" 

"The  Moros  will  try  to  overwhelm  us  with  a 
reckless  charge,  sir,"  answered  the  young  ser- 
geant. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  141 


CHAPTER  XIII 

A  TALE  OF  MORO  BLACKMAIL 

*<rr\ HAT'S  what  they  will  do — if  anything," 
nodded  Lieutenant  Prescott.  "A 
charge  is  the  wisest  thing  for  the  brown 
rascals,  if  they  are  bent  on  winning  here.  They 
know  now  about  how  many  men  I  have,  and 
they  know  that  my  men  are  regulars.  The 
Moros  have  plenty  of  rifles,  and  I  judge  that 
they're  well  off  in  ammunition,  but  they  can't 
shoot  as  well  as  American  regulars.  On  a 
charge,  however — in  close,  hand-to-hand  fight- 
ing— these  Malays  are  not  to  be  despised.  They 
always  fought  hand-to-hand  in  the  old  days,  and 
it's  in  their  blood." 

With  that  expression  of  his  views,  Prescott, 
aided  by  his  acting  first  sergeant,  began  to  hustle 
the  soldiers  into  line  around  the  house,  forming 
the  men  in  a  rectangle  at  about  fifteen  yards  dis- 
tant from  the  walls  of  the  building. 

The  soldier  of  to-day  must  often  fight  lying 
on  his  stomach.  These  men  of  B  Company 
crawled  to  their  stations,  dragging  their  rifles 
after  them. 

Pop!  pop!  pop!  The  Moros  were  watching, 
and  fired  from  time  to  time,  irregularly.  A 


142  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

prostrate  man  is  hard  to  hit  at  a  few  hundred 
yards.  These  pot-shots  serve  to  bother  and  ir- 
ritate soldiers  getting  into  position. 

As  soon  as  each  soldier  was  in  place  he  began 
burrowing  with  his  intrenching  tool.  It  is  sur- 
prising how  quickly  a  man  lying  down  can  dig 
a  little  ditch  and  throw  up  the  dirt  on  the  out- 
side. 

First,  each  man  dug  his  own  ditch.  As  soon 
as  he  had  this  completed  he  connected  his  ditch 
with  that  of  the  men  next  to  him.  Within  thirty 
minutes  the  men  of  B  Company,  without  having 
a  man  hit  by  the  pot-shots  of  the  enemy,  were 
well  intrenched.  From  time  to  time  some  of 
the  soldiers,  under  orders,  ceased  their  digging 
to  take  a  few  shots  themselves,  just  to  keep  the 
Moros  from  growing  too  bold. 

As  soon  as  the  encircling  trench  had  been  dug 
Prescott  detailed  four  men,  with  picks  and 
shovels  furnished  by  the  elder  Seaf orth,  to  throw 
up  a  trench  wall  in  front  of  the  main  door  of 
the  house,  so  as  to  permit  any  one  safely  to 
enter  or  leave  the  house  by  that  door. 

"That'll  do,  Sergeant,"  nodded  Lieutenant 
Prescott  at  last. 

"It  would  take  a  three-inch  field  piece,  sir, 
to  make  an  impression  on  this  wall  of  dirt,' 
smiled  Sergeant  Hal. 

"Now,  I'll  look  after  this  part  of  the  ground, 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  143 

Sergeant;  you  go  around  to  the  south  side — 
and  be  vigilant.' 

Hal  Overton  stepped  out  from  behind  the  wall, 
carrying  his  rifle  in  the  hollow  of  his  left  arm. 
As  he  showed  himself  above  the  low  wall  of  the 
regular  trench,  exposing  his  head  and  trunk, 
the  Moros  began  to  take  notice. 

Pop!  pop!  pop!  Bullets  struck  all  about  the 
young  sergeant,  sprinkling  dirt  over  him. 

'  *  Keep  your  head  below  the  top  of  the  trench 
wall,  Sergeant !"  called  Lieutenant  Prescott 
sternly.  "We  can't  afford  to  have  you  hit. 
Shield  yourself.  Don 't  be  afraid  of  any  one  sus- 
pecting you  of  cold  feet!' 

So  Hal,  though  he  made  a  slight  grimace,  con- 
tented himself  with  crouching  low  and  progress- 
ing slowly. 

Barely  had  Sergeant  Hal  gained  his  own  post, 
with  Private  Kelly  on  his  right  hand,  when  a 
furious  fusillade  broke  out  from  the  southward. 

"Keep  your  heads  down,  all  of  you !"  shouted 
the  young  sergeant.  "Don't  be  too  curious 
about  what  the  Moros  are  doing.  If  you  keep 
your  heads  down  the  rascals  can't  hit  you,  and 
it  won't  do  us  any  harm  to  let  them  waste  their 
ammunition.  Don't  any  man  fire  without 
orders. ' 

"They're  doing  some  good  shooting,  Sarge,  at 
last,"  remarked  Private  Kelly,  as  the  showers  of 


144  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

bullets   peppered   the   top   of   the   trench   and 
sprinkled  dirt  over  the  crouching  soldiers. 

i  *  The  only  good  shooting,  Kelly,  is  that  which 
cuts  up  the  enemy/'  rejoined  Hal.  "The  goo- 
goos  are  not  hitting  any  of  us,  and  we're  not 
losing  anything  by  saving  our  ammunition." 

"Goo-goos'  is  an  old  name  applied  to  the 
Philippine  raiders.  Whenever  a  native  grows 
tired  of  fighting,  or  wants  to  enter  a  town  for 
the  purpose  of  getting  information,  he  hides  his 
arms,  then  enters  Uncle  Sam's  lines,  pretending 
that  he  is  a  "good"  man,  and  not  a  rebel  against 
the  authority  of  the  United  States  Government. 
From  this  the  soldiers  have  learned  to  allude  to 
all  fighting  Filipinos  as  goo-goos. 

"Lend  me  your  trenching  tool,  Kelly?" 

"Sure,  Sarge. " 

With  this  implement  Hal  Overton  burrowed 
a  small  hole  through  the  top  of  the  trench.  Thus, 
without  exposing  himself  too  much,  he  was  able 
to  keep  an  eye  on  the  distant  grove  in  which  the 
Moros  had  found  cover. 

"I'll  let  you  spell  me  on  this  watch,  from 
time  to  time,  Kelly, ' '  said  Hal. 

"I'll  be  glad  to,  Sarge,  for  I'll  admit  that  I'm 
anxious  to  know  what  the  goo-goos  are  doing.' 

"At  present  they're  not  trying  to  advance,' 
replied  Sergeant  Overton,  "and  that's  about  all 
we're  interested  in.    As  long  as  they  stay  where 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  145 

they  are,  and  waste  their  ammunition,  they'll 
not  bother  us  much.7 

In  the  meantime  Lieutenant  Prescott  was 
seated  in  a  chair  behind  the  high  wall  of  dirt 
before  the  house  door.  The  elder  Seaforth  oc- 
cupied another  chair. 

"Have  you  any  idea,  sir,  how  you  incurred 
the  wrath  of  these  Moro  rascals  I9  asked  the 
young  lieutenant. 

"By  refusing  to  pay  blackmail,'  replied  the 
planter  bluntly. 

"Then  you  were  asked  to  pay  money  to  some 
of  these  native  chieftains!' 

"No." 

"Eh?" 

"I  wasn't  asked;  I  was  commanded  to  do 
so,"  replied  Mr.  Seaforth  slowly.  "When  you 
speak  of  the  Moro  rascals,  Lieutenant,  don't 
conclude  that  all  of  the  Moros  are  bad,  or  even 
troublesome.  The  truth  is  that  most  of  the 
Moros  on  the  island  of  Mindanao  are  good  fel- 
lows. They're  lazy,  but  not  notably  vicious. 
There  are  a  few  of  the  old-time  chiefs — dattos, 
they  call  'em — who  make  trouble  every  now  and 
then.  These  dattos  never  respected  the  Spanish 
Government,  and  they  don't  feel  any  more  kindly 
towards  the  United  States  Government.  That 
is  because  these  dattos  have  always  lived  by 
plunder,  and  they  always  intend  to  do  so.  For 

JO 4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


146  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

one  thing,  these  raiding  dattos  don  't  like  to  have 
white  men  on  Mindanao.  The  spread  of  civil- 
ization here  means  that  the  old-time  dattos  will 
be  driven  into  the  wilds,  and  that  there  won't 
be  any  more  plunder  or  blackmail  money  to  live 
on.  These  Moros  out  yonder  wouldn't  have 
bothered  me,  this  time,  if  I  had  paid  the  money 
their  chief  demanded." 

"How  much  did  he  want,  Mr.  Seaforth?" 

"Ten  thousand  dollars." 

"  Whew !    That  would  be  a  good  deal  of  money 
to  pay  out. ' ' 

"For  the  sake  of  peace,  and  a  chance  to  carry 
on  my  plantation  business,  Lieutenant,  I  might 
have  paid  it — if  once  would  have  been  enough. 
But  it  wouldn't  have  been.  If  I  had  acceded  to 
his  demand  the  datto  would  have  let  me  alone 
for  this  year.  He  would  have  sent  the  same  de- 
mand next  year,  however.  In  fact,  the  datto 
would  have  put  me  down  on  his  list  as  being 
good  for  ten  thousand  dollars  a  year  tribute. 
The  first  year  that  I  failed  to  pay  this  tribute  my 
plantation  would  be  destroyed,  and  myself,  my 
family  and  friends  put  to  the  knife.  So  it's 
either  fight  or  get  out  of  here  for  good.  It 
seems  a  strange  thing,  doesn't  it,  Lieutenant,  to 
live  under  the  Stars  and  Stripes,  and  yet  to  have 
to  pay  tribute  to  a  savage  for  the  right  to 
business?" 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  147 

"It  isn't  right,  it  can't  be,  sir — and  by  the 
great  howitzer,  Uncle  Sam  will  put  a  stop  to  all 
this  business!"  replied  Lieutenant  Prescott 
hotly. 

"I  hope  so,"  returned  Mr.  Seaforth.  "The 
Datto  Hakkut,  however,  has  been  doing  business 
here  on  Mindanao  since  before  the  Spaniards 
left,  and  my  opinion  is  that  he  will  do  business 
as  long  as  he  lives.  This  fellow  Hakkut  is  a 
wily  old  scoundrel,  who  often  falls  into  traps 
set  for  him  by  our  soldiers.  Yet,  just  when  the 
soldiers  are  about  to  close  the  trap,  they  find 
that  Hakkut  isn't  there.  His  escapes  are  mar- 
velous. ' 

"Did  Hakkut  himself  come  to  see  you,  Mr. 
Seaforth?"  inquired  the  young  lieutenant. 

"Hakkut I  I've  never  seen  the  fellow,  nor 
has  any  other  white  man  around  here,  so  far  as 
I  know. ' ' 

"Then  he  sends  a  regular  collector  for  the 
money?" 

"Yes.    He  has  a  new  collector  this  year." 

"A  Moro?" 

"The  fellow  looks  to  me  more  like  a  Tagalo. 
He's  a  sharp,  keen,  little  business  man — of  his 
peculiar  type." 

"A  Tagalo?"  mused  Lieutenant  Prescott. 
"By  Jove,  I  wish  you'd  give  me  a  close  descrip- 
tion of  the  fellow. ' ' 


148  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

"Perhaps  I  can  do  better  than  that,'  pro- 
posed Mr.  Seaforth,  rising.  "When  the  col- 
lector was  here  my  son  succeeded — without  the 
rascal's  knowledge — in  getting  a  snapshot  at 
him.  I  think  I  can  find  the  photo. '? 

Disappearing  into  the  house,  the  planter  soon 
returned,  handing  the  young  officer  a  card. 
Prescott  gazed  at  the  photo,  then  called  out : 

"Men,  pass  the  word  for  Sergeant  Overton 
to  report  here.  Tell  him  that  his  orders  are  to 
keep  under  cover  while  on  the  way  here. ' 

Hal  soon  appeared,  crouching  behind  the 
trench,  and  sheltered  by  the  high  dirt  wall. 

"Sergeant,  have  you  ever  seen  this  fellow 
in  the  photo?"  inquired  the  lieutenant,  with  a 
smile,  passing  the  card  to  Overton. 

"I  should  think  I  have,  sir.  This  is  Vicente 
Tomba." 

1 '  Can 't  be  a  doubt  about  it,  can  there  ? r 

"Not  unless  Tomba  has  a  twin  brother,  sir.' 

"And  to  think  that  we  had  that  little  rascal 
in  arrest!'  muttered  the  lieutenant.  "It  was 
a  sad  day  for  Mindanao  when  Tomba  escaped 
from  our  guard  house/ ' 

Then,  after  a  pause,  Prescott  continued : 

"By  the  way,  Mr.  Seaforth,  how  long  has 
Draney  been  on  his  present  plantation!' 

"I  don't  know,  Lieutenant,  He's  been  there 
longer  than  I  have  resided  here." 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  149 

"Has  he  ever  been  troubled  by  the  Moros!' 

"They  have  never  attacked  him,  Lieutenant. 
Draney  must  pay  some  tribute  to  the  Datto 
Hakkut. ' ' 

Lieutenant  Prescott  and  Sergeant  Hal  Over- 
ton  glanced  quickly  at  one  another,  though 
neither  spoke. 

"That  is  all,  Sergeant, "  said  the  officer,  by 
way  of  dismissal.  "Beturn  to  your  men." 

"Very  good,  sir." 


CHAPTER  XIV 

THE  CALL  FOR  MIDNIGHT  COURAGE 

AT  a  few  minutes  past  six  it  was  dark,  for 
the  sun  goes  down  early  in  the  tropics. 
Now  the  soldiers  were  relieved  from 
their  cramped  positions  of  the  day.     A  few  at 
a  time  they  left  the  trenches,  rising  and  walking 
about. 

Inside  the  house  their  bacon  was  cooked  for 
them  and  their  coffee  made.  Mr.  Seaforth,  who 
was  abundantly  supplied  with  food,  added  a 
variety  of  palatable  eatables  to  their  night  meal. 
Lieutenant  Prescott  and  Sergeant  Hal  Over- 
ton  walked  together  around  the  line  of  defenses. 
The  officer  frequently  used  his  night  glass,  now 
and  then  passing  it  to  the  boyish  sergeant. 


150  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

"Yon  see,  Overton, '  said  the  lieutenant, 
"from  all  ontward  appearances  there  isn't  a 
Moro  left  in  the  woods  anywhere  around  here. 
Our  good  judgment  tells  us,  however,  now  that 
night  has  come,  that  we  shall  do  well  to  be  doubly 
alert." 

"Do  you  think  they  will  dare  attack  so  large 
a  force  in  a  sudden  rush,  sir?" 

"It  is  the  only  trick  by  which  the  rascals  could 
hope  to  beat  out  an  intrenched  force  of  regulars, 
Overton.  By  a  rush  they  could  have  taken  the 
house  before  we  arrived,  but  I  fancy  that  the 
first  attack  was  made  only  as  a  bluff.  They 
hoped  to  be  able  to  scare  Mr.  Seaforth  into  pay- 
ing the  blackmail  their  datto  had  demanded. 
Now  that  the  troops  are  here,  they  realize  that 
their  bluff  has  been  met,  and  that  they've  got 
to  fight  or  quit.  I  believe  that  the  chances  are 
about  even  on  fight  or  quit.  I'd  like  to  hurry 
up  their  quitting  by  a  charge,  but  it  might  cost 
us  some  men,  and  my  orders  go  only  as  far  as 
defending  the  plantation  and  the  white  people 
here.  Sergeant,  I  have  about  decided  to  send 
a  report  to  Captain  Cortland.  I  believe  it  would 
be  safer  to  send  one  or  two  soldiers,  if  they're 
the  right  kind  of  men,  than  to  send  a  detach- 
ment. A  detachment  would  be  almost  certain 
to  be  attacked  on  the  way.  Two  or  three  bright 
men  might  slip  away  unseen,  and  get  word  to 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  151 

the  captain  and  back  to  me.  You  know  the  men 
better  than  I  do.  Whom  do  you  suggest?" 

"I'd  like  to  go  myself,  sir,"  proposed  Ser- 
geant Hal,  his  eyes  blazing  with  eagerness. 

"Absolutely  out  of  the  question,  Sergeant. 
You're  second  in  command  here,  and  there's  no 
knowing  at  what  moment  I  may  be  hit.  Who 's 
a  good  man,  outside  of  yourself?" 

"Private  Kelly." 

"Send  for  him." 

Kelly  lost  no  time  in  reporting. 

"Private  Kelly,  do  you  think  you  can  slip 
through  the  enemy's  lines  and  carry  a  message 
from  me  to  Captain  Cortland?" 

"I  can,  if  any  man  in  B  Company  can,  sir," 
replied  the  soldier  promptly,  though  without  ex- 
citement. 

"Who  is  the  man  you'd  like  best  to  have  with 
you?" 

"Slosson,  sir." 

6  *  See  if  he  wants  the  detail.  I  prefer  that  this 
shall  be  volunteer  work. ' ' 

In  a  few  minutes  Kelly  returned,  accompanied 
by  Slosson. 

"Do  you  want  to  go,  Slosson!"  inquired  Lieu- 
tenant Prescott. 

"Yes,  sir,"  responded  the  soldier  promptly. 

"It's  an  extra-dangerous  detail,  and  you  may 
lose  your  life." 


152  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

"I'll  chance  it,  sir.  I  broke  my  pipe  in  one 
of  the  rushes  here,  and  I  want  to  get  back  to 
barracks  and  get  another.' 

Lieutenant  Prescott  conld  not  repress  a  laugh 
over  such  a  reason.  Slosson  joined  in,  good- 
humoredly  and  respectfully. 

<•  <•  Very  good ;  you  two  men  report  here  in  half 
an  hour  and  I  '11  have  my  message  ready.  Better 
fill  your  canteens  with  coffee  before  you  start. 
Take  nothing  else  but  your  cartridge  belts,  rifles 
and  bayonets. ' 

"Very  good,  sir,"  answered  both  soldiers,  sa- 
luting and  withdrawing. 

Punctual  to  the  moment,  both  men  were  back 
again.  Lieutenant  Prescott  had  prepared  his 
report,  which  he  handed  to  Kelly,  who  fastened 
it  in  an  inner  pocket  with  a  safety  pin. 

"Now,  you'll  want  to  start  at  once,  for  it 
won't  be  safe  to  return  here  later  than  just  be- 
fore the  coming  of  dawn, ' '  said  Lieutenant  Pres- 
cott. 

"Yes,  sir,"  answered  both  men  coolly. 

"Take  care  of  yourselves,  men!' 

"Yes,  sir.' 

"We'll  watch  and  listen  until  you  get  safely 
away.  If  any  trouble  starts  near  here  hold  your 
ground  and  rely  upon  my  sending  men  to  your 
aid. ' ' 

"Very  good,  sir." 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  153 

Lieutenant  Prescott  and  Sergeant  Overton 
watched  the  two  soldiers  step  over  the  entrench- 
ment, crouch,  and  vanish  into  the  darkness. 

' '  I  hope  they  get  through, ' '  sighed  the  young 
officer.  "By  the  way,  Sergeant,  from  the  fact 
of  your  recommending  the  men  I  didn  't  ask  you 
whether  either  man  is  likely  to  drink  any  in- 
toxicant at  Bontac  and  unfit  himself  for  the 
return. ' 

' i  Neither  man  touches  liquor,  sir. ' 

1  i  Then  they  're  to  be  depended  upon.  I  never 
trust  work  of  importance  to  a  man  who  drinks. ' 

"There's  a  bed  in  the  house  for  you,  when- 

•/  / 

ever  you  wish  it  to-night, ' '  announced  Mr.  Sea- 
forth,  stepping  outside. 

' '  Thank  you,  sir,  but  when  in  the  field  I  sleep 
with  my  men.  I  shall  spread  my  poncho  and 
blanket  on  the  ground  presently.  Sergeant 
Overton,  I  leave  you  in  command  until  half  past 
one  in  the  morning.  At  that  hour  rouse  me,  re- 
port, and  then  turn  in  yourself. ' 

"Very  good,  sir." 

"Of  course,  if  anything  turns  up  in  the  mean- 
time, you'll  call  me.' 

"Yes,  sir." 

For  some  minutes  more  the  two  young  Amer- 
icans stood  listening  for  sounds  of  possible 
trouble  which  Kelly  and  Slosson  might  have  en- 
countered. Then  the  lieutenant  spread  his  bed 


154  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

and  lay  down  without  removing  any  of  his  cloth- 
ing, placing  his  revolver  beside  him  on  the 
ground. 

Hal  set  guards  on  all  sides,  while  the  rest  of 
the  men  turned  in,  which  they  were  glad  to  do. 

Another  army  now  invaded  them!  Mos- 
quitoes— myriads  of  them — buzzed  busily  about, 
seeking  whom  they  might  devour!  The  mos- 
quito of  the  Philippines  is  well  entitled  to  be 
called  an  insect  of  prey.  He  is  a  big  fellow, 
tireless,  always  hungry  and  a  valiant  fighter. 
The  men  who  lay  on  the  ground  carefully 
wrapped  themselves  in  their  blankets,  with  their 
hands  tucked  in.  Their  heads  and  necks  were 
protected  by  collapsible  nets  that  they  had  taken 
from  their  haversacks. 

For  those  who  were  up  and  on  duty  the  tor- 
ment of  the  flying  pests  was  acute.  There  was 
little  danger  of  a  sentry  going  to  sleep  without 
a  head  net  and  some  protection  for  his  hands. 

" Ain't  it  awful,  Sarge?"  demanded  Private 
Bender,  as  Hal  paused  near  him. 

"That  word  isn't  strong  enough,"  grinned 
Hal  ruefully,  as  he  "swatted"  at  mosquitoes 
three  times  in  quick  succession. 

"I  don't  mind  the  Moros,"  continued  Bender, 
"and  I  try  to  be  a  good  soldier,  but  I'm  afraid 
I'd  surrender  to  the  'skeets*  if  they  had  intel- 
ligence enough  to  recognize  the  white  flag. ' 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  155 

"We  get  only  two  years  of  this  at  a  time,' 
laughed  Sergeant  Hal.    "Then  we  can  go  back 
to  the  United  States  for  a  vacation.' 

"I  used  to  think,  back  in  God's  country,  that 
a  soldier's  day  and  night  were  full  of  work,' 
remarked  Bender  wistfully;  "but  I'd  rather  go 
back  there  and  go  to  work  than  have  to  stand 
these  'skeets.' 

"They're  not  so  bad  in  barracks,'  Hal  an- 
swered. "It's  only  in  the  field  that  the  pests 
can  torment  us  like  this.' 

"From  present  signs,'  commented  Private 
Bender,  "  I  'm  thinking  that  we  '11  put  in  a  large 
part  of  our  two  years  in  the  field.  These  Moros 
are  ugly  and  determined  when  they  get  started. ' 

"They're  not  bothering  us  much  just  now,' 
replied  Hal,  as  he  started  on  his  round  of  in- 
spection. 

Nine  o  'clock  came  and  passed.  Not  a  shot  had 
been  fired  since  late  in  the  afternoon.  Nor  had 
there  been  any  sound  to  indicate  that  Kelly  or 
Slosson  had  encountered  trouble  near  the  plan- 
tation. Now  that  he  was  in  command,  Overton 
did  not  allow  himself  to  be  lulled  into  indiffer- 
ence by  the  stillness  of  the  dark  night.  A  sleep- 
ing volcano  might  start  into  eruption  at  any 
moment.  At  every  important  point  along  the 
trenches  Hal  paused,  using  the  night  glass  that 
the  lieutenant  had  loaned  him. 


156  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

Ten  o  'clock  came  and  passed  without  trouble. 
Then  eleven  and  finally  midnight  passed.  Ser- 
geant Hal,  however,  was  not  to  be  caught  nap- 
ping. He  resolved  to  be  vigilant  until  Lieuten- 
ant Prescott  relieved  him. 

Hal  had  just  glanced  again  at  his  watch, 
noting  that  the  hour  was  nearly  one,  when  a 
quiet  voice  reached  him : 

"Private  Bender  calls  the  sergeant!" 

Hal  Overton  ran  quickly  around  to  the  place 
where  Bender  stood  peering  off  into  the  dark- 
ness. 

"Use  your  glass  yonder,  Sarge,"  urged  the 
soldier.  < l  See  if  you  see  anything  moving. ' ? 

"I  do,"  Hal  answered  quietly.  "I  see  figures 
crawling  out  of  the  woods,  headed  this  way. 
Pass  the  word  to  rouse  every  man  without  noise. 
Then  go  to  Lieutenant  Prescott,  with  my  com- 
pliments, and  report  that  the  enemy  seem  to 
be  crawling  this  way." 

Barely  had  Bender  disappeared  when  Lieu- 
tenant Prescott  came  up  on  a  quick  trot. 

"Starting  things,  are  they,  Sergeant!"  the 
officer  whispered. 

'Here's  your  glass;  look  over  there,  sir." 

Lieutenant  Prescott  looked  quietly  for  a  few 
seconds.  Then  he  turned  to  whisper : 

"Pass  quickly  along  the  lines,  Sergeant,  and 
order  every  man  to  load  his  magazine.  Instruct 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  157 

the  squad  leaders  not  to  let  their  men  get  rattled 
and  shoot  too  soon  or  too  fast.  This  move  may 
be  only  a  ruse. ' 

Bringing  his  hand  smartly  to  the  brim  of  his 
campaign  hat,  Sergeant  Overton  was  off  with 
the  orders.  He  soon  returned,  however,  and 
took  up  his  position  beside  the  lieutenant. 

Then,  in  a  twinkling,  scattering  Moro  volleys 
sounded  on  the  other  side  of  the  house,  followed 
by  wild,  savage  yells. 

"That's  probably  a  ruse  to  draw  us  around 
there/  muttered  Prescott.  "Sergeant  Dins- 
more  is  there  in  charge,  and  he  '11  know  what  to 
do.  Good !  He 's  attending  to  it. ' ' 

For  now  the  sharper  tones  of  the  Army  rifles 
began  to  rip  out  on  the  further  side  of  the  house. 

Suddenly  another  volley  of  shots  rang  out 
on  the  near  side  of  the  house,  showers  of  bullets 
driving  in. 

"Lie  down,  Sergeant!"  ordered  Lieutenant 
Prescott,  falling  back. 

"Are  you  hit,  sir?"  asked  Hal  anxiously. 

"No,  no;  look  after  your  fire  control.  Let 
your  men  fire  whenever  they  see  anything  to 
hit,  but  not  in  volleys.  Shoot  sharp,  men ! ' ' 

Hal 's  regulars,  crouching  in  the  trench,  needed 
no  further  orders.  They  could  now  see,  dimly, 
the  figures  of  the  oncoming  Moros,  advancing 
by  rushes. 


158  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

The  enemy's  fire  became  so  heavy  that  Lieu- 
tenant Prescott  decided  it  to  be  an  act  of  pru- 
dence to  crouch  down  himself,  though  he  lay 
against  the  trench  wall,  his  head  and  arms  fully 
exposed  as  he  kept  the  night  glass  to  his  eyes. 

"Low  aim,  men!"  warned  Hal,  as  he  passed 
behind  the  firing  line.  * '  Careful  with  every  cart- 
ridge. Every  brown  man  you  hit  is  one  less  to 
meet  with  cold  steel  I" 

This  is  one  of  the  first  lessons  that  the  soldier 
must  learn  on  the  firing  line.  Every  cartridge 
that  he  fires  needlessly  means  one  less  shot  with 
which  to  defend  himself.  Every  man  he  hits 
is  one  less  to  be  reckoned  with  later. 

" Don't  fire  heavily  until  the  rascals  get 
nearer/'  was  Sergeant  Hal's  next  warning. 
"Those  fellows  are  not  very  dangerous  until 
they  get  close.  Then  we'll  have  need  of  cool 
gun  barrels  and  plenty  of  cartridges.  Steady ! ' 

"That  boy  has  the  making  of  a  commander 
in  him/'  thought  Lieutenant  Prescott  approv- 
ingly. "He's  cool  and  all  business.  The  only 
thing  in  the  world  that  he's  thinking  of  is  how 
to  make  the  squad  work  count.  He  isn't  losing 
his  head." 

Night  firing  is  always  uncertain.  It  is  too 
dark  to  see  the  end  sight  on  the  rifle  and  advanc- 
ing figures  show  uncertainly,  like  wavering 
shadows. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  159 

" Don't  fire  so  fast,"  called  Hal,  as  the  rifle 
work  of  the  troops  became  more  brisk.  "Fire 
just  enough  to  annoy  the  rascals.  Save  your 
real  work  until  the  enemy  are  within  a  hundred 
and  fifty  yards. ' ' 

"Wheel  When  the  goo-goos  get  that  close 
they'll  jump  in  and  scalp  us !"  muttered  a  young 
soldier  nervously. 

Hal  crouched  beside  the  young  soldier,  rest- 
ing a  hand  on  his  shoulder. 

"Don't  get  nervous,  Hunter,"  urged  the 
young  sergeant  kindly.  "Leave  all  emotion  and 
quivers  for  the  volunteers  and  for  civilians. 
The  regulars  have  smaller  losses  in  battle  be- 
cause they  depend  upon  their  leaders  and  do 
just  what  they're  told.  Eemember  it,  lad." 

Then  Hal  was  gone,  but  Hunter  found  himself 
flushing  a  little,  yet  wonderfully  steady  in  his 
nerves.  He  shot  carefully,  sighting  as  best  he 
could  for  every  shot. 

After  another  rush,  during  which  they  yelled 
like  fiends,  the  Moros  dropped  to  earth  and  be- 
gan firing  more  heavily. 

During  that  brief  rush,  however,  the  Moros 
lost  several  men,  dropped  by  Yankee  bullets. 

' l  Cease  firing  and  cool  your  rifles ! '  shouted 
Lieutenant  Prescott.  "Load  your  magazines, 
and  be  ready  to  drop  'em  when  they  try  another 
rush." 


160  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

A  minute  later  Datto  Hakkut's  followers  dis- 
covered that  the  American  fire  had  ceased.  Yell- 
ing, the  brown  men  rose  and  charged  like  a 
cyclone. 

"Begin  firing!  Give  it  to  'em — hot!"  shouted 
the  young  officer,  leading  the  firing  coolly  with 
his  revolver. 

Again  the  Moros  dropped  to  earth,  though  not 
until  they  had  lost  a  score  of  men.  For  a  few 
moments  they  lay  there,  not  attempting  to  keep 
up  much  of  a  fire,  for  now  that  they  were  close 
to  Uncle  Sam's  regulars,  who  were  firing  stead- 
ily, it  would  have  been  suicide  for  a  brown  man 
to  raise  his  head  at  all. 

' i  Ta-ra-ta-ra-ta ! '  The  bugler,  sticking  close 
to  the  officer,  had  to  sound  the  order  this  time, 
for  the  cessation  of  firing. 

"Every  man  lay  his  bayonet  in  front  of  him, 
ready  to  fix!'  called  Lieutenant  Prescott,  as 
the  pop-pop-popping  began  to  cease. 

That  meant  cold  steel — the  final  rush  in  which 
the  regulars  must  meet  several  times  their  own 
number  in  deadly  hand-to-hand  conflict. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  161 


CHAPTER  XV 

IN   A    CLINCH    WITH    COLD   STEED 

THEN  came  the  Moro  rush ! 
All  soldiers  cheer  in  the  charge,  but 
these  brown  men  had  their  own  kind 
of  battle-cry — a  deafening,  blood-curdling  din. 

Yet  the  regulars  made  a  noise  that  was  heard 
even  over  the  Moro  yelling.  There  was  a  smart 
sound  of  firing  as  the  magazines  of  the  soldiers' 
rifles  were  once  more  emptied. 

The  slaughter  by  men  coolly  firing  at  this  close 
range,  even  in  the  darkness,  was  a  heavy  one.  It 
testified  to  the  courage  of  these  Moros  that  they 
could  take  such  punishment  and  not  run. 

True,  many  of  the  brown-skinned  foe  did 
waver,  yet  through  their  lines  rushed  groups  of 
yelling  fanatics,  armed  now  only  with  straight 
or  curved  swords  and  knives.  These  men  of 
cold  steel  rushed  valiantly  into  close  quarters. 

To  the  soldiers  the  order  to  fix  bayonets  was 
never  given;  the  men  fixed  their  bayonets  by 
instinct  as  they  emptied  their  magazines. 

Now  steel  met  steel,  in  a  cold,  ringing,  deadly 
clash.  Occasionally  the  cry  of  a  stricken  man 
rent  the  air,  though  the  majority  bore  their 
hurts  with  grunts  or  in  stoical  silence. 

// 4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


162  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

The  greater  part  of  the  regulars  leaped  to  the 
top  of  the  trench  wall  to  meet  the  shock.  That 
move,  however,  soon  carried  them  beyond  the 
entrenchments. 

Some  of  the  regulars  found  themselves  fight- 
ing three  or  more  of  the  enemy  at  once.  Lieu- 
tenant Prescott  shot  one  Moro  dead,  but  as  he 
did  so  Sergeant  Hal  saw  another  Moro,  armed 
with  a  sword,  rush  at  the  lieutenant  from  be- 
hind. 

Overton  leaped  forward,  cracking  the  fellow 's 
head  with  the  butt  of  his  clubbed  gun.  Just  as 
he  did  so  Prescott  fired  squarely  over  Hal's  left 
shoulder,  knocking  over  a  Moro  bent  on  stab- 
bing the  sergeant  from  behind.  The  noise  of 
that  explosion,  so  close  to  his  ear,  deafened  the 
young  sergeant  temporarily. 

Both  officer  and  sergeant  realized  that  each  in 
turn  had  saved  the  other's  life,  but  there  was 
no  time  for  acknowledgments.  The  foe  had  yet 
to  be  met  and  worsted  in  that  furious  conflict. 

At  last  it  was  over.  The  Moro  men  had  broken 
and  fled,  their  yells  dying  out  in  the  distance. 

Fully  two  dozen  of  the  soldiers  started  to 
pursue.  Prescott  turned,  bawling  an  order  to 
the  bugler  over  the  din.  The  notes  of  the  bugle 
recalled  the  soldiers. 

"Men,"  shouted  Lieutenant  Prescott,  "the 
first  duty  is  to  get  the  wounded  behind  the 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  163 

trench  and  then  into  the  house.  Every  man 
badly  hurt  must  have  prompt  attention/ 

Then,  indeed,  came  the  time  to  take  account 
of  what  had  happened. 

Three  of  the  soldiers  already  lay  dead,  their 
heads  and  bodies  frightfully  gashed.  Another, 
Bender,  was  dying  from  two  knife  thrusts 
through  his  lungs. 

Four  more  men  were  too  badly  hurt  to  help 
themselves.  A  dozen  others  had  wounds  of 
varying  degrees  of  seriousness  but  were  able 
to  reach  shelter  unaided. 

Uncle  Sam  had  won  the  victory  for  the  mo- 
ment, but  he  had  paid  dearly  for  it. 

"I'm  glad  you  gave  me  that  word  when  you 
did,  Sergeant, ' '  murmured  Private  Hunter.  ' '  It 
steadied  me.  If  it  hadn't  been  for  that  I  guess 
I'd  have  been  a  goner  by  this  time." 

It  was  after  three  o  'clock  in  the  morning  when 
Sergeant  Overton  felt  that  he  finally  had  a  mo- 
ment for  free  breathing. 

"Sergeant,"  said  the  lieutenant,  "your  watch 
tour  is  long  past.  Lie  down  and  get  some 
sleep. ' 

"You're  sure  that  I  can  be  spared,  sir?' 

"Certainly;  you  can  be  called  if  you're 
needed. ' ' 

To  one  not  accustomed  to  war  it  might  seem 
strange,  but  thirty  seconds  after  Hal  had 


164  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

wrapped  himself  in  his  blanket  he  was  deep  in 
dreamless  slumber.  He  slept  until  the  sun  was 
fairly  high.  Then  Prescott  awoke  him. 

" Kelly — Slosson — are  they  back,  sir?"  were 
Hal's  first  words,  as  he  threw  aside  his  blanket. 

"Back  nearly  three  hours  ago,  Sergeant," 
smiled  the  officer.  "It's  half -past  eight.  I've 
been  occupied,  and  have  missed  my  breakfast. 
Come  into  the  house  and  breakfast  with  me, 
Sergeant  Overton.  Sergeant  Dinsmore  will  look 
after  things  outdoors.' 

"Did — have  you  buried  the  Moros  who  fell?" 
questioned  Hal,  looking  out  beyond  the  trench. 

"The  rascals  sent  over  men  with  two  lan- 
terns, and  asked  permission  to  carry  off  their 
casualties,"  explained  the  officer.  "I  let  them 
do  it." 

"It  must  have  given  them  a  lot  of  work  to 
do, ' '  muttered  Hal. 

"It  did.  I  estimate  their  dead  at  thirty,  and 
their  badly  hurt  at  forty  or  more.  We  made  it 
an  expensive  night  for  them.' 

"We  paid  a  big  price  on  our  own  part,  sir,' 
returned  the  young  sergeant,  "for  we  paid  in 
good  Americans." 

"We  can't  have  war  without  death,  can  we?" 
half  sighed  the  West  Pointer. 

Once  inside  the  house  Hal's  first  care  was  to 
visit  the  wounded  men. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  165 

"Bender's  gone,  sir?'    asked  Hal. 

"Yes,'    nodded  Lieutenant  Prescott  gravely. 

Then  they  went  to  breakfast,  for  the  soldier 
must  eat  or  presently  stop  fighting. 

"You'll  want  to  know  my  orders  from  Cap- 
tain Cortland,"  said  Lieutenant  Prescott,  fill- 
ing his  cup  with  coffee. 

"Yes,  sir;   if  you  feel  at  liberty  to  tell  me.' 

' '  The  captain 's  instructions  are  few.  He  tells 
me  that,  as  commander  in  the  field,  I  will  have 
to  use  my  own  judgment  to  a  great  degree.  But 
the  captain  urges  me,  as  soon  as  I  may  be  satis- 
fied that  the  Moros  have  withdrawn,  to  leave 
Sergeant  Dinsmore  here  with  a  guard  of  twelve 
men,  and  to  bring  the  white  people  from  this 
plantation  into  town  with  me.  Then  Dinsmore, 
if  he  sees  no  more  of  the  Moros  within  three 
days,  is  to  march  his  men  back  to  Bantoc.  With 
the  limited  number  of  men  at  his  disposal  Cap- 
tain Cortland  recognizes  the  impossibility  of 
keeping  a  military  guard  regularly  at  each  plan- 
tation. ' 

"But,  sir,  if  Dinsmore  and  a  dozen  men  had 
to  brave  such  a  charge  as  we  met  last  night  he 
would  stand  a  very  good  chance  of  having  his 
detachment  wiped  out,  wouldn't  he!' 

"No;  for  the  Moros  would  attempt  such  a 
charge  only  in  the  night  time.  Captain  Cort- 
land has  sent  me  a  supply  of  various-colored 


166  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

rockets,  and  a  code  by  which  they  are  to  be  used. 
So,  if  attacked  by  a  rush  at  night,  Sergeant 
Dinsmore  will  withdraw  with  his  men  to  the 
house,  and  send  up  rockets  that  will  be  seen  in 
Bantoc  and  at  Fort  Franklin.  Then  a  column 
will  be  sent  out  to  overtake  and  punish  any 
brown  rascals  who  may  attack." 

"Have  you  seen  any  signs  of  the  Moros  lately, 
sir?" 

"No,  Sergeant.  Later  in  the  forenoon,  how- 
ever, I  think  I  shall  order  you  to  take  about 
twenty  men  out  in  skirmish  line.  You  will  try 
to  draw  the  enemy's  fire,  returning  if  you  suc- 
ceed. If  you  do  not  succeed,  you  will  search  the 
woods,  always  keeping  an  alert  eye  open  for 
the  possibility  of  running  into  an  ambushed 
party  of  cold  steel  men  in  the  woods." 

"I  shall  be  delighted  to  have  charge  of  that 
reconnaissance,  sir,"  Hal  replied  promptly. 

"Yes;  it  is  work  cut  out  for  just  such  a  cool 
head  as  yours,  Sergeant. ' ' 

"Thank  you,  sir." 

"Well,  you  are  cool-headed,  so  why  should  I 
not  say  it?"  laughed  Lieutenant  Prescott. 
"Sergeant,  your  presence  here  has  made  my 
own  work  half  as  heavy  as  it  would  have  been 
without  you.  I  shall  so  report  to  Captain  Cort- 
land  on  my  return." 

"Thank  you,  sir.    May  I  ask  if  Captain  Cort- 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  167 

land  reports  trouble  with  the  Moros  in  any  other 
locality!" 

"Nothing  has  as  yet  broken  out  anywhere 
else.  Captain  Cortland  writes  me  that  Bantoc, 
while  apparently  quiet,  is  really  a  seething  vol- 
cano, ready  to  break  out  into  insurrection,  riot 
and  pillage.  Lieutenant  Holmes  is  still  in  per- 
sonal command  over  in  Bantoc,  so  I  fancy  your 
friend,  Sergeant  Terry,  is  there  with  him." 

As  Hal  followed  the  lieutenant  out  after 
breakfast,  the  first  man  they  saw  was  Slosson, 
busily  smoking  the  pipe  that  he  had  tramped 
twenty-four  miles  to  obtain. 

Then,  as  the  officer  walked  away,  Kelly  saun- 
tered up. 

6 '  Did  you  two  have  any  trouble  on  the  way  in 
or  back,  Kelly?"  asked  Sergeant  Overton. 

"Not  the  least  bit,  though  we  stepped  pretty 
close  to  some  of  the  'goo-goos'  in  getting  away 
from  here,  Sarge.  But  we  got  by  without  tell- 
ing 'em  we  were  there.' 

"You  two  must  be  tired.' 

<  <  \ye  Ve  had  the  bit  of  a  nap, ' '  replied  Kelly. 

An  hour  later  Lieutenant  Prescott  again  ap- 
proached Sergeant  Hal. 

' '  Count  off  your  twenty  men,  Sergeant.  Line 
'em  up  for  instruction.  I'm  going  to  send  you 
over  yonder,  now,  to  make  that  scouting  recon- 
naissance. Don't  fall  into  any  traps,  Sergeant. ' ' 


168  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

Hal  quickly  detailed  his  men,  ordering  them 
to  fall  in. 

"Why  am  I  not  picked,  Sarge!'  whispered 
Kelly. 

"Man,  you've  done  enough.' 

Lieutenant  Prescott's  instructions  were  few, 
though  to  the  point. 

Then,  in  line  of  skirmishers,  Sergeant  Hal 
Overton  ordered  his  men  forward.  Over  the 
trench  they  went,  then  advanced  steadily  toward 
the  woods  from  which  had  come  the  rush  of  the 
night  before. 

Those  left  behind  watched  anxiously.  Would 
the  issue  mean  another  savage  fight — or  whatl 


CHAPTER  XVI 

DATTO    HAKKUT   MAKES   A   NEW   MOVE 

TO  the  civilian  mind,  being  sent  forward 
purposely    to    draw    the    enemy's    fire, 
looks  like  "ticklish'    business. 
Yet  it  is  better  to  risk  a  few  men  rather  than 
sacrifice  many.    It  is  on  the  same  principle  that 
a  "point"  of  several  men  is  always  sent  in  ad- 
vance of  the  larger  body  when  moving  sup- 
posedly in  the  face  of  the  enemy.    The  "point' 
often  draws  disastrous  fire  upon  itself,  but  the 
larger  body  of  troops  is  saved  from  catastrophe. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  169 


The  soldier  accepts  calmly  this  work  of  going 
out  ahead  to  draw  a  possible  enemy's  fire. 
It's  "all  in  the  game/'  as  he  understands  it. 

Of  course,  when  troops  are  sent  out  only  for 
the  purpose  of  drawing  fire,  these  troops  with- 
draw, if  necessary,  as  soon  as  they  attract  the 
enemy's  fire  to  themselves,  and  thus  locate  the 
enemy. 

Sergeant  Hal  Overton  kept  at  the  right  of  his 
thin,  sparse  line  of  men  as  they  moved  forward. 

Every  man  had  his  eyes  ahead;  each  was 
watching  for  the  first  sign  of  trouble. 

When  the  line  had  reached  a  plane  within  a 
hundred  yards  of  the  edge  of  the  woods  the 
soldiers  expected,  momentarily,  to  hear  the  sig- 
nal shot,  then  the  first  scattering  shots,  fol- 
lowed by  the  heavy,  crashing  volleys. 

Yet  they  passed  this  point  safely  and  went  on. 
The  edge  of  the  woods  was  gained,  still  without 
provoking  hostile  shots.  It  would  have  looked 
to  one  untrained  in  the  art  of  war  as  though 
there  were  no  enemy  there.  But  this  handful 
of  soldiers  knew  better  than  to  jump  at  any 
such  conclusion.  The  Moros,  like  the  Tagalos 
and  Pampangos,  are  fond  of  getting  an  enemy 
at  close  quarters,  and  then  leaping  on  him  with 
cold  steel.  The  Tagalo  or  Pampango  fights  with 
the  bolo,  the  Moro  often  with  the  creese,  and 
with  all  these  brown-skinned  men  the  game  is 


170  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

the  same — to  leap  up  unexpectedly,  from  the  tall 
grass,  before  the  soldier  has  had  time  to  throw 
himself  on  his  guard. 

A  swift,  short-armed  cutting  movement — a 
mere  slash,  delivered  with  muscular  effort,  and 
the  soldier  is  gashed  across  the  abdomen.  After 
this  cutting  has  been  effectively  delivered  the 
white  fighting  man  usually  sinks  down  in  a  pool 
of  his  own  blood,  and  his  fighting  days  are  likely 
to  be  over. 

Small  wonder  that  Uncle  Sam's  infantrymen 
prefer  facing  native  bullets  to  native  steel! 
The  bolo  man,  or  the  sword  man,  is  the  sol- 
dier's greatest  aversion.  It  is  like  fighting  rat- 
tlesnakes ! 

Glancing  down  the  line,  Sergeant  Hal  saw 
one  or  two  of  the  newer  men  flinch  slightly. 

"Steady,  there!"  Hal  called,  in  an  easy  but 
business-like  tone.  i  i  If  we  strike  the  rascals  an 
unbroken  line  is  the  one  hope  for  us  all.' 

Thev  had  now  reached  the  woods,  but  no  halt 

*/  / 

was  made.  The  boyish  sergeant,  who  knew  his 
business,  marched  his  little  command  about  six 
hundred  yards  under  the  trees. 

Still  no  Moros  were  encountered. 

Then  Hal  turned  his  line  to  the  left,  marching 
on  through  the  woods.  In  this  manner,  in  less 
than  an  hour,  he  had  thoroughly  explored  the 
territory  near  the  Seaforth  plantation,  and  had 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  171 

returned  to  the  point  where  his  command  had 
first  entered  the  forest. 

"Halt!"  ordered  the  young  sergeant.  "Fall 
out,  but  don't  scatter/ 

Then  Overton  stepped  to  the  edge  of  the 
woods,  waving  his  hat.  In  the  distance  Lieu- 
tenant Prescott,  with  his  own  hat,  returned  the 
signal.  Then  Hal,  using  one  arm  in  place  of  a 
signal  flag,  wig-wagged  the  information: 

"We  have  thoroughly  scouted  all  about  your 
position,  and  find  no  sign  of  an  enemy.' 

From  the  lieutenant  came  the  answer,  wig- 
wagged by  arm: 

"Good!    March  your  men  in.' 

"I  have  allowed  men  to  fall  out  and  rest,' 
Hal    answered.      ' l  They    are    tired  after   their 
hike." 

"Rest  your  men  five  minutes,  then  march 
them  in, ' '  replied  Lieutenant  Prescott. 

"Very  good,  sir,'    Hal  signaled. 

Exactly  five  minutes  later,  Overton  com- 
manded: 

"Fall  in!    By  twos  right,  march!' 

Within  the  hour  several  of  the  former  Moro 
laborers  on  the  plantation  returned.  They  re- 
ported that  the  Datto  Hakkut  and  some  three 
hundred  men  were  on  the  march,  miles  away 
and  evidently  headed  for  the  mountains. 

"These  men  are  honest  and  loyal,  Lieuten- 


172  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

ant/  explained  Mr.  Seaforth.  "They  are  my 
regular  laborers.  Of  course,  when  the  attack 
came  those  who  could  not  reach  the  house  took 
to  their  heels.  But  these  natives,  like  many 
Moros,  are  dependable.  They  are  not  to  be 
classed  with  the  idle,  vicious  cut-throats  that 
follow  the  datto." 

'  'Hm ! ' '  replied  Lieutenant  Prescott,  politely, 
but  he  scanned  all  of  these  returned  natives, 
keenly.  None  of  them,  however,  showed  any 
wounds,  or  bore  any  other  signs  of  having  seen 
recent  military  service  with  the  datto. 

"Mr.  Seaforth,"  said  the  young  officer,  pres- 
ently, "I  am  going  to  follow  the  course  laid 
down  by  Captain  Cortland,  and  return  to  Ban- 
toe  with  the  greater  part  of  my  command.  I 
shall,  however,  leave  Sergeant  Dinsmore  and 
a  dozen  men  here.  I  urge  that  all  the  white 
people  of  the  plantation  return  with  me  to 
town. ' 

"You  can  take  the  women  with  you,  Lieu- 
tenant, if  you  will,"  replied  the  planter,  "but 
we  men  feel  that  we  should  stay  here  and  make 
every  effort  to  go  on  running  the  plantation.' 

"If  you  do  not  think  it  too  dangerous,  Mr. 
Seaforth." 

"No;  I  can  trust  my  laborers,  and  they  tell 
me  that  Hakkut  and  his  rascals  appear  really 
bent  on  reaching  the  mountains.' 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  173 

"But  if  they  go  to  the  mountains,  you  know, 
they  go  only  that  they  may  be  more  secure  un- 
til they  have  recruited  other  brown  rebels.  If 
Hakkut  can  get  enough  men  together,  he  will 
attempt  to  carry  fire  and  bloodshed  even  into 
Bantoc. ' 

' i  Let  the  women  go  with  you,  and  we  men  will 
stay  here/  was  the  planter's  decision. 

Half  an  hour  later  the  column,  minus  Ser- 
geant Dinsmore  and  his  squad,  swung  off  on  the 
return  march.  A  wagon  had  been  provided  for 
conveying  the  dead  soldiers,  another  for  the 
wounded,  and  a  third  vehicle  for  the  women. 

Four  hours  later  the  column  was  at  barracks, 
from  which  the  women  were  escorted  into  Ban- 
toc, where  there  was  a  military  guard,  and 
where  they  could  stop  with  friends. 

Just  before  dark  an  escort  of  twenty  men, 
guarding  two  wagons,  marched  into  Bantoc. 
Sergeant  Hal  had  asked  and  secured  permission 
to  head  the  escort,  for  he  wanted  to  see  his 
chum,  Sergeant  Noll  Terry. 

"Well,  so  youVe  been  doing  some  real  fight- 
ing, ' '  demanded  Noll  in  a  tone  of  friendly  envy. 

"Yes,"  assented  Hal. 

"The  Moros  are  not  such  very  classy  fight- 
ers, are  they?7' 

"They're  good  enough  for  me,"  Hal  Overton 
answered.  "I  don't  mind  their  rifle  fire,  but  I 


174:  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

can  do  very  well  with  the  least  possible  num- 
ber of  brushes  against  their  cold  steel/' 

"But  our  fellows  have  their  bayonets." 

' '  Yes ;  but  wait  until  you  have  to  face  a  rush 
against  those  murderous  creeses.  I  can't  tell 
you  much  about  it.  It  sounds  tame  in  the  tell- 
ing, Noll,  but  you'll  know  all  about  it  when 
you  have  to  go  up  against  it.  How  have  things 
been  here  in  Bantoc!" 

'  *  Bad, ' '  Noll  replied,  with  a  shake  of  his  head. 

"Any  serious  trouble?" 

"No;  no  fighting.  For  that  matter,  I  think 
most  of  the  Moros  here  in  Bantoc  like  us  well 
enough,  and  are  disposed  to  be  orderly, ' '  replied 
Terry  thoughtfully.  "Of  course  they're  the 
more  peaceable  part  of  the  population,  anyway. 
On  the  other  hand,  there  are  plenty  of  Moros 
here  in  Bantoc  who  don't  hesitate  to  let  us  see 
how  sullen  and  restless  they  are.  Only  a  spark 
is  needed,  or  maybe  only  a  secret  word  from 
the  datto,  and  two  or  three  hundred  ugly  fel- 
lows here  in  Bantoc  will  try  to  get  the  upper 
hand,  or  else  take  to  the  brush  with  Hakkut." 

"We're  going  to  have  a  warm  time  here  be- 
fore we're  through,  I  think,"  replied  Sergeant 
Hal,  with  a  shake  of  his  head. 

"What  puzzles  me,"  muttered  Noll,  "is  why 
the  government  doesn't  send  troops  enough 
here  to  wind  up  the  thing  in  short  order.  The 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  175 

whole  of  our  first  battalion  of  the  Thirty-fourth, 
for  instance,  ought  to  take  the  field  at  once, 
backed  by  a  platoon  of  light  artillery.  We 
ought  to  be  sent  to  chase  Hakkut  clean  across 
the  island  and  into  the  ocean  on  the  other  side 
of  Mindanao.' 

"It's  not  for  me  to  criticize  the  government, 
or  to  say  what  it  ought  to  do, ' '  Hal  rejoined. 

"Yet  I  can  understand,  lads,  that  you're  puz- 
zled,' broke  in  the  quiet  voice  of  Lieutenant 
Holmes  behind  them.  "You  wonder,  both  of 
you,  why  the  government  doesn't  use  more 
force.  Have  you  any  idea  of  the  great  number 
of  troops  we  already  have  here  in  the  islands? 
As  it  is,  it  takes  an  Army  corps  to  keep  the 
natives  in  anything  resembling  order.  Yet,  of 
course,  the  government,  in  this  especial  case, 
could  exert  itself  and  send  an  expedition  of  a 
regiment  of  infantry,  a  squadron  of  cavalry  and 
two  batteries  of  light  artillery,  say,  against 
Datto  Hakkut." 

* '  That  would  be  enough  to  wind  these  rebels 
up  in  short  order,  sir, '  murmured  Hal. 

"No;  it  would  do  nothing  of  the  sort,"  smiled 
Lieutenant  Holmes.  "Hakkut  and  his  crew 
would  laugh  at  us.  What  would  happen?  The 
rebels  would  disperse,  and  soon  show  up  at  their 
homes,  all  through  this  island.  As  for  Hakkut, 
he  would  go  into  hiding.  He  always  is  in  hid- 


176  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

• 

ing  when  he  isn't  in  the  field  defying  ns.  I 
don't  know  whether  you  sergeants  know  it,  but 
it's  a  fact  that  no  American  Army  officer  has 
ever  seen  Hakkut.  He  never  shows  himself,  and 
his  hiding  place  is  a  good  one,  for  no  American 
knows  where  it  is.  So  our  big  expedition  that 
might  go  out  against  Hakkut  would  find  none 
of  these  rebels  to  fight.  After  the  troops  of  the 
big  expedition  had  been  withdrawn,  however, 
then  Hakkut  and  his  land  pirates  would  come 
out  again  at  their  own  convenience.' 

"Wouldn't  it  break  up  Hakkut 's  game  alto- 
gether, sir,  if  the  government  kept  enough 
troops  here  to  be  able  to  send  a  crushing  force 
against  him  whenever  he  raised  his  hand?' 

"Possibly  it  might,"  nodded  Lieutenant 
Holmes;  "but  to  police  all  of  the  Philippine  Is- 
lands in  that  fashion  we'd  have  to  make  the 
United  States  Army  three  times  as  large  as  it 
is  to-day — and  then  station  the  whole  Army  in 
these  islands.  On  the  other  hand,  our  present 
plan  of  keeping  small  forces  at  different  points, 
and  sending  out  small  expeditions  at  need, 
shows  the  natives  that  we  don't  take  them  very 
seriously.  We  also  show  them  that  a  hundred 
of  Uncle  Sam's  regulars  is  a  pretty  large  force 
for  them  to  attempt  to  fight.  By  attacking  the 
Moros  with  small  expeditions  we  keep  alive  and 
always  before  them  the  fact  that  we  know  one 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  177 

of  our  regulars  to  be  equal  to  several  of  their 
pirates. ' 

Both  sergeants  saluted  as  Holmes  moved  on. 

"  Maybe  the  lieutenant  is  right/  muttered 
Noll  thoughtfully.  "But  the  present  way  of 
fighting  these  wretches  is  pretty  expensive  in 
the  matter  of  soldiers'  lives." 


CHAPTER  XVII 

"LONG"  GREEN  AND  KELLY  HAVE  INNINGS 

"T  T^HJ    That's  a  beastly  trick.    No  white 
man  would  ever  do  a  thing  like  that ! ' 
The  speaker  was  Private  William 
Green,  also  known  as  "Long'    Green,  from  his 
former  habit  of  carrying  large  sums  of  ready 
cash  about  him. 

Our  readers  will  remember  William.  He  was 
a  good  soldier,  but  above  all  he  was  a  good 
Army  business  man,  for  he  saved  his  money  and 
added  to  it.  To  William  Green  the  men  of  B 
Company  always  went  when  they  were  "short' 
and  craved  spending  money.  To  any  man  in  B 
Company  "Long"  Green  would  lend  five  dollars, 
but  he  always  exacted  six  in  return  on  pay  day. 

"What's  wrong  with  your  nerves,  Green?' 
inquired  Sergeant  Hal,  stepping  out  on  to  the 
porch  of  the  barracks. 

t 
12 4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


178  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

r<Slosson  has  been  telling  me  about  kantab,' 
replied  Green,  with  a  grimace  and  a  shudder. 

66 Never  heard  of  him,"  replied  Hal. 

"It  isn't  a  'him'  at  all,  Sarge,'  rejoined 
Green.  "Kantab  is  the  name  of  a  poison  that 
the  Moros  extract  from  one  of  their  plants  up 
in  the  hills." 

"Well,  cheer  up,"  urged  Sergeant  Overton, 
seating  himself  and  opening  a  book.  "There 
are  no  poisons  issued  in  the  rations.' 

"But  Slosson  was  telling  me  about  two  sol- 
diers who  got  kantab  in  their  rations  a  few 
years  ago,"  insisted  Green. 

"Was  the  quartermaster  court-martialed f ' 
asked  Sergeant  Overton.    "Or  was  it  the  fault 
of  the  company  cook?' 

"Nothing  like  it,"  replied  Green.  "Two 
soldiers  were  on  outpost  one  morning,  and  they 
had  just  prepared  their  breakfast.  Just  then 
they  thought  they  heard  a  sound  in  the  bushes, 
so  they  caught  up  their  rifles  and  went  out  to 
investigate.  They  found  nothing,  so  they  came 
back  to  their  breakfasts.  They  thought  their 
coffee  tasted  rather  bitter,  but  they  drank  it 
just  the  same.  Ten  minutes  later  both  men  were 
dying  in  agony.  That  noise  had  been  a  ruse  to 
draw  them  off,  while  some  native  slipped  in  and 
put  the  kantab  in  their  coffee.  Ugh!  That's  a 
cowardly  way  to  fight.  If  I  find  anything  bit- 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  179 

t 

ter  about  my  food,  even  here  in  barracks,  I'm 
going  to  toss  the  grub  out.  No  kantab  for 
mine, ' '  wound  up  ' '  Long '  Green  earnestly. 

"Did  that  really  happen,  Slosson?"  asked 
Sergeant  Hal,  glancing  up  from  his  book. 

"Sure,"  responded  Private  Slosson  nonchal- 
antly. 

"I've  heard  about  the  stuff,  too,"  nodded 
Private  Kelly.  "Only  yesterday  I  heard  one 
native  talking  about  it  to  another.' 

"I'm  going  to  watch  my  chow  (food)  after 
this,"  insisted  Green. 

For  twenty  minutes  Hal  read  on,  paying  no 
attention  to  the  chatter  of  soldiers  about  him. 
Then  a  bugle  blew,  and  Hal  closed  his  book  with 
a  snap. 

"That's  sick  call,  Kelly,  and  I  believe  you're 
on  sick  report, ' '  announced  the  boyish  sergeant. 

"I'm  not  going,"  returned  Kelly.  "What's 
the  use.  The  hospital  steward,  I've  been  finding 
out,  has  no  medicines  whatever  but  salts  and 
quinine.  I  can't  stand  the  taste  of  either.' 

"But  you're  going  to  sick  call,  just  the 
same,"  Hal  retorted  dryly.  "Your  name  is  on 
sick  report,  so  to  hospital  you  go.  There's  no 
way  out  of  it.' 

Sick  call  is  sounded  morning  and  afternoon. 
It  is  the  first  sergeant's  duty  to  enter  on  sick 
report  the  names  of  all  enlisted  men  who  re- 


180  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

port  to  him  that  they  are  not  well,  or  think  they 
are  not  well.  Then,  when  sick  call  sounds,  the 
first  sergeant  marches  to  hospital  with  the  men 
whose  names  he  has  entered  on  sick  report. 

"Fall  in,  Kelly, "  ordered  the  young  sergeant. 

"I'll  not  take  salts  or  quinine,"  insisted 
Kelly. 

"You'll  march  to  sick  call,  just  the  same. 
Fall  in!" 

So  in  step,  and  briskly,  Hal  and  Private  Kelly 
marched  over  to  the  little  building  which,  at 
Fort  Benjamin  Franklin,  was  dignified  with  the 
name  of  hospital.  The  acting  hospital  steward 
was  there  waiting  for  them. 

As  this  small  command  did  not  have  a  com- 
missioned medical  officer  the  steward  attended 
to  all  cases  of  minor  illness.  When  occasion 
warranted  it  the  German  physician  was  sum- 
moned from  Bantoc  to  prescribe  for  the  men. 

"The  sick  list,  steward,"  reported  Hal, 
handing  over  the  official  paper  on  which  Kelly's 
name  alone  appeared. 

"What  ails  you,  Kelly!"  asked  the  steward. 

"Nothing,"  Kelly  answered  defiantly. 

"Then  you'll  have  to  discover  an  ailment 
soon,"  frowned  the  steward,  "or  I'll  ask  Ser- 
geant Overton  to  report  you  for  shamming  sick 
report." 

"Why,  truth  to  tell,  I  didn't  feel  very  well," 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  181 

asserted  Kelly.    "But  that  was  two  hours  ago. 
I'm  feeling  fine  now.' 

"Let  me  see  your  tongue,"  ordered  the 
steward.  He  also  "took"  Kelly's  pulse  and 
noted  his  respirations,  entering  all  this  in- 
formation on  his  record. 

' '  Any  pain  anywhere,  Kelly  ? ' ' 

"Sorra  the  bit,"  promptly  rejoined  the  sol- 
dier. 

"You're  just  a  little  off-key,"  went  on  the 
hospital  steward,  with  a  professional  air.  "Not 
much;  still,  you'd  better  have  some  medicine.' 

"  I  can 't  take  salts, ' '  protested  Kelly.  * '  They 
make  me  sea-sick.  Give  me  salts,  and  ye  '11  have 
to  find  a  bed  for  me  here,  and  take  care  of  me 
for  a  few  days.' 

"Quinine  is  about  your  size,"  replied  the 
steward,  reaching  for  a  five-pound  can  of  the 
stuff. 

"That'll  kill  me,  entirely!" 

"Four  ten-grain  doses  never  killed  any  man,' 
insisted  the  steward. 

"I  won't  take  it!" 

"Oh,  yes,  you  will,  Kelly.  This  is  the  Army, 
and  discipline  is  the  rule.  I'll  make  sure  of 
the  first  dose  by  seeing  you  take  it  here. ' 

The  hospital  steward's  tone  was  firm,  and 
under  the  regulations  he  was  master  of  the  situ- 
ation. 


182  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

"Then,  for  the  love  of  Mike,"  gasped  Kelly, 
"give  me  the  bitter  stuff  in  a  capsule." 

"Certainly,  if  you  like  it  that  way,  Kelly," 
assented  the  steward,  picking  up  a  gelatine  ten- 
grain  capsule  and  packing  it  tight  with  the  white, 
bitter  powder. 

"I  don't  like  it  any  way,"  growled  Kelly. 

"Now,  that's  nonsense,  man.  Why,  all  the 
medical  authorities  are  agreed  that  quinine  is 
the  greatest  blessing  to  man  ever  discovered." 

"Then  why  don't  the  doctors  take  more  of  it 
themselves?"  scowled  Private  Kelly. 

"Here  you  are,"  continued  the  steward,  cap- 
ping the  capsule  and  passing  it  to  the  unwilling 
victim. 

Kelly  dropped  the  capsule  into  his  mouth, 
resolving  to  hold  it  there  until  he  could  get  out- 
side. 

"Here's  a  glass  of  water.  Wash  it  down," 
ordered  the  hospital  steward.  "Then  you  can 
open  your  mouth  and  I'll  make  sure  that  youVe 
swallowed  the  stuff." 

"Can't  ye  be  after  taking  a  soldier's  word?" 
demanded  Kelly,  with  a  burst  of  virtuous  in- 
dignation. 

'Not  where  quinine's  the  medicine,"  re- 
turned the  steward,  grinning.  ' '  Now,  down  with 
the  water,  and  then  open  your  mouth." 

There  was  no  chance  for  sleight  of  hand  here. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  183 

-i 

Kelly  actually  swallowed  the  hated  stuff,  then 
submitted  the  proof. 

"Here  are  the  other  capsules,'  went  on  the 
steward,  handing  the  victim  a  small  pill  box. 
"Take  one  of  the  capsules  at  bed  time  and  the 
other  two  to-morrow  morning  and  noon.  Ser- 
geant Overton,  it  will  be  as  well  for  you  to  see 
that  Kelly  obeys  the  order.' 

"May  I  go  now?'    demanded  Kelly. 

"Yes." 

So  sergeant  and  private  passed  out  together. 

"No  wonder  men  sometimes  desert,'  grum- 
bled Private  Kelly. 

"Nonsense,"  laughed  Hal.  "Kelly,  you're 
too  good  a  soldier  to  be  afraid  of  just  a  bad 
taste  in  the  mouth." 

"I  don't  want  a  bitter  taste  in  me  mouth,  un- 
less an  enemy  is  smart  enough  to  give  it  to 
me,"  grumbled  Kelly,  then  added,  "but  by  the 
powers,  that  steward  is  an  enemy  of  mine,  and 
I'll  have  his  scalp  one  of  these  nights  when  I 
catch  him  outside  on  pass.' 

When  Hal  returned  to  the  porch  he  picked  up 
his  took  and  disappeared  into  the  quieter  squad 
room,  for  he  had  found  it  rather  difficult  to 
study  while  among  the  others. 

"Long"  Green  was  making  considerable 
noise,  lying  on  his  back  on  the  porch,  rumbling 
snores  issuing  from  his  wide-open  mouth. 


184  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

"No  man  has  a  right  to  run  a  Gatling  gun 
like  that  without  a  license,'  muttered  Kelly, 
gazing  thoughtfully  down  at  the  noisy  sleeper. 
"Boys,  whist !" 

There  was  mischief  in  the  Irishman's  eyes. 
Sergeant  Hal,  from  the  shadow  at  the  back  of 
the  squad  room,  heard  and  glanced  out. 

At  a  sign  from  Private  Kelly,  the  other  sol- 
diers rose,  fleeing  softly  inside  of  barracks. 

With  an  air  as  grave  as  that  of  a  college 
professor  absorbed  in  a  chemical  experiment, 
Private  Kelly  drew  the  pill  box  from  one  of  his 
pockets.  He  took  out  a  capsule,  uncapped  it, 
and  bent  over  the  sleeper. 

Into  "Long"  Green's  open  mouth  Kelly  care- 
fully but  swiftly  emptied  the  contents  of  the 
capsule  of  quinine,  then  joined  his  comrades  in 
the  barracks,  all  but  closing  the  door. 

After  a  moment  Private  "William  Green, 
asleep  though  he  was,  became  dimly  conscious 
that  something  was  wrong  with  his  tongue. 

Then  he  awoke.  There  was  a  hideously  bit- 
ter taste  in  his  mouth. 

In  another  instant  Private  Green  had  turned 
ghastly  pale,  shaking  like  a  leaf.  It  took  him 
but  a  moment  to  realize  that  he  was  alone  on 
the  porch.  Out  on  the  road,  some  two  hundred 
yards  away,  a  solitary  male  native  was  passing. 
Private  Green  was  a  quick  guesser. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  185 

"Kantab!"  lie  gasped  hoarsely. 

Then  "Long"  Green's  legs  got  into  swift 
action.  Vaulting  the  porch  rail,  and  almost  fall- 
ing in  his  trembling  weakness,  William  made  a 
straight  line  for  the  hospital,  vanishing  inside. 

Five  minutes  later  Hospital  Steward  Hicks 
appeared  on  the  scene.  He  was  supporting 
"Long7  by  one  arm,  for  the  soldier  was  not 
yet  over  his  fright. 

"Kelly,"  said  Steward  Hicks,  "I  find  that  I 
made  a  mistake.  The  medical  authorities  do 
not  prescribe  the  stuff  I  gave  you  in  a  case  like 
yours.  So  I  '11  take  the  capsules  back. ' 

"You're  welcome,"  grinned  Kelly,  passing 
over  the  pill  box. 

"Two  capsules;  there  should  be  three,'  re- 
marked the  hospital  man,  after  having  raised 
the  lid  from  the  box.  "Green,  you  idiot,  the 
kantab  you're  howling  about  came  from  the 
missing  capsule  that  Kelly  can 't  return  to  me. ' 

"Do  you  give  kantab  at  the  hospital,  too1?' 
gasped  "Long,' r  looking  more  scared  than  ever. 

"We  do,"  said  the  steward  grimly.  "But  we 
medical  men  call  it  quinine.' 

First i '  Long ' '  looked  bewildered.  Then  as  the 
grinning  soldiers  gave  vent  to  howls  of  glee 
a  great  light  began  to  dawn  on  the  mind  of 
Private  Green. 

"Kelly,  you  scoundrel!"  he  yelled,  leaping 


186  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

forward.     "I'll  take  it  all  back — out   of  yon. 
On  your  feet,  man ! ' 

But  Kelly,  convulsed  with  laughter,  sat  back 
in  his  chair  until  the  irate  Green  slapped  his 
face.  At  that  the  Irishman's  resentment  leaped 
to  the  surface  and  Kelly  followed  his  recent  vic- 
tim to  the  ground  beyond  the  porch. 

Kelly,  however,  was  weak  with  inward  laugh- 
ter. Green,  therefore,  administered  some  rather 
severe  punishment,  and,  in  the  end,  sent  Kelly 
to  the  ground.  "Long"  couldn't  possibly  have 
done  this  under  any  other  circumstances. 

Private  Kelly  sat  there  for  two  or  three  min- 
utes. Then  he  got  up  slowly,  his  face  grave 
as  he  stepped  to  ' '  Long, ' '  holding  out  his  hand. 

"  'Long,'  I  know  now  what  ailed  me,'  con- 
fessed Private  Kelly.  "  'Twas  me  liver.  Your 
tr-reatment  has  fixed  it  up  fine.  I'll  call  on  ye 
for  another  treatment  when  me  liver  needs  it. 
By  me  present  feelings  I'm  thinking  'twill  be 
about  to-morrow  morning,  after  guard-mount.' 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  187 


CHAPTER  XVIII 

SENTRY    MIGGS    MAKES    A    GRUESOME    FIND 

IT  is  not  necessary  for  even  the  most  ardent 
admirer  of  Private  William  Green  to  feel 
sorry  for  the  fate  of  that  soldier  the  next 
morning  after  guard-mount  at  the  capable  hands 
of  Private  Kelly. 

Kelly  had  something  else  to  think  about,  and 
so  had  every  other  man  in  the  little  garrison. 

Just  before  daylight  the  sentry  on  number 
three  post  had  made  a  horrible  discovery.  Now 
that  the  old  guard  was  relieved,  and  the  new 
guard  was  on,  the  sentry  who  had  made  the  dis- 
covery was  able  to  tell  what  he  knew  of  it,  with 
such  other  particulars  as  had  been  learned  since. 

Private  Miggs  was  the  sentry  in  question.  Be- 
fore daylight  Miggs  had  patrolled  down  to  the 
further  end  of  his  post.  On  his  return  along 
post  he  had  discovered  something  on  the  ground 
ahead  of  him. 

When  Miggs  learned  the  nature  of  his  dis- 
covery he  was  almost  overcome.  Being  a  sol- 
dier, he  did  not  faint,  but  for  a  few  moments 
he  did  feel  a  sensation  of  nausea. 

Then,  raising  his  voice,  the  sentry  called  the 
corporal  of  the  guard  to  post  number  three. 


188  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

The  corporal  and  the  two  members  of  the  guard 
felt  a  similar  nausea  when  they  arrived  on  the 
scene,  and  it  ended  in  sending  for  the  officer  of 
the  day,  Lieutenant  Dick  Prescott. 

Without  venturing  to  order  the  removal  of 
the  find,  Lieutenant  Prescott  sent  a  member  of 
the  guard  to  awaken  Captain  Cortland. 

After  the  post  commander  had  seen  it,  the 
guard  removed  the  ghastly  find  to  the  guard 
house,  where  it  still  remained. 

What  had  upset  Private  Miggs's  mental  bal- 
ance was  the  sight  of  two  severed  heads  lying 
on  the  ground  in  his  path  along  post.  They 
were  the  heads  of  white  men. 

To  each  had  been  tied  a  piece  of  coarse  paper, 
and  on  each  paper  was  rudely  traced  the  like- 
ness of  a  crab.  This  crab,  as  Captain  Cortland 
already  knew,  was  the  sign  manual  of  that  arch 
scoundrel  of  brown  skin,  the  Datto  Hakkut.  The 
crab  was  meant  to  signify  that,  while  the  datto 
could  move  forward,  he  could  also  crawl  side- 
ways or  backward — that  he  was  strategist 
enough  to  crawl  out  of  any  trap  that  the~  sol- 
diers might  set  for  him. 

As  soon  as  the  light  came  Captain  Cortland 
despatched  an  armed  guard  party  to  bring  over 
to  the  fort  the  German  physician  and  three  other 
white  residents  of  Bantoc,  to  see  whether  they 
could  identify  the  severed  heads. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  189 

The  heads  proved  to  be  those  of  two  young 
American  doctors  of  philosophy,  Hertford  and 
Sanderson,  who  had  come  to  Mindanao  months 
before,  one  for  the  purpose  of  securing  speci- 
mens representing  the  geological  formation  of 
the  island,  and  the  other  in  pursuit  of  specimens 
of  the  plants  and  flowers. 

Despite  strong  advice  to  the  contrary,  as  given 
by  the  former  military  commandant  at  Bantoc, 
Drs.  Hertford  and  Sanderson,  attended  only  by 
a  small  party  of  natives,  had  gone  into  the  moun- 
tains to  gather  their  specimens.  Since  then 
nothing  had  been  heard  of  the  two  enthusiastic 
young  scientists  —  until  Sentry  Miggs  had 
stumbled  upon  his  gruesome  find. 

The  soldiers  discussed  little  else  that  morn-~ 
ing. 

"Of  course  it  was  the  old  brown  rascal,  Hak- 
kut,  who  had  the  young  scientific  gentlemen 
killed.  Didn't  Hakkut  have  his  card  tied  to 
each  head  ? ' '  demanded  Private  Kelly,  who  was 
the  centre  of  a  group  of  enlisted  men. 

The  group  of  officers  over  in  Captai'n  Cort- 
land's  office  had  come  to  the  same  conclusion. 

"It  is  the  old  brown  scoundrel's  way  of  show- 
ing us  his  defiance, ' '  declared  Captain  Cortland 
in  a  shocked  voice.  "Why  couldn't  that  pair  of 
enthusiastic  boys  take  good  advice  and  keep  out 
of  the  mountains?  Would  their  collections  of 


190  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

stones  and  plants  be  worth  as  much  to  any  col- 
lege as  the  young  men's  lives  would  have  been 
worth  to  themselves!' 

' t  The  question  is,  Cortland,  what  are  we  going 
to  do  in  answer  to  this  defiance!'  suggested 
Captain  Freeman,  of  C  Company. 

"What  are  we  going  to  do!"  asked  Cortland, 
his  face  becoming  even  graver.  "We  have  a 
very  small  command  here,  but  there's  only  one 
thing  we  can  do.  Hakkut  has  defied  us,  and,  un- 
less he  is  punished  for  it,  the  native  respect  for 
American  authority  in  these  islands  will  soon 
be  less  than  nothing.  What  are  we  going  to  do  I 
There  is  nothing  that  we  can  do  but  send  the 
strongest  column  of  men  that  we  can  spare  up 
into  the  mountains  on  the  double-quick.  We've 
got  to  root  out  that  brown  scoundrel,  and  send 
him  and  his  band  running  as  fast  as  they  can 
go,  or  else  we  shall  be  forced  to  admit  to  the 
natives  that  the  claim  of  the  American  nation  to 
govern  Mindanao  is  only  a  stupid  joke.  Our  ex- 
pedition must  start  before  noon!' 

"Who  will  command  the  column V  inquired 
Captain  Freeman. 

"You  will  command,  Freeman.  I  would  give 
half  a  year's  pay  to  head  the  expedition  my- 
self, but  I  am  post  commander  here,  and  after 
the  greater  part  of  the  troops  have  started  the 
problem  here  at  Bantoc  is  going  to  be  such  a 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  191 

serious  one  that  I  feel  obliged  to  remain  here 
and  handle  it  myself." 

After  thinking  a  few  moments  longer,  Cap- 
tain Cortland  continued: 

"Freeman,  you  will  take  sixty  men  from  B 
Company,  and  the  same  number  from  C  Com- 
pany. I  can  spare  you  but  two  officers,  for  I 
shall  need  the  services  of  Ray  and  Hampton 
here.  So  Holmes  will  command  the  C  Company 
detachment,  and  Prescott  the  B  Company  de- 
tachment, while  you  will  command  the  expedi- 
tion. You  will  also  take  one  of  the  two  Gatling 
guns  that  we  have  at  this  post.  You  will  take 
two  wagons  for  ammunition  and  one  for  hos- 
pital and  similar  supplies.  Your  men  will  carry 
such  field  and  emergency  rations  as  you  can. 
For  the  rest  of  your  food  you  will  have  to  de- 
pend upon  the  country  through  which  you  will 
pass.  I  am  sorry  for  this,  but  on  a  swift,  hard- 
fighting  expedition  a  command  the  size  of  yours 
cannot  be  burdened  with  more  wagons.' 

"That  is  true,"  spoke  Captain  Freeman 
thoughtfully.  "Well,  we  shall  have  to  do  the 
best  we  can  with  the  amount  of  transport  and 
rations  that  you  can  put  at  our  disposal.  I  am 
anxious  now,  sir,  to  get  "started  with  the  pre- 
parations as  rapidly  as  possible.' 

' '  Good ;  it  is  half -past  nine  now.  You  should 
be  ready  to  march  by ' 


192  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"By  half-past  eleven  at  the  latest,'  supplied 
Captain  Freeman,  rising. 

Never  were  preparations  more  rushed,  nor  yet 
more  thoroughly  made. 

First  of  all,  it  was  necessary  to  send  into  Ban- 
toe  and  recall  Lieutenant  Holmes  and  the  guard 
stationed  there.  With  the  removal  of  the  troops 
the  lives  of  the  white  people  residing  in  Bantoc 
would  he  in  immediate  danger.  So  the  twenty- 
five  or  thirty  white  residents  were  obliged  to 
accompany  the  guard  out  to  Fort  Benjamin 
Franklin,  where  they  were  to  be  provided  with 
temporary  quarters. 

Ten  minutes  before  the  time  named  by  Cap- 
tain Freeman  all  had  been  accomplished.  The 
column  was  ready  and  started. 

B  Company's  detachment  marched  first.  Be- 
hind this  came  the  transport  wagons  and  the 
Gatling  gun.  The  C  Company  detachment,  under 
Lieutenant  Greg  Holmes,  brought  UP  the  rear. 

Taking  into  account  those  who  had  lately  been 
killed  and  wounded,  and  also  the  guard  under 
Sergeant  Dinsmore,  left  out  at  the  Seaforth 
plantation,  Captain  Cortland  had  remaining  as 
a  garrison  about  sixty  effective  soldiers.  These 
must  preserve  the  safety  of  the  post  and  the 
order  of  Bantoc  through  the  twenty-four  hours 
of  each  day. 

No  soldier  in  the  marching  column  deluded 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  193 

himself  with  the  belief  that  he  was  starting  on 
a  brief  expedition.  Every  man  knew  that  it 
would  be  weeks  before  they  were  likely  to  set 
eyes  again  on  Fort  Franklin.  It  was,  moreover, 
wholly  probable  that  some  of  the  soldiers  now 
marching  would  never  see  the  fort  again. 

Yet  officers  and  men  tramped  away  uncon- 
cernedly. All  acted,  and  felt,  very  much  as 
though  this  had  been  merely  a  practice  march 
through  a  peaceful  country. 

Noll  Terry  was  jubilant.  Hal  had  seen  active 
service  on  this  island,  and  now  his  chum  was 
about  to  do  the  same  thing.  The  first  taste  of 
real  service  is  always  dear  to  the  heart  of  a 
good  soldier. 

Night  brought  the  command  within  three  or 
four  miles  of  the  foot  of  the  mountains.  The 
next  morning  was  still  young  when  the  column 
wound  its  way  up  into  the  lower  portion  of 
the  mountains. 

Captain  Freeman  was  not  marching  blindly. 
He  was  provided  with  military  maps  of  the 
mountains.  Then,  again,  not  all  the  Moros  were 
hostile  to  the  Americans.  There  were  many 
friendly  natives,  and  some  of  them  had  slyly 
brought  word  to  the  post  of  the  location  of  Datto 
Hakkut  and  bis  forces  at  the  last  report. 

As  to  the  number  of  men  with  the  datto,  the 
statements  of  the  natives  had  varied.  They  had 

13  4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


194  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

estimated  the  datto's  force  at  all  the  way  from 
fifteen  hundred  to  twenty-five  hundred  fighting 
men.  Captains  Cortland  and  Freeman,  with 
their  knowledge  of  the  native  tendency  to  ex- 
aggerate, had  thus  fixed  the  probable  number  at 
about  eight  hundred  men. 

The  second  and  the  third  days  passed.  The 
troops  were  now  far  up  in  the  mountains,  though 
up  to  that  time  they  had  not  encountered  the 
enemy.  Captain  Freeman,  however,  pushed  for- 
ward, feeling  confident  that  he  would  sooner  or 
later  encounter  the  datto's  forces. 

On  the  fourth  morning,  an  hour  after  day- 
light, the  troops  were  again  under  way.  They 
moved  slowly,  for  the  roads  were  in  bad  con- 
dition and  the  column  could  not  go  ahead  at 
greater  speed  than  the  transport  wagons  could 
maintain. 

A  " point7'  was  out  in  advance,  followed  by 
a  slightly  larger  advance  guard.  Behind 
marched  a  watchful  rear  guard.  The  little 
column,  for  its  own  safety  and  convenience,  was 
strung  out  over  a  goodly  length  of  road. 

As  Lieutenant  Prescott  passed,  Sergeant  Noll 
Terry  stepped  out  and  saluted. 

"What  is  it,  Sergeant?" 

"If  it  is  proper,  I  would  like  the  lieutenant's 
permission  to  go  up  ahead  and  walk  with  Ser- 
geant Overton." 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  195 

1 '  That  will  be  all  right,  Sergeant — if  you  will 
remember  that,  in  case  of  emergency,  you  are 
to  return  hastily  to  your  proper  place  in  the 
line." 

"Thank  you;   I  will,  sir." 

"Very  good,  Sergeant." 

Once  more  saluting,  Noll  hastened  up  forward. 

"You  have  a  message?"  asked  Hal. 

"No;  but  I  have  the  lieutenant's  permission 
to  walk  with  you." 

"I'm  glad  of  it,  chum.  Talking  makes  the 
walking  easier." 

"Walking  —  yes,'  grumbled  Noll.  "I'm 
afraid  that's  about  all  we're  going  to  get  out 
of  this  hike." 

"Never  pray  for  a  fight,  Noll.  It's  all  right 
when  it  has  to  be,  but  any  real  fight  always 
means  the  last  hour  for  some  good  fellows. ' 

"I'm  no  hog  for  a  fight,'  grunted  Terry, 
"but  I'd  like  to  have  just  a  little  real  practice, 
after  the  long,  long  time  I've  had  to  put  in  pre- 
paring for  it.' 

"Hm!"  smiled  Sergeant  Hal.  "I  could 
almost  qualify  as  a  member  of  a  peace  society. 
/  don't  care  how  long  it  is  before  the  next  fight. 
I'd  hate  to  see  it  come  along  this  stretch  of 
road. ' ' 

"Why?" 

"Well,  look  over  at  our  left,  Noll.    Below  us 


196  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

is  a  deep  gully,  with  a  swift  stream  flowing. 
Beyond  it  is  that  wooded  ledge.  Any  number 
of  Moros  could  conceal  themselves  there  and  fire 
at  us,  and  we  couldn't  reach  'em  with  the 
bayonet.  Ahead " 

Sergeant  Hal  may  have  finished,  but,  if  he 
did,  his  voice  was  drowned  out  by  the  savage 
clamor  of  yells  ahead.  Barely  a  hundred  yards 
beyond  the  point  came  a  rushing  mob  of  Moros, 
shooting  and  brandishing  creeses. 

From  the  wooded,  inaccessible  ledge  to  the 
left  came  a  sudden,  rapid  firing  that  made  the 
air  hot  with  bullets  directed  at  Uncle  Sam 's  men. 


CHAPTER  XIX 

s 

HAL   TURNS   THE   GATLING  GUN   LOOSE 

ATLING  gun  to  the  head  of  the  line ! 
Lie  down,  men!" 

Two  men  dropped  even  before  the 
order  had  been  given,  for  Moro  bullets  had 
found  them. 

After  firing  volleys,  the  " point"  and  advance 
guard  fell  back  on  the  run. 

"Take  the  infantry  fire  at  this  point,  Ser- 
geant Overton!"  commanded  Lieutenant  Pres- 
eott  briskly. 

"Open      magazines!        Load      magazines!' 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  197 

shouted  Sergeant  Hal  to  the  men  in  the  swiftly 
formed  front  rank.  "Beady,  aim!  At  will, 
point-blank  range — fire ! ' ' 

Prettily  enough  the  American  fire  opened  on 
the  Moros  rushing  down  the  narrow  path. 

The  centre  of  the  American  column,  at  Lieu- 
tenant Holmes 's  order,  opened  fire  across  the 
gully  at  the  wooded  ambush  on  the  left. 

Captain  Freeman  took  up  his  stand  a  little 
forward  of  the  centre,  where  he  could  watch  the 
fire  in  both  directions. 

"Hurry  up  that  Gatling  gun,  Prescott." 

"Yes,  sir." 

Prescott  and  two  privates  were  working  at 
lightning  speed  to  get  the  Gatling  placed. 
Then  the  lieutenant  fed  in  a  belt  of  ammunition. 

' '  Sergeant  Terry,  relieve  Sergeant  Overton  in 
charge  of  the  advancing  firing  line.  Overton, 
come  here." 

"Yes,  sir,"  responded  Hal,  running  up  and 
saluting. 

Lieutenant  Prescott  was  just  finishing  the 
sighting  of  the  Gatling. 

"Attend  to  the  firing  of  this  piece,  Sergeant. 
Fire  steadily,  though  not  at  fullest  speed.  Keep 
it  going  continuously  until  it  becomes  too  hot, 
or  until  I  give  the  word  to  stop.' 

"Very  good,  sir.' 

"Begin  firing,  Sergeant.' 


198  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

\ 

Hal 's  answer  was  to  turn  the  firing  mechanism 
loose. 

K-r-r-r-rip !  rang  out  the  exploding  cartridges 
too  rapidly  for  count.  Hal  swung  the  nose  of 
the  piece  slightly  from  side  to  side,  and  the 
storm  of  Gratling  bullets  raked  thoroughly  the 
road  ahead. 

At  first  the  on-rushing  Moros  had  been  almost 
stopped  by  the  sudden,  low,  accurate  infantry 
fire.  They  were  to  be  seen  ahead  in  great  force, 
and  the  cries  of  their  leaders  drove  them  on 
with  greater  steadiness. 

Now,  as  the  crackling  of  the  Gatling  rose  on 
the  air,  and  its  projectiles  swept  the  road  ahead, 
constantly  supported  by  brisk  infantry  fire  from 
at  least  forty  men,  the  natives  were  forced  to 
halt.  Then  they  wavered.  The  hoarse,  taunt- 
ing cries  of  their  leaders,  however,  drove  them 
forward  again. 

Twice  they  wavered,  under  the  blistering  fire 
of  the  regulars,  though  each  time  their  leaders 
succeeded  in  driving  the  brown  men  forward 
again. 

When  the  fight  opened  there  were  at  least  six 
hundred  yelling  Moros  in  sight,  but  they  were 
now  dropping  by  scores. 

Then,  with  a  wild  yell,  three  hundred  more 
rushed  around  the  base  of  a  low  hill,  joining  the 
assailants. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  199 

"Are  the  Moros  cowards ?"  demanded  the 
deep,  penetrating  voice  of  one  of  the  leaders. 
"Are  the  Moros  women,  that  they  would  live 
forever?  Has  heaven  no  joys  for  the  faithful 
that  you  would  remain  so  long  away!' 

That  stirred  the  fanatical  blood  of  the  brown 
men.  They  were  equal  to  anything,  now!  On 
they  dashed,  though  the  Gatling  and  the  steady 
infantry  fire  withered  the  ranks  in  advance. 

On  they  came,  disdaining,  now,  to  return  rifle 
fire  with  rifle  fire.  Over  their  own  dead  and 
wounded  stepped  the  brown  men,  and  rushed 
on. 

"Cease  firing  there,  Sergeant  Terry.  Give 
'em  the  steel ! '  bellowed  Lieutenant  Prescott 
hoarsely,  using  his  hands  for  a  trumpet,  though 
he  stood  barely  twelve  feet  from  young  Terry. 

i  i  Cease  firing, ' '  Noll  repeated  squarely  in  the 
bugler's  ear.  Then  the  notes  of  the  bugle  arose, 
clear  and  loud.  The  firing  died  out. 

"  It 's  cold  steel,  men !  Fix  bayonets ! ' '  shouted 
Sergeant  Noll. 

Eut  Sergeant  Hal  and  two  men  had  dragged 
the  Gatling,  momentarily  silenced,  to  one  side 
of  the  road,  where  they  could  still  employ  this 
machine  of  destruction. 

Another  belt  of  cartridges  Sergeant  Overton 
fed  in.  Then  he  started  the  machine  again. 

B-r-r-r-rip!     The  Gatling  was  performing  at 


200  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

hand-to-hand  quarters  now.  Noll  sent  a  dozen 
men  to  stand  by  the  gun,  defending  it  from  cap- 
ture with  their  lives. 

Clash!  Zing!  Slash!  Slash!  Thrust— cut! 
It  was  steel  against  steel  now.  On  more  open 
ground  the  Moros  might  have  had  a  slight  ad- 
vantage, for  they  are  skilled  users  of  the  sword 
and  creese,  and  when  their  blood  is  up  they  know 
little  in  the  way  of  terror. 

E-r-r-r-r-rip !  It  was  the  Gatling,  at  such 
close  quarters,  that  now  dismayed  the  brown 
men.  With  no  mean  quality  of  heroism,  they 
threw  themselves  against  the  gun's  defenders. 
They  would  seize  that  demon  of  machinery  and 
hurl  it  over  into  the  gully  below.  But  the  dough- 
boys, with  bayonets  stationed  on  the  sides  of 
the  gun,  thrust  or  stabbed  them  back.  No  native 
approached  the  muzzle  of  the  Gatling  and  lived 
to  cause  further  trouble.  In  as  wide  an  arc  as 
possible  Sergeant  Hal  swung  the  nose  of  the 
piece  from  side  to  side. 

Private  Danton,  standing  close  to  Hal,  ready 
to  feed  in  the  next  belt  of  cartridges,  fell  with 
a  Moro  bullet  in  his  brain.  Another  soldier 
sprang  forward,  snatched  up  the  belt  of  am- 
munition and  stood  ready  to  feed. 

Fully  twenty-five  hundred  rounds  of  Gatling 
ammunition  were  thus  fired  into  the  dense  brown 
ranks  before  the  Moros  felt  that  they  could  en- 


Sergeant  Hal  Swung  the  Nose  of  the  Gun  from  Side  to  Side. 

201 


THE  SEW  TOUK 
'UUC  LIBRARY 


ASTOR,  LF.KOX  AND 


ft 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  203 

dure  it  no  longer.  On  that  narrow  road  they 
had  failed  to  reach  the  piece  itself.  Four  brown 
sharpshooters,  back  in  the  ranks,  had  been  de- 
tailed by  a  Moro  officer  to  climb  a  tree  and  fill 
with  lead  the  body  of  the  indomitable  young 
sergeant.  As  the  bullets  sang  past  his  head,  Hal 
discovered  the  tree,  turned  the  Gatling  muzzle 
that  way,  and  fairly  shot  the  leaves  off  a  portion 
of  it.  Two  of  the  sharpshooters  dropped,  rid- 
dled through.  The  other  pair  dropped  from 
sheer  terror. 

Now  that  the  execution  on  that  narrow  moun- 
tain road  was  becoming  more  than  flesh  and 
blood  could  stand,  the  Moros  broke  in  pell-mell 
confusion. 

"Forward,     there,     Lieutenant     Prescott!' 
yelled     Captain     Freeman.       "Give     'em    the 
bayonet.    But  don 't  let  your  men  get  away  from 
you. ' ' 

Prescott 's  answer  was  conveyed  only  by  a 
wave  of  his  stick.  After  the  fleeing  Moros  he 
rushed  his  men,  and  the  Malays  in  the  rear  re- 
ceived many  an  ugly  wound. 

"Keep  the  Gatling  close  up  with  the  advance, 
Sergeant!"  ordered  Captain  Freeman,  striding 
forward. 

When  the  Moros  in  front  had  gotten  to  hand- 
to-hand  quarters  the  flanking  fire  from  across 
the  gully  had  ceased,  after  having  killed  two  of 


204  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

Freeman's  men  and  wounding  six  more.  Now 
it  reopened. 

1  '  Halt,  Sergeant !  Swing  that  Gatling  around. 
Turn  it  loose  across  the  gully." 

E-r-r-r-r-rip !  Captain  Freeman  sent  two  men 
back  on  the  run  to  bring  up  more  ammunition 
for  the  machine  gun.  Within  two  minutes  the 
fire  from  across  the  gully  had  ceased.  In  the 
meantime  three  more  regulars  of  the  centre  had 
been  hit. 

"Now,  run  it  forward,  Sergeant,"  com- 
manded Captain  Freeman.  "Support  Lieuten- 
ant Prescott.  The  Moros  have  halted  him  for 
the  moment.' 

Again  the  Gatling  went  into  action  up  front, 
where  Sergeant  Noll  Terry,  in  the  front  rank, 
was  taking  more  than  his  share  of  the  attack, 
though  as  yet  he  had  given  many  wounds  and 
received  none.  Yet  Prescott 's  advance  would 
have  been  driven  back  had  it  not  been  for  the 
prompt  arrival  of  the  machine  gun. 

The  transport  and  rear  guard  were  coming 
up  now. 

"Corporal,"  called  Captain  Freeman,  "my 
compliments  to  Lieutenant  Prescott,  and  tell  him 
that  I  want  the  whole  line  to  move  forward  as 
rapidly  as  possible.  Our  only  safety,  now.  lies 
in  getting  as  quickly  as  possible  off  this  road 
and  into  an  open  country." 


IN    THE   PHILIPPINES  205 

Prescott  received  the  order,  and  right  loyally 
responded.  As  often  as  possible  the  Gatling, 
now  up  with  the  advance,  was  given  an  oppor- 
tunity to  cool. 

Within  twenty  minutes  after  the  opening  of 
the  attack  the  Moro  spirit  was  broken  for  the 
time.  They  had  had  more  than  a  hundred  men 
killed  and  wounded,  and  that  was  all  the  brown 
men  could  stand  for  the  first  onset. 

" Don't  pursue  any  further,"  ordered  Cap- 
tain Freeman,  well  up  with  the  advance  by  this 
time.  "Let  the  rascals  get  away  if  they  don't 
interfere  with  our  advance.  We'll  have  them 
at  hand  to  fight  when  we're  ready,  Lieutenant. 
What  we  must  do  now  is  to  get  a  place  where 
we  can  fortify  ourselves  and  look  after  our 
wounded. ' ' 

"We've  a  heavy  list,  I  fear,  sir." 

"Heavy  enough,'  replied  Captain  Freeman 
gravely. 

There  was  no  further  opposition  to  the  ad- 
vance of  the  regulars,  who,  despite  the  great 
inferiority  of  their  numbers,  had  made  the  brown 
men  respect  their  fighting  grit  and  prowess. 
Within  ten  minutes  after  Captain  Freeman's 
order  to  abandon  the  chase  there  was  no  visible 
evidence  that  there  were  any  Moros  in  the  neigh- 
boring mountains. 

"March    to    the    right,    and    take    that    hill 


206  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

yonder  in  quick  time,  Lieutenant  Prescott,"  di- 
rected Captain  Freeman. 

"Very  good,  sir." 

"Follow  the  lieutenant,  yon  men  with  the  Gat- 
ling,"  ordered  the  commanding  officer,  and  Hal 
and  his  comrades  covered  the  ground  as  quickly 
as  they  could.  No  opposition  was  offered  to 
their  taking  the  hill.  Here  the  first  regulars 
to  arrive  dropped  down  panting,  though  Pres- 
cott,  Hal  and  Noll  remained  standing  and  vig- 
ilant. Slowly  the  rest  of  the  column  climbed 
the  hill.  After  a  brief  rest  the  men  were  set  to 
work  fortifying  the  crest  of  this  little  rise  of 
ground. 

No  trench  is  ever  dug,  by  a  wise  commander, 
at  the  exact  top  of  a  hill,  but  always  at  a  point 
a  little  below,  which  is  called  the  "military 
crest.'  If  the  trench  were  on  the  top  of  the 
hill,  every  time  the  men  raised  themselves  to 
fire,  their  heads  and  trunks  would  stand  out  too 
clearly  defined  against  the  sky-line,  and  make 
them  easy  marks  for  an  enemy  below. 

Up  on  the  top  of  the  hill,  however,  was  a  de- 
pression in  the  ground.  Into  this  space  the 
transport  wagons  were  driven,  and  here  the  dead 
were  laid  out  and  the  wounded  attended  to. 

A  deadly  morning's  work  it  had  proved. 
Five  infantrymen  had  been  killed,  twelve  were 
wounded  badly  enough  to  be  out  of  the  fighting 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  207 

lists  for  the  present,  while  twenty-two  others, 
though  more  or  less  wounded,  were  still  fit  for 
duty. 

"Now,  chum,  you  see  what  follows  the  fight- 
ing," murmured  Hal  in  Noirs  ear.  "How  do 
you  like  what  follows  the  fighting?" 

"It  looks  some  grim,"  Sergeant  Terry  ad- 
mitted, wrapping  his  left  hand  where  a  creese 
had  made  a  gash.  '  *  But  what  are  we  here  for, 
and  why  are  we  soldiers,  if  this  sort  of  thing 
doesn't  appeal  to  us?' 

"I'm  afraid  you're  hopelessly  blood-thirsty,' 
smiled  Hal. 

"No;  I'm  not.  I  enlisted  because  I  believed 
I'd  like  the  soldier  life,  and  fighting  is  the  high- 
est expression  of  the  soldier's  work.' 

"Hello,  there,  'Long'!"  called  Private  Kelly. 

"Yes?"  answered  Private  William  Green, 
turning  at  the  hail. 

"Did  you  bring  along  your  kantab  and  pass 
plenty  of  it  to  the  goo-goos?' 

"I'll  make  no  money  here,"  grunted  William 
disdaining  to  answer  Kelly's  teasing  question. 
"There's  no  chance  to  spend  money  here,  so 
none  of  the  fellows  will  borrow  from  me.' 

"Making  no  money?"  Kelly  rebuked  him. 
"Man,  isn't  your  government  pay  running 
along,  and  ain't  ye  glad  ye 're  here  to  be  draw- 
ing it?" 


208  UNCLE   SAM'S   BOYS 

"I  don't  like  this  fighting  business,"  grum- 
bled Slosson. 

"Why  not?"  inquired  Kelly  in  mild  surprise. 

"In  that  hike  I  lost  my  pipe.  Lucky  for  me 
I  brought  two  more  along  in  my  pack.  I'll  get 
one  of  them  out,  now.  Want  the  other,  Kelly?" 

"I  do  not,  lad,  and  my  thanks  to  you.  Slos- 
son, I'm  beginning  to  think  we  ought  to  force 
the  brown  men  to  accept  pipes.  If  they  smoked 
'em  the  way  you  do  yours  there  'd  soon  be  fewer 
of  the  pesky  brown  goo-goos  in  this  land." 


CHAPTER  XX 

CORPORAL  DUXBRIDGE'S  MISTAKE 

FORTUNATELY  there  was  water,  a  clear, 
cool  spring  of  it  just  below  the  trench 
line.     As  soon  as  the  men  were  rested, 
Captain  Freeman  detailed  a  score  of  them  to 
haul  water  up  into  camp. 

"Don't  get  into  groups,  you  water  carriers, 
either,'  Lieutenant  Prescott  called  after  the 
men  as  they  started  down  the  slope  with  buck- 
ets. "Keep  apart.  If  you  don't,  some  of  the 
Moros  in  the  distance  will  be  taking  pot-shots 
and  getting  some  of  you." 

The  day  wore  on,  and  it  looked  as  though  the 
Moros  were  still  running. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  209 

"I'd  hate  to  have  to  take  ten  men  and  fight 
all  of  the  enemy  who  are  within  two  thousand 
yards  of  here,"  declared  Captain  Freeman  in 
the  hearing  of  a  large  part  of  his  command. 
"The  datto  has  us  all  in  a  bunch  and  he'll  hang 
to  us  until  he  has  wiped  us  out. ' ' 

"I  don't  believe  he  can  do  it,  sir,"  retorted 
Lieutenant  Greg  Holmes. 

"No;  but  the  brown  rascal  thinks  he  can, 
which  amounts  to  the  same  thing  as  far  as  he 
is  concerned.  Mr.  Holmes,  you  may  safely  take 
my  word  for  it  that  the  datto  has  made  up  his 
own  mind  not  to  allow  one  of  us  ever  to  get 
back  in  safety  to  Bantoc. 

Late  in  the  afternoon  the  five  soldiers  who 
had  been  slain  were  placed  in  a  row  at  the  top 
of  the  hill. 

"Too  bad  we  haven't  a  Flag  to  drape  the 
poor  fellows  with, ' '  said  Captain  Freeman  sor- 
rowfully. 

"We  have  a  Flag  with  us,  sir,'  spoke  up 
Hal,  saluting. 

"Where  is  it,  Sergeant?" 

"In  a  small  parcel  in  one  of  the  ammunition 
wagons,  sir.' 

"How  does  it  happen  to  be  there,  Sergeant?' 

"I  put  it  in  myself,  sir.  It's  the  Flag  that 
the  Moros  hauled  down  from  the  flagstaff  over 
the  schoolhouse  near  Seaforth's — the  Flag  they 

-4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


210  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

slashed  and  danced  upon.  I  picked  it  up  at 
that  time,  sir;  and  when  we  started  on  this  ex- 
pedition I  placed  the  Flag  in  one  of  the 
wagons.' 

"Why  did  you  do  that,  Sergeant?" 

"Because  I  was  in  hopes  that  before  we  get 
through  with  this  expedition,  sir,  we'd  find  a 
chance  to  make  Datto  Hakkut  and  his  men 
salute  the  American  Flag." 

"Bring  the  Flag  here,  Sergeant." 

Hal  brought  it,  and  its  tattered  folds  were  so 
laid  that  some  remnant  of  the  bunting  touched 
each  of  the  five  bodies  of  the  slain  soldiers. 

Assembling  half  his  command,  while  the  other 
half  watched  in  the  trenches,  Captain  Freeman 
read  the  prayers  and  the  service  for  the  dead. 
Three  volleys  were  fired  over  the  graves  after 
the  slain  men  had  been  laid  in  them.  Bugler 
Swanson  blew  "taps,"  after  which  the  graves 
were  carefully  filled  and  the  tops  sodded  so  that 
roving  Moros  would  not  afterwards  find  and 
desecrate  these  graves,  sacred  to  the  American 
people.  All  in  good  time  the  American  military 
authorities  would  send  and  exhume  these  re- 
mains, transferring  them  to  marked  resting 
places  in  military  cemeteries. 

Before  supper  Captain  Freeman  summoned 
his  two  officers  in  council  with  him. 

"I  want  to  talk  with  you  young  gentlemen," 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  211 

began  the  captain,  "for  the  reason  that,  of 
course,  by  the  fortunes  of  war,  I  may  be  re- 
moved at  any  moment.  If  anything  happens  to 
me  Mr.  Prescott  is  to  be  regarded  as  ranking 
officer.  Now,  I  want  you  both  to  understand 
my  plan  in  taking  up  my  position  on  this  hill. 
Do  either  of  you  guess  it?' 

* i  I  think  I  do,  sir, ' '  replied  Lieutenant  Pres- 
cott, after  a  pause. 

"Very  good,  Mr.  Prescott.  What  is  my  rea- 
son?" 

"You  were  sent  out,  sir,  to  meet  Datto  Hak- 
kut,  fight  him  and  disperse  his  forces. ' 

"Exactly/    nodded  the  captain. 

"This  hill,  sir,  will  be  a  hard  nut  for  the 
brown  men  to  crack.  If  he  hopes  to  do  it,  Hak- 
kut  must  get  every  available  fighting  man  here 
on  the  spot." 

i  t  You  're  right, ' '  nodded  Freeman. 

"Thus,  sir,  you  hope  to  force  Hakkut  to  con- 
centrate his  whole  fighting  force  in  this  imme- 
diate country.  If  you  get  all  the  rascals  in 
front  of  you  you'll  have  them  all  in  one  lot  to 
whip. ' ' 

"You've  fathomed  my  plan  very  easily,  Mr. 
Prescott,  and  you've  exactly  stated  it.  Now, 
though  I  shall  take  pains  to  be  sure  that  the 
Moros  remain  in  this  neighborhood,  I  shall  not 
force  any  very  hard  fighting  for  two  or  three 


212  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

days.  Our  rations  will  last  longer  than  that, 
with  care.  After  IVe  given  Hakkut  time 
enough  to  get  his  whole  crew  togetlier  then  I 
shall  go  after  them  as  hard  as  I  can  consider- 
ing the  size  of  this  force.  Also,  by  waiting,  we 
shall  give  several  of  our  wounded  men  time  to 
get  back  into  fighting  condition/' 

"But  what,  sir/7  broke  in  Lieutenant  Holmes, 
"if  the  datto  takes  your  negative  course  for  a 
confession  of  weakness,  and  attempts  to  carry 
this  hill  by  assault?" 

"Answer  that,  if  you  can,  Mr.  Prescott,"  di- 
rected Captain  Freeman,  turning  to  the  other 
West  Pointer. 

"Why,  I  imagine,  sir,  that  you  hope  your 
seeming  inactivity  will  provoke  Hakkut  into 
trying  to  carry  this  hill  by  assault.  This  hill, 
defended  by  regulars,  will  be  no  easy  place  to 
take  from  us,  and  Hakkut  will  lose  so  many  of 
his  men  that  the  experience  will  be  a  good  les- 
son for  him.' 

"That's  the  idea,'  nodded  the  commanding 
officer.  "Now,  gentlemen,  you  understand  the 
plan  thus  far.  But  there's  another  important 
point  to  remember.  If  we  are  cooped  up  here 
for  very  many  days,  then  the  men  will  have 
nothing  left  to  eat  but  grass  and  gravel.  So 
you  will  understand  that,  presently,  it  is  going 
to  be  a  matter  of  prime  necessity  for  us  to  be 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  213 

able  to  leave  here  and  forage.  Therefore,  dur- 
ing our  comparative  inactivity,  we  must  pro- 
voke Hakkut  into  as  many  assaults  as  possible 
upon  this  position.  The  more  attempts  he 
makes  the  more  his  fighting  men  will  be  de- 
moralized when  we  at  last  fight  our  way  through 
his  lines.' 

During  that  night  no  attack  was  made,  and 
the  men  had  little  to  do  beyond  carrying  out 
guard  duty.  Hakkut  had  undoubtedly  dis- 
patched messengers  to  bring  all  possible  fight- 
ing men  to  the  scene. 

Nor  in  the  morning,  even  two  hours  after  day- 
light, was  there  any  sign  of  the  enemy.  Cap- 
tain Freeman  at  last  took  up  his  field  glass 
again  and  intently  studied  a  deep  forest  some 
twelve  hundred  yards  below. 

"Sergeant  Overton!' 

"Sir?" 

' i  Have  the  Gatling  and  a  belt  of  ammunition 
brought  up.7 

"Very  good,  sir.' 

' '  When  the  Gatling  had  been  placed,  Captain 
Freeman  handed  his  glass  to  the  young  ser- 
geant. 

"Overton,  look  through  the  glass  and  see  if 
you  can  discover  the  line  of  timber  that  I'm 
going  to  describe  to  you.' 

Hal  very  soon  had  the  spot  located. 


214  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"Now,  Sergeant,  sight  the  Gatling  for  twelve 
hundred  yards.  Do  it  carefully.  When  you  are 
ready  do  what  you  can  to  stir  up  life  along  that 
line  of  timber." 

While  Sergeant  Hal  was  making  ready,  Cap- 
tain Freeman  remained  attentively  watching 
the  timber  line  through  his  glass. 

E-r-r-r-r-r-rip !  Hal  served  with  speed  and 
intensity. 

"Just  as  I  thought!"  exclaimed  the  com- 
manding officer.  "You've  got  a  line  of  brown 
men  on  the  nervous  jump  down  there.  Keep  it 
up  a  little  longer,  Sergeant.  Sweep  over  a 
wider  area.' 

Then,  after  a  pause: 

"Cease  firing.' 

For  an  hour  Captain  Freeman  let  the  enemy 
rest.  He  was  watching  other  points  through 
his  glass.  At  last  he  ordered  the  Gatling  into 
action  again.  The  trick  was  played  a  third  time 
that  morning,  and  each  time  some  of  the  Moros 
were  disturbed. 

1 '  That 's  one  of  the  things  I  wanted  to  know, ' ' 
remarked  Captain  Freeman  at  last.  "Hakkut 
has  this  camp  completely  surrounded,  but  is 
keeping  his  men  quiet.  I  wish  we  had  two  or 
three  more  Gatlings  and  a  whole  wagon  load  of 
this  special  ammunition.  We  could  make  it  in- 
teresting for  the  goo-goos." 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  215 

However,  the  datto  made  no  move  to  attack, 
though  Captain  Freeman  believed  that  the  rebel, 
by  this  time,  must  have  twelve  hundred  fighting 
men,  at  least,  in  the  forests  below. 

"Hakkut  may  realize  the  difficulty  of  assault- 
ing us  here,  and  may  be  waiting  for  huge  rein- 
forcements,7 Captain  Freeman  confided  to  his 
two  lieutenants.  ' '  Moreover,  I  think  it  extremely 
likely  that  we  have  been  caught  underestimat- 
ing the  force  of  the  enemy. " 

"There's  one  good  thing  about  this  style  of 
campaigning,  sir,'  smiled  Prescott.  "It  isn't 
eating  up  any  more  men  in  casualties. ' ' 

"No;  but  the  datto  is  figuring  that  he's  let- 
ting us  eat  up  our  rations.' 

There  were  no  attacks  that  afternoon  or  even- 
ing. The  next  morning  Captain  Freeman  hesi- 
tated as  to  whether  or  not  he  should  send  out 
a  party  in  force  to  "locate  and  develop'  the 
enemy.  But  he  decided  net  to  do  so. 

"To-morrow,  though,'  declared  the  captain 
to  his  lieutenants,  "we'll  break  through  the  line 
somewhere. ' 

That  third  night  Sergeant  Hal  was  placed  in 
charge  of  the  guard,  with  Lieutenant  Greg 
Holmes  as  his  direct  superior.  On  the  side  of 
camp  where  the  commanding  officer  thought  the 
enemy  most  numerous,  Hal  placed  Corporal 
Duxbridge  in  charge. 


216  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

"Don't  close  your  eyes  to-night,  Corporal," 
warned  the  young  sergeant.  "You  can  get  your 
sleep  in  the  daytime.  This  is  the  point  where 
the  greatest  vigilance  is  needed.  This  point  is 
really  the  key  to  the  camp,  and  every  man  who 
lies  down  to  sleep  to-night  leaves  his  life  in 
your  hands.7 

"All  right,"  replied  Corporal  Duxbridge  in  a 
voice  that  sounded  weary. 

"You'll  be  sure  to  keep  awake!" 

"I  know  my  business,  Sergeant." 

Hal  Overton  did  not  particularly  like  Dux- 
bridge.  He  belonged  to  C  Company,  and  was  a 
man  subject  to  occasional  fits  of  crankiness. 
But  Duxbridge,  as  well  as  the  others,  had  his 
share  of  duty  to  perform. 

Late  that  night  one  of  the  men  of  the  guard, 
stationed  not  far  from  Duxbridge,  thought  that 
he  heard  a  slight  noise  down  the  slope.  He  lis- 
tened only  a  moment,  then  felt  sure  that  he  had 
espied  a  figure  crawling  along  further  down  the 
slope. 

"Halt!"  called  the  soldier.  "Halt  or  I'll 
fire.  Who's  there?" 

"A  friend,'  came  the  answer  in  perfectly 
good  English.  "For  Heaven's  sake  don't  fire. 
We've  had  enough  of  horrors  with  the  fiends 
below.  Where's  Corporal  Duxbridge?  He 
knows  me." 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  217 

"Corporal  Duxbridge  is  on  duty  at  this 
point,'  returned  the  soldier.  "How  many  of 
you  are  there?7 

"Seven;  but  I  will  come  up  alone  first  and 
speak  with  the  corporal.' 

Duxbridge  was  called  quietly.  The  corporal 
had  been  dozing  for  twenty  minutes,  and  he 
awoke  with  mind  somewhat  befogged. 

The  stranger  below,  who  had  been  allowed  to 
advance,  now  stepped  up  to  where  the  corporal 
could  scrutinize  him. 

' i  Why,  I  know  this  man, '  declared  the  cor- 
poral. "His  name's  Eusebio  Davo.  He's  a 
wealthy  Tagalo,  loyal  to  the  government  and  a 
good  man.  What's  the  trouble,  Senor  Davo?' 

"Corporal,  I  went  south  in  the  island  to  pick 
up  some  laborers  from  the  Manobo  tribe.  I  got 
forty  together  and  was  on  my  way  through  this 
country,  not  knowing  that  the  Moros  were  out. 
So  we  were  caught,  this  afternoon,  and  taken 
before  the  Datto  Hakkut.  He  ordered  us  into 
his  ranks  to  fight.  We  demurred,  and  four  of 
my  fellows  were  cut  down  before  my  eyes.  Then 
we  accepted  arms.  But  to-night  we  tried  to 
creep  through  the  datto's  lines  and  get  here. 
All  but  the  six  men  with  me  were  caught,  and 
their  fate  must  have  been  awful.' 

Senor  Davo  shuddered,  then  went  on : 

"I  come  to  beseech  you  that  you  allow  my 


218  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

\ 

poor  fellows  to  come  inside  your  lines.  You 
know  me,  Corporal,  and  know  that  we're  all 
right. ' ' 

"Yes,  bring  your  men  inside  our  line,"  de- 
cided Corporal  Duxbridge.  "  I  '11  vouch  for  you, 
Senor  Davo,  to  our  commanding  officer." 

Protesting  his  undying  gratitude,  Davo  went 
below  for  his  men,  and  brought  them  inside  the 
lines,  a  sorry  looking  lot  of  fellows  who  at  once 
threw  themselves  down  as  if  to  sleep. 

"You'll  notify  Sergeant  Overton,  of  course?" 
suggested  the  soldier  who  had  first  halted  Davo. 

"You  mind  your  business,  Strong,"  Corporal 
Duxbridge  rebuked  him.  "I'll  notify  the  ser- 
geant in  good  time. ' 

But  Hal,  as  it  happened,  was  nearer  than  had 
been  imagined.  Unobserved  he  had  listened  to 
the  whole  conversation.  Now,  Overton  hastened 
silently  away,  awaking  Lieutenant  Holmes  and 
ten  soldiers.  Without  undue  haste  these 
marched  down  on  Duxbridge 's  station. 

"Halt!    Who  goes  there?" 

"The  officer  of  the  day  and  the  sergeant  of 
the  guard,"  came  the  response,  in  Lieutenant 
Holmes 's  crisp  tones. 

"Advance,  sir.' 

The  seven  new  arrivals  lay  on  the  ground, 
apparently  sound  asleep.  Davo  had  his  hat  over 
his  face,  and  was  snoring  lightly. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  219 

"  Who  are  these  new  men  in  camp,  Corporal!  " 
demanded  Holmes  sharply. 

"Fugitives  from  the  datto's  lines,  sir.  I  was 
about  to  notify  the  sergeant  of  the  guard,  sir/' 

"Don't  let  them  get  away/  spoke  Hal 
quickly  to  the  men,  i  i  and  remember  that  they  're 
armed  with  steel!  This  fellow,  who  calls  him- 
self Davo  is  Vicente  Tomba,  a  Tagalo  who  is 
right-hand  man  to  the  datto,'  added  the  ser- 
geant, bending  and  snatching  the  hat  from  the 
Tagalo 's  face. 

It  was  truly  Tomba,  who,  with  a  snarl,  leaped 
to  his  feet  ere  Hal  Overton  could  grab  him. 

"Shoot  him!"  ordered  Lieutenant  Holmes,  as 
Tomba  went  over  the  trench  and  down  the  slope 
at  sprinting  speed.  Three  or  four  rifles  spoke, 
but  Tomba  escaped  in  the  darkness. 

Not  so,  however,  with  the  men  Tomba  had 
brought  with  him.  Not  one  of  them  escaped.  All 
were  stretched  on  the  ground  senseless,  having 
been  clubbed  with  the  butts  of  the  soldiers' 
rifles.  Then,  a  quick  search  under  the  shirt  of 
each  of  the  rascals,  revealed  a  creese  with  blade 
ground  to  a  razor  edge. 

"You  see,  Corporal/'  ripped  out  Sergeant 
Hal,  "these  scoundrels  were  going  to  watch 
their  chance  to  knife  you  all  in  the  dark.  Then 
the  Moros  would  have  rushed  in  at  this  point, 
and " 


220  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

Hal's  prediction  was  verified,  at  that  instant, 
by  the  breaking  out  of  a  fiendish  chorus  of  yells 
down  the  slope.  The  Moros,  waiting  below, 
were  advancing  to  a  night  attack. 

"Bugler  of  the  guard!  Sound  the  general 
alarm ! ' '  roared  out  Lieutenant  Holmes 's  steady 
tones. 


CHAPTER  XXI 

SCOUTING  IN   DEADLY   EARNEST 

IT   was   a   ferocious   attack,   promptly   and 
staunchly  met. 

Soldiers  in  the  field  on  campaign  sleep 
in  their  full  clothing,  their  rifles  at  their  sides. 
It  takes  not  more  than  ten  seconds  to  turn  a 
soldier  out  in  the  night,  fully  awake  and  ready 
for  orders.  The  knowledge  that  their  lives  de- 
pend upon  their  promptness  keeps  the  men  in 
condition  for  quick  obedience. 

Even  the  Gatling  was  ready  at  the  top  of  the 
hill.  From  point  to  point  it  was  dragged,  and 
wherever  it  was  served  the  midnight  assailants 
soon  drew  back. 

For  twenty  minutes  the  conflict  was  kept  up, 
often  at  closest  quarters.  But  at  last  the  sound- 
ing of  the  Moro  horns  in  the  rear  called  off  the 
assailants,  who  fled  in  the  darkness. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  221 

"How  did  this  all  happen,  Mr.  Holmes ?" 
asked  Captain  Freeman.  t  i  I  must  congratulate 
you  on  being  alert  and  ready  for  the  brown 


men. 


"Sergeant  Overton  had  just  called  me,  sir. 
And  I  think  you  will  wish  to  hear  what  he  has 
to  say.' 

Hal  was  sent  for  and  reported  instantly. 

"I  know,  now,  sir,  why  Tomba  wanted  to 
make  my  acquaintance,  and  that  of  Sergeant 
Terry,  sir, ' '  Hal  explained,  and  then  told  what 
had  happened. 

"How  did  Corporal  Duxbridge  ever  happen 
to  do  a  thing  like  that?'  demanded  Freeman 
angrily. 

* '  Tomba  had  already  made  the  Corporal 's  ac- 
quaintance, sir.  Tomba  wanted  to  make  mine, 
and  Terry's,  as  soon  as  he  knew  the  Thirty- 
fourth  was  coming  to  these  southern  islands. 
It  was  Tomba 's  belief  that  he  could  run  a  gang 
of  creese  men  past  us,  and  get  inside  where  he 
could  knife  the  nearest  soldiers,  and  then  let  an 
attacking  party  in.' 

"If  the  Moros  had  ever  gotten  through  our 
line  they'd  have  wiped  the  camp  out  to-night,' 
exclaimed  Captain  Freeman. 

"Of  course  they  would,  sir,  and  that  is  the 
way  in  which  Tomba,  even  in  Manila,  had 
planned  to  make  our  acquaintance,  and  use  it 


222  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS  f 

s. 

for  just  such  an  undertaking  as  to-night's.  It 
seems,  sir,  that  having  failed  with  us,  he  suc- 
ceeded in  getting  on  the  right  side  of  Corporal 
Duxbridge. ' 

"  Where,  I  wonder  ?"  muttered  the  captain. 
1 1  And  where  is  the  Corporal  1 ' 

6  i  Just  taken  up  above  with  the  wounded,  sir, ' 
replied  Lieutenant  Holmes.     "Corporal  Dux- 
bridge  was  hit,  sir." 

' l  Let  us  go  up  to  see  him.  Where  are  the  six 
natives?  " 

"Tied,  sir,  and  up  with  the  wounded." 

Corporal  Duxbridge,  when  the  commanding 
officer  visited  him,  felt  sheepish  enough,  despite 
the  great  pain  he  was  in.  He  now  readily  ex- 
plained how  Tomba,  under  the  assumed  name 
of  Davo,  had  made  his  acquaintance  in  Bantoc. 
Tomba  had  spent  money  so  freely  in  entertain- 
ing him  that  Duxbridge  had  been  certain  that 
the  man  must  be  a  wealthy,  good-natured  Tag- 
alo. 

"I  hope  you've  learned  a  lesson,  Corporal,' 
said  Captain  Freeman  sadly.     "You're  one  of 
five  wounded  in  to-night's  performance,  and  two 
of  our  finest  men  are  dead.' 

Corporal  Duxbridge  covered  his  face  with  his 
hands. 

"I  was  a  big  fool,"  he  confessed  brokenly. 

There  were  no  more  attacks  that  night,  but 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  223 

in  the  morning  the  Moros  developed  a  new  style 
of  trouble.  All  through  the  day,  from  one  point 
or  another,  they  kept  the  American  trenches 
under  fire  at  frequent  intervals.  Captain  Free- 
man, however,  refused  to  allow  his  men  to  waste 
ammunition.  They  must  not  fire  until  the  brown 
men  attempted  an  assault. 

That  night  only  half  rations  were  served  to 
the  defenders  of  the  hill.  There  was  but  little 
food  left.  During  the  night  there  were  three 
assaults  against  the  force  on  the  hill,  though 
none  of  them  were  desperately  fought. 

"Hakkut  is  going  to  adopt  a  new  trick  of 
keeping  us  awake  day  and  night, ' '  muttered  Cap- 
tain Freeman  grimly. 

The  next  day  there  was  more  annoying  firing 
against  the  trenches,  though  the  Moros  had 
learned  their  lesson  too  well  to  attempt  any 
rushes  during  daylight, 

Just  after  dark,  that  evening,  Captain  Free- 
man sent  for  his  officers.  He  also  allowed  Hal 
and  Noll  and  two  sergeants  from  C  Company 
to  be  on  hand  to  hear  the  discussion. 

' '  To-morrow  night,  at  the  latest,  we  Ve  got  to 
fight  our  way  out  of  here, ' '  announced  Captain 
Freeman.  "To  remain  here  later  than  to-mor- 
row night  will  be  to  invite  starvation — which, 
in  our  position,  means  nothing  less  than  destruc- 
tion. I  fear,  too,  that  we  shall  be  obliged  to 


224  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

abandon  our  transport  wagons.  Our  wounded 
we  can  carry  on  stretchers  made  with  poles  and 
blankets.  There  must  be  some  point  in  the  Moro 
line  where  we  can  break  through — some  point  so 
weakly  guarded  that  we  can  be  on  our  way  be- 
fore the  brown  rascals  can  gather  in  force 
enough  to  put  up  a  hard  fight.  This  fact  can 
be  determined  only  through  the  work  of  a  scout- 
ing party. ' 7 

"I  shall  be  delighted,  sir,  to  volunteer  for 
scouting  duty,'  spoke  up  Lieutenant  Prescott. 

"And  I  also,  sir,"  added  Lieutenant  Holmes. 

"Thank  you.  I  knew  that  you  would  both 
be  ready, ' ?  replied  the  commanding  officer.  ' t  Yet 
we  must  remember  that,  while  our  scouts  are 
out  to-night,  this  camp  is  also  extremely  liable 
to  attack.  If  the  latter  be  the  case,  I  do  not 
see  how  I  can  spare  either  of  my  officers.  Now, 
I  have  cause  to  remember  a  time  when,  in  the 
mountains  of  Colorado,  when  on  practice  field 
duty,  two  of  our  non-commissioned  officers 
especially  distinguished  themselves  as  scouts. 
I  believe  that  both  of  the  young  men  still  possess 
that  ability  in  marked  degree.  It  seems  to  me 
that  the  choice  of  a  leader  for  a  scouting  party 
lies  between  Sergeants  Overton  and  Terry." 

"Thank  you,  sir,"  broke  in  Sergeant  Hal 
gravely.  "May  I  suggest,  sir,  that  there  is  no 
need  of  making  a  choice  between  us?  I  would 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  225 

like  to  go  on  this  duty,  sir,  and  I'd  rather  have 
Sergeant  Terry  with  me  than  any  other  enlisted 
man  in  the  regiment.' 

"I'm  ready,  sir,"  declared  Noll  promptly. 

1  i  It  seems  almost  foolish  to  allow  two  such  ex- 
cellent sergeants  to  go, ' '  returned  Captain  Free- 
man gravely.  'You  see,  we  need  as  good  men 
in  the  camp  as  we  do  outside  of  it.  However, 
let  it  be  as  you  wish,  Sergeant  Overton.  How 
many  men  do  you  think  you  will  need  with 
you!" 

"None,  sir,  except  Sergeant  Terry,'  spoke 
Hal. 

"Are  two  enough  for  safety,  Sergeant,  in  your 
opinion. ' ' 

"Two  men  are  safer  than  a  dozen  on  scout- 
ing duty,  I  think,  sir.  Two  men  can  get  through 
in  places  where  even  four  men  would  be  caught 
at  it." 

"But  if  caught,  two  are  a  small  number  for 
defensive  purposes.' 

"There  won't  be  much  defense  possible,  sir, 
if  we're  caught;  but  I  think  Sergeant  Terry 
agrees  with  me  that  we  ought  not  to  be  caught. ' 

"Will  you  take  your  rifle  and  bayonet,  Ser- 
geant?" 

"I'd  rather  not,  sir.  In  fact,  the  plan  that 
his  come  into  my  mind  at  this  moment  is  for 
Sergeant  Terry  and  myself  to  stain  our  faces 

15 4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


226  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

and  bodies  with  juice  from  the  berries  of  the 
boka  bush  that  is  growing  inside  our  lines.  Then 
we'll  rob  two  of  the  native  prisoners  of  their 
clothing,  under  which  we  can  each  carry  a  serv- 
ice revolver  and  a  creese.  That  is,  sir,  if  you 
approve  my  plan." 

Captain  Freeman  was  silent  for  some  mo- 
ments. 

"I'm  afraid  you're  planning  an  especially  des- 
perate undertaking,  Sergeant  Overton.  I  quite 
understand  your  idea  in  dressing  like  natives. 
But  if  you  are  seen,  you  will  be  spoken  to.  It 
will  be  in  the  native  tongue.  What  then?  You 
can 't  answer  in  native  speech. ' ' 

"But  I  think,  sir,"  argued  Hal,  "that  you'll 
agree  that  there  are  probably  men  from  several 
tribes  under  the  datto  's  command.  In  that  case 
many  different  tribal  dialects  will  be  spoken. 
Noll — pardon  me,  sir — Sergeant  Terry  and  I  can 
answer  in  any  heathen-sounding,  guttural  sort 
of  words,  and  look  stupid." 

"It's  quite  difficult,  my  lad,  to  improvise  a 
pretended  language  on  the  spur  of  the  moment." 

'Hakka  kado  me  no  tonga,  lakka  prada  estig 
ferente,"  rejoined  Hal  Overton,  with  a  grin. 

"Dikka  mone  peditti  u  nono  mate  ben,"  said 
Noll  cheerfully. 

"What  language  is  that,  lads!"  demanded 
Captain  Freeman. 


IN    THE   PHILIPPINES  227 

"New  Jersey  hog-Latin,  I  imagine,  sir,"  re- 
plied Sergeant  Hal  soberly. 

' 1 1  do  not  believe,  gentlemen,  that  we  can  send 
better  scouts  than  Sergeants  Overton  and 
Terry, "  said  Captain  Freeman. 

His  two  subordinates  expressed  their  agree- 
ment. 

"Sergeants,  you  may  go  and  prepare  your- 
selves. Do  it  as  speedily  as  you  can,  and  report 
to  me  as  soon  as  you  are  ready.' 

There  was  sullen  objection  from  two  of  the 
native  prisoners,  when  their  clothing  was  taken 
from  them.  Hal  and  Noll,  however,  loaned 
their  blankets  in  exchange. 

"You  know,  Noll,  if  we  don't  succeed  to-night, 
we  shall  have  no  further  use  for  our  blankets, 
anyway,'  Hal  remarked  dryly. 

"I've  thought  of  that,"  Sergeant  Terry 
nodded. 

After  they  had  dyed  their  skin  and  hair  with 
the  juice  of  the  boka  the  two  Army  boys  next 
distributed  a  liberal  amount  of  dirt  on  them- 
selves, then  drew  on  the  borrowed  clothing,  con- 
sisting only  of  shirts  and  short  trousers.  Inside 
their  clothing  each  tucked  a  sharp-edged  creese, 
also  a  loaded  service  revolver. 

"You'll  do,  in  the  dark,"  nodded  Captain 
Freeman,  after  looking  them  over  keenly.  ' '  Of 
course,  you  won't  show  yourselves  in  a  strong 


228  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

light,  anyway.  Now,  you  don't  need  instruc- 
tions. You  understand  your  errand." 

Captain  Freeman  himself  took  the  two  Army 
boys  through  the  darkness  to  the  trench. 

"I  am  turning  these  fellows  loose,  men,"  the 
captain  announced.  "But  don't  allow  any  of 
the  others  to  go  through  the  lines." 

To  the  captain 's  relief,  the  disguises  appeared 
to  "work"  well  in  the  dark,  for  the  men  on  guard 
in  the  trench  merely  saluted. 


CHAPTER  XXII 

PLAYING    GOO-GOO    IN    A    GRIM    GAME 

DOWN  the  slope  the  Army  boys  walked 
boldly  for  a  few  hundred  yards.     The 
night  was  so  dark  that  there  was  small 
possibility  of  being  seen  at  a  distance. 

"Now,  we'd  better  go  a  little  more  cau- 
tiously,' whispered  Hal,  checking  his  com- 
panion by  a  touch  on  the  arm. 

"It's  going  to  rain  within  a  very  few  min- 
utes,' Noll  whispered  in  return,  as  he  looked 
up  at  the  inky  sky  overhead. 

1  i  The  more  rain  the  better.  I  hope  there  will 
be  no  lightning. ' ' 

"Where  are  you  going  to  try  to  slip  through 
the  lines?" 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  229 

"Do  you  remember  the  gully  that  runs  back 
through  the  woods  below,  somewhat  to  our  left 
as  we  stand  now?"  queried  Hal. 

' '  Yes ;    certainly. ' ' 

"That  gully  is  a  trap  such  as  sane  soldiers 
would  hardly  dare  venture  into.  If  they  did, 
and  were  discovered,  the  Moros  could  annihilate 
them  from  above." 

"Surely,"  nodded  Noll. 

"Therefore  I  have  an  idea  that  the  Moros 
haven't  attempted  to  guard  that  gully  in  force, 
though  there  may  be  men  on  either  side  above 
it.  Noll,  if  we  are  careful  not  to  make  a  sound 
I  think  we  can  steal  through  that  gully  without 
getting  caught.7 

"Or  else  we'll  run  into  a  hundred  times  as 
much  trouble  as  we  can  handle,"  replied  Noll 
thoughtfully. 

"It's  worth  taking  a  chance,  isn't  it!" 

"I  think  it's  the  best  single  chance  I  can  see." 

"Come  along,  then,'  whispered  Hal.  "You 
might  keep  just  a  little  behind  me.  I  think  I 
can  find  the  mouth  of  the  gully,  even  in  this 
pitchy  blackness.  If  you  see  me  drop  to  my 
knees,  do  the  same.' 

Hal  started  forward  again.  The  natural-born 
scout,  once  he  has  observed  a  place  in  the  day- 
light, has  some  kind  of  an  instinct  that  guides 
him  to  the  same  spot  in  the  darkness. 


230  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

Sergeant  Hal  had  not  gone  far  when  the  rain 
began  to  descend.  There  were  distant  rumblings 
of  thunder,  but  no  lightning.  For  this  he  was 
thankful.  He  hoped  to  be  behind  the  Moro  lines 
before  lightning  began  to  flash. 

Two  wanderers  in  front  of  the  enemy's  lines 

*/ 

would  be  sure  to  excite  suspicion,  while  two 
seeming  natives  behind  the  lines  would  attract 
little  attention.  ( 

Presently  Sergeant  Overton  dropped  to  his 
knees,  peering  ahead  and  listening  keenly,  as 
he  crept  along.  Sergeant  Terry  imitated  his 
chum.  Hal  crawled  within  fifty  feet  of  the 
mouth  of  the  gully,  just  a  little  south  of  it. 
After  a  moment's  pause  he  obtained  his  bear- 
ings and  extended  one  arm  in  silent  direction  to 
Noll. 

Then  they  crept  noiselessly  into  the  mouth  of 
the  gully.  So  far  they  had  not  been  hailed,  but 
this  was  not  positive  proof  that  human  eyes 
were  not  watching  their  movements. 

Once  inside  the  gully  they  moved,  cautiously, 
still  on  hands  and  knees,  halting  after  every  ad- 
vance of  two  or  three  feet.  They  were  shiver- 
ing in  their  thin  raiment,  for  the  rain  was  heavy 
and  cold.  Noll's  teeth  were  all  but  chattering. 

"I  don't  believe  the  gully  is  guarded  at  all," 
whispered  young  Overton  in  his  friend's  ear. 
"This  place  looks  so  like  a  trap  that  few  mil- 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  231 

itary  commanders  would  ever  think  of  leading 
men  into  it  in  the  dark.  I  figure  that  the  datto 
thought  this  gully  not  worth  guarding  by  night. ' 

"The  slopes  above  us  on  either  side  may  be 
well  guarded,  however, ' '  warned  Noll. 

"Yes;    and  you  can  wager  that  we'll  know 
all  about  that  before  we  try  to  go  back  to  camp, ' 
returned  Hal.    "The  place  to  start  such  an  in- 
vestigation is   from   the   rear  of  the  enemy's 
lines. ' 

"All  right;  lead  on.' 

They  had  gone  another  hundred  feet  into  the 
gully  when  Hal  Overton  stopped  again.  Now 
he  rose  to  his  feet. 

"We'll  walk  through,"  he  whispered.  "I 
don 't  believe  we  will  run  into  any  of  the  datto 's 
men  hereabouts.  If  we  do,  leave  it  to  me  to 
do  the  first  talking.' 

"Jersey  hog-Latin?"  queried  Noll,  with  a 
grin. 

"Of  course;  Spanish  or  English  would  be 
fatal  to  fellows  who  look  the  part  that  we're 
rigged  up  to  play. ' ' 

Hal  walked  on,  steadily,  though  with  caution. 
Noll  kept  a  few  feet  behind  him  until  the  gully 
widened,  then  stepped  to  his  chum's  side. 

Neither  spoke.  There  was  danger  in  unneces- 
sary conversation.  They  had  covered  six  hun- 
dred feet  more  when  they  felt,  rather  than  saw, 


232  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

that  they  were  nearing  the  further  end  of  the 
gully. 

At  last  they  stepped  out  into  the  open — then 
received  a  sudden  shock.  Less  than  a  dozen  feet 
away  a  Moro  sentry,  rifle  on  shoulder,  halted, 
regarding  them  keenly. 

"Manu  batto  dobi  kem,"  murmured  Hal  to  his 
chum,  in  a  low  voice.  Noll  answered  in  the  same 
low  tone.  Both  were  shaking  with  more  than 
the  chill  of  the  rain,  but  Hal  turned  to  the  sentry, 
inquiring  mildly: 

"Hoppo  tuti  sen  antrim  mak!" 

The  Moro  sentry  shook  his  head.  He  did 
not  understand  that  dialect. 

"Basta  morti  hengo  pas  turn,"  murmured  Hal 
regretfully,  hesitating  before  the  sentry. 

"  Manga  tim  no  troka,"  remarked  Noll. 

Hal  turned  slowly,  nodding  at  his  chum.  Then 
both  strolled  along,  the  sentry  merely  staring 
after  them. 

"That's  the  advantage  of  scouting  within  the 
lines  of  an  enemy  where  many  tongues  are 
spoken,'  whispered  Noll  in  his  chum's  ear. 

The  Army  boys  had  not  gone  twenty  feet,  how- 
ever, when  they  ran  into  another  Moro  sentry, 
who  stood  under  a  tree  evidently  trying  to  keep 
out  of  the  rain. 

This  sentry  addressed  them  with  two  or  three 
words  in  the  Moro  tongue. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  233 

"Banda  nokku  him  slengo  mat/    replied  Hal. 

Again  the  sentry  spoke  to  them,  accompany- 
ing his  words  with  a  gesture  that  seemed  to  order 
them  to  pass  on.  The  Army  boys  were  glad 
enough  to  obey. 

"We're  right  in  the  middle  of  the  hornet's 
nest,"  whispered  Noll. 

Fifty  feet  further  on  the  Army  boys  came 
upon  a  rudely  built  shack  under  which  a  number 
of  brown  men  were  huddled  to  escape  the  rain. 

'  *  The  outpost  crowd, ' '  whispered  Hal.  ' '  Noll, 
I  believe  we're  getting  into  the  heart  of  the 
Moros'  camp.' 

Noll  was  about  to  answer,  but  at  that  moment 
discerning  another  sentry,  a  few  yards  ahead, 
checked  his  reply.  This  sentinel  they  managed 
to  pass  without  words.  Being  well  within  the 
enemy's  lines  now,  and  apparently  natives  them- 
selves, the  Army  boys  were  not  as  likely  to  at- 
tract suspicion  to  themselves. 

A  heavier  downpour  of  rain  drove  the  young 
scouts  for  a  moment  under  the  spreading 
branches  of  a  large  tree. 

"This  job  is  almost  as  easy  as  stealing  the 
marmalade  from  mother's  preserve  closet," 
chuckled  Sergeant  Noll,  despite  his  discomfort. 

"This  place  is  like  a  good  many  traps,"  re- 
plied Hal.  "It  seems  easy  enough  to  get  in,  but 
remember,  boy,  we've  got  to  get  out.' 


234  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

As  soon  as  the  rain  slackened  somewhat  the 
two  scouts  sauntered  on  again.  Here  and  there 
they  passed  rude  shacks  in  which  Moros  and 
allied  natives  were  sleeping.  Then  the  young 
eouts  came  upon  a  new  scene  that  made  them 
fairly  catch  their  breath. 

They  were  standing  by  a  mud  wall  now,  a  wall 
of  about  nine  feet  in  height.  There  could  be 
no  doubt  that  this  was  a  Moro  fort,  erected  for 
a  particular  purpose,  and  Hal's  active  mind  im- 
mediately fathomed  that  purpose. 

"The  datto's  own  headquarters!"  he  whis- 
pered in  his  chum's  ear.  'Oh,  Noll,  I  hope  that 
I  am  right ! ' ' 

Terry  nodded.  He  was  as  excited  as  was  his 
comrade. 

The  wall,  as  well  as  the  Army  boys  could 
judge,  was  more  than  two  hundred  feet  long. 
About  half  way  down  they  came  to  a  gate.  Here 
six  Moro  sentries,  armed  with  rifles  and  pro- 
tected from  the  storm  by  woven  rush  raincoats, 
stood  on  guard. 

Hal  boldly  stepped  nearer,  for  the  sentries 
were  already  regarding  this  straying  pair  of 
natives.  Noll,  with  a  quick  catch  in  his  throat, 
stepped  after  his  chum.  It  looked  like  running 
into  almost  certain  death,  for  aside  from  the  six 
sentries  there  were  hundreds  of  Moros  within 
call. 


IN   THE   PHILIPPINES  235 

"Bola  mak  no  benga?"  demanded  Sergeant 
Hal,  with  an  impudence  and  cool  assurance  that 
he  was  far  from  feeling. 

One  of  the  Moro  sentries  looked  at  the  Army 
boys,  grinning  and  shaking  his  head.  Then  lay- 
ing two  fingers  across  his  mouth  as  a  sign  for 
silence,  he  pointed  inside  the  mud-walled  en- 
closure. 

"Him  hasta  putti  datto?"  asked  Hal,  in  a 
low  voice. 

"Datto*  was  the  only  word  the  Moro  could 
make  out,  but  he  understood  that,  and  again 
pointed  inside. 

"Banga  tim  no  satti  du,'  remarked  Hal 
softly  to  his  chum.  Then  Sergeant  Hal  bent 
low,  making  an  elaborate  bow  before  the  gate- 
way. Noll  Terry  "caught  on7  and  followed 
suit.  The  Moro  sentries  grinned.  Nor  did  they 
offer  any  objection  when  the  Army  boys  strolled 
off  into  the  tempest-ridden  darkness. 

"Now,  what?"  whispered  Noll,  as  the  Army 
boys  halted  under  a  tree. 

"Noll,  the  biggest  game  in  the  world,  now — 
to  get  back  out  of  the  trap  into  which  we've 
stepped ! ' ' 


236  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 


" 

" 


CHAPTER  XXIII 

DOOMING    THE    DATTO 

«« "Ik  TOLL,  you  remember  the  first  sentry  in- 
^J       side  the  gully  at  this  end?" 

•      ^          "Yes." 

"Have  you  the  nerve  to  stay  near  him  while 
I  try  to  get  back  to  camp  alone?" 

"I  have  nerve  enough  to  do  anything  that  a 
soldier  may  be  called  upon  to  do." 

"I  was  sure  of  it,"  Hal  replied. 
But  what's  the  game?" 
You  are  to  keep  close  to  that  sentry  until 
just  before  daylight, ' '  continued  Hal.    ' i  Then,  if 
nothing  happens,  slip  out  and  make  your  way 
back  to  camp  as  best  you  can.    But  if  Captain 
Freeman    allows    me    to    lead    the    expedition 
through  that  gully,  you  are  to  be  on  hand  to 
silence  that  sentry  at  the  first  sound  of  our 
coming. ' ' 

"I  think  I  can  do  that,"  Sergeant  Terry  re- 
plied thoughtfully.  "I'll  either  win  out  or  give 
up  my  life  without  a  murmur." 

"Noll,  if  you  prefer  it,  you  can  try  to  reach 
camp,  and  I'll  stay  by  that  first  sentry  inside 
the  gully." 

"No,  Hal;   I  think  you  are  far  more  apt  to 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  237 

succeed  in  reaching  camp  than  I.  I'm  satisfied 
with  the  second  part  in  the  game.  Both  parts 
are  big  enough.' 

"Very  well!  Good-bye,  chum.  Take  care  of 
yourself ! ' ' 

They  had  yet  a  little  distance  to  go  before 
they  came  upon  the  Moro  sentry  beyond  the 
inner  mouth  of  the  gully.  As  they  approached 
him  they  strolled  along  in  leisurely  fashion. 

The  sentry,  who  appeared  to  be  a  good-na- 
tured, rather  stupid  fellow,  surveyed  the  chums 
with  a  grin.  He  pointed  to  the  sky,  then  made 
a  motion  of  shivering.  Clearly  this  native  be- 
lieved the  pretended  brown  men  to  be  foolish 
fellows  for  remaining  out  in  such  a  downpour. 

"Hastu  rnaki  not,' '  observed  Hal. 

"No  beni,'  replied  Noll,  and  Hal  stepped 
away  in  the  darkness.  He  did  not  appear  to  be 
headed  for  the  gully,  but  Noll  distracted  the 
attention  of  the  sentry  for  a  few  moments,  and 
out  of  the  corner  of  his  eye  Terry  caught  a 
glimpse  of  Hal 's  body  moving  into  the  mouth  of 
the  gully. 

A  moment  later  Hal  was  out  of  sight  and 
sound.  Noll  and  the  sentry  stood  side  by  side. 
Presently,  as  neither  could  understand  the 
other's  speech,  Noll  and  the  Moro  fell  to  "con- 
versing" by  means  of  signs.  Yet,  in  this  line, 
they  could  go  little  beyond  the  weather.  Noll 


238  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

presently  made  a  hit  with  the  real  brown  man 
by  shaking  his  fist  in  the  direction  of  the  Ameri- 
can camp,  then  drawing  his  hand  across  his 
throat  with  an  eloquent  gesture  of  throat-cut- 
ting. 

Sergeant  Hal  Overton  not  only  got  out  of  the 
gully,  but  also  satisfied  himself  that  the  slopes 
were  not  guarded. 

"As  the  gully  looks  like  a  natural  trap,  and 
the  datto  has  at  least  four  hundred  men  between 
himself  and  the  gully,  I  suppose  old  Hakkut  is 
not  worrying  a  great  deal, '  reflected  Overton. 

Hal  did  not  now  trouble  himself  to  move  so 
stealthily,  until  he  neared  the  American  en- 
campment. With  noiseless  step  he  approached 
and  called  out  in  the  darkness: 

"Officer  of  the  day!" 

"Halt!  Who  goes  there?"  called  an  alert 
soldier. 

"Sergeant  Overton,  in  scout  disguise,'  Hal 
returned.  "I  wish  to  return  to  camp.' 

"Advance,  Sergeant  Overton,  to  be  recog- 
nized." 

Thus  assured  that  he  would  not  be  shot  down 
by  mistake,  Hal  walked  slowly  but  openly  in 
the  direction  of  the  voice  from  the  trench. 

"If  you  can  recognize  me,  Galbraith,  you're  a 
wonder,"  laughed  Hal,  as  he  came  within  the 
soldier's  range  of  vision. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  239 

' i  You,  Sergeant  Overton.  Great  Scott,  I  don't 
recognize  anything  but  the  voice.  I  know  that, 
however;  pass  on,  Sergeant.7 

Hal  went  at  once  to  Captain  Freeman,  whom, 
however,  he  had  to  awaken.  Lieutenants  Pres- 
cott  and  Holmes  were  quickly  added  to  the 
lightning  conference  that  followed. 

The  officers  listened  almost  in  amazement  to 
the  yarn  that  Sergeant  Overton  rapidly  spun  for 
them. 

"We  made  no  mistake  in  detailing  you  two 
sergeants  to  investigate  the  position  of  the 
enemy,7  remarked  Captain  Freeman  warmly. 
"Now  our  course  is  clear.  You  understand  my 
plan,  gentlemen?' 

The  two  young  lieutenants  quickly  assented. 

"We  shall  have  to  abandon  our  transport 
wagons,  though  I  think  we  shall  have  no  diffi- 
culty in  recovering  them  later,'  went  on  the 
commanding  officer.  "Waken  all  the  men,  and 
have  each  man  carrv  as  much  ammunition  as 

«/ 

he  can  pack.    The  Gatling  gun  goes  with  us,  of 


course. ' ' 


"And  the  wounded  men,  sir!'  asked  Lieu- 
tenant Prescott. 

"Those  still  unable  to  walk  will  have  to  be 
carried  on  the  same  blanket  stretchers.  Cau- 
tion these  wounded  men  that,  no  matter  what 
discomfort  they  may  suffer  on  the  trip,  not  one 


240  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

is  to  make  a  sound.  Our  lives  are  at  stake. 
Now  hustle,  gentlemen!  We  must  march  from 
this  position  in  less  than  twenty  minutes. " 

"And  the  prisoners,  sir?"  asked  Lieutenant 
Greg  Holmes. 

"Bind  the  prisoners  and  gag  them,  and  do  it 
effectively.  We  can't  trust  a  prisoner  on  a 
dash  like  this.  Leave  them  behind,  but  be  sure 
that  they  can't  effect  their  own  escape.  Gen- 
tlemen, I  look  to  your  effective  aid  in  playing  a 
most  brilliant  trick  on  the  enemy.' 

Twelve  minutes  later  the  column  started. 
They  moved  in  three  bodies.  In  advance  were 
twelve  picked  men  of  B  Company,  under  Ser- 
geant Overtoil.  Captain  Freeman  accompanied 
this  little  advance  guard. 

At  a  suitable  interval  behind  marched  fifty 
men  under  Lieutenant  Prescott. 

Last  of  all  Lieutenant  Holmes  headed  the  re- 
mainder of  the  expedition.  With  this  rear 
guard  marched  such  of  the  wounded  men  as 
were  able  to  walk.  The  others  of  the  wounded 
were  carried  on  blanket  stretchers. 

Silently,  like  a  procession  of  ghosts,  moved 
the  American  troops.  The  rain  had  moderated 
to  a  drizzle,  but  there  was  no  star  in  sight  to 
throw  the  least  ray  of  light  over  the  tropical 
scene. 

Almost  as  straight  as  a  bullet  could  have  been 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  241 

fired  Sergeant  Hal  led  the  advance  guard  to  the 
-mouth  of  the  gully.  There  was  no  challenge, 
no  shot  fired  by  the  enemy.  A  minute's  halt; 
then  the  advance  guard  quickly  followed  Ser- 
geant Overton  into  the  gully,  Captain  Freeman 
stepping  just  behind  the  leader. 

When  they  were  two  thirds  of  the  way 
through,  Sergeant  Hal,  who  was  still  in  his 
native  costume,  held  up  his  hand  as  a  signal 
to  halt.  The  signal  was  passed  back  through 
the  advance. 

"I  think  you'd  better  wait  here  a  few  min- 
utes, sir/  whispered  Hal  to  the  commanding 
officer.  "I'll  hand  my  rifle  to  one  of  the  men 
and  then  stroll  forward  to  see  if  the  coast  is 
clear. ' 

"A  good  plan,  Sergeant;  but  take  mighty 
good  care  of  yourself!'  , 

"Yes,  sir.  If  you  hear  sounds  of  trouble  up 
ahead  then  I  suppose  you'll  push  right  on 
through. ' 

"If  there's  any  sound  of  trouble,  whatever, 
Sergeant,  you  can  depend  upon  our  rushing 
through. ' 

Saluting,  Overton  turned  and  slowly  vanished 
into  the  darkness  ahead.  Just  as  he  came  out 
of  the  gully  Hal  heard  a  cautious,  warning: 

"Sh-sh!" 

The  muzzle  of  a  rifle  was  thrust  to  his  breast. 

16  4  Uncle  Sam's  Boys. 


242  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"Noll?"  whispered  Hal. 

"Yes,'    whispered  Terry. 

"Where's  the  real  sentry  at  this  point?" 
breathed  Hal. 

' '  The  poor  fellow  was  chilled  through.  I  got 
chummy  with  him,  talking  sign  language,  and 
then  volunteered  to  stand  duty  for  him.  The 
Moro  has  gone  off  to  take  a  sleep  where  it's 
drier. ' 

"Bully,  old  Noll!" 

"The  troops  are  behind  you,  Hal?" 

"Yes." 

"Then  march  them  ahead  straight  on  for  a 
hundred  yards  due  west.  You  won't  run  into 
any  of  the  enemy  there.  I've  made  it  my  busi- 
ness to  know." 

Hal  flew  back  to  the  advance  guard. 

"Fine!"  glowed  Captain  Freeman,  when  he 
had  heard  the  report. 

The  advance  was  quickly  in  motion.  Captain 
Freeman  was  soon  up  with  Noll,  who,  after 
whispering,  led  the  advance  to  the  point  he  had 
mentioned  to  his  chum.  Hal,  in  the  meantime, 
remained  to  receive  and  pilot  Lieutenant  Pres- 
cott's  command. 

"How  on  earth  did  you  do  this?"  demanded 
Prescott  in  a  whisper. 

"Some  of  Sergeant  Terry's  work,  sir,"  whis- 
pered Hal.  "When  you're  ready,  sir,  just  keep 


IN    THE   PHILIPPINES  243 

on  straight  ahead  until  you  come  upon  the  ad- 
vance. I'll  remain  here,  sir,  if  you  permit,  to 
warn  the  men  behind  you  that  they're  march- 
ing inside  the  Moros'  lines," 

"Do  so,  Sergeant,"  directed  Lieutenant  Pres- 
cott,  at  the  same  time  making  the  motion  for 
Ms  men  to  move  ahead.  On  came  the  rest  of  the 
command  in  single  file. 

"Softly,"  warned  Hal,  as  the  men  passed  by 
Mm.  "You're  inside  the  enemy's  lines." 

Then,  as  the  last  man  passed  him,  Hal  whis- 
pered : 

' i  Fall  out,  Gleason.  Remain  here  to  warn  the 
rear  guard  when  it  arrives. ' ' 

"All  right,  Sergeant.  But  this  kind  of  work 
in  the  dark  makes  one  creepy.  I  feel  as  though 
I  were  robbing  a  judge's  chicken-roost.' 

Hal  laughed  softly  and  hurried  after  the  van- 
ishing troops.  Within  a  few  minutes  more  the 
rear  guard  had  arrived. 

By  this  time  the  rain  had  begun  to  come  down 
again  in  torrents,  but  this  favored  the  work  of 
the  American  troops. 

Led  by  the  two  young  scouts,  the  entire  com- 
mand managed  to  advance,  undetected,  to  a 
point  from  which  Captain  Freeman  could  dimly 
make  out  the  mud  walls  of  the  datto's  fort. 

"Take  the  same  twelve  men  of  the  advance 
guard,  Sergeant  Overton,'  whispered  Captain 


244  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

Freeman,  after  he  had  given  directions  regard- 
ing the  carrying  of  the  wounded  so  that  they 
would  be  as  well  protected  as  possible  from 
slashing  by  Moro  swords  or  creeses  during  the 
attack  about  to  be  made.  ' i  With  your  men,  Ser- 
geant, gain  the  gate  of  the  fort.  Eemember,  at 
no  matter  what  cost,  you  must  get  your  party 
inside  and  hold  the  gate.  We'll  be  on  the  spot 
the  moment  we  hear  the  first  sound  of  your  at- 
tack. '  ' 

"Now,  then,  men,"  Hal  instructed  his  own 
detachment,  "we  won't  march  forward,  and  we 
won't  skulk,  either.  We'll  simply  stroll  along. 
The  instant  that  I  hear  any  sound  showing  that 
we're  discovered,  I'll  give  the  order  to  charge. 
When  that  order  comes — remember  that  we 
simply  must  fight  our  way  through  the  gate  of 
the  fort." 

Then  he  gave  the  order  for  the  forward  move- 
ment. Hal  placed  himself  at  the  head  of  his 
detachment,  the  post  of  greatest  danger. 

It  was  raining  so  heavily  that  even  the  guards 
at  the  datto's  gate  had  relaxed  their  vigilance. 

So  Sergeant  Hal  Overton  was  within  thirty 
feet  of  the  gate  when  one  of  the  six  sentries, 
peering  outside,  caught  sight  of  him,  yelled  and 
held  his  rifle  at  aim. 

"Detachment  charge!'  yelled  Sergeant  Hal 
Overton. 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  245 

With  a  low-uttered  yet  enthusiastic  yell  the 
twelve  regulars  piled  in  after  their  sergeant. 

There  was  short,  sharp  firing  at  the  gate. 
Then  the  Americans  drove  that  guard  in,  killing 
four  of  them  and  holding  the  gate. 

Now  there  was  wild  yelling  inside  the  fort. 
Lights  flashed  from  the  principal  building  in 
the  enclosure.  Sergeant  Hal  waited  only  long 
enough  to  realize  that  Lieutenant  Prescott's 
command  had  come  up  when  he  shouted  to  his 
own  men: 

"Follow  me  to  the  datto 's  house!  He's  the 
fellow  we  want." 

Fifty   natives    howling   wildly   had    thrown 

»  themselves  around  the  house  of  the  Datto  Hak- 
kut  and  had  opened  fire  on  the  soldiers  by  the 
time  that  Hal  and  his  few  men  reached  the  spot. 

"Fight  your  way  through  'em,  men!'  com- 
manded Hal. 

"Bring  your  men  back,  Sergeant!'  shouted 
Captain  Freeman  in  Hal's  ear.  "We've  got  the 
Gatling  ready.  I'll  show  you  something  bet- 
ter. ' ' 

Swiftly  the  regulars  dodged  back.  Sergeant 
Noll  was  at  the  breech  of  the  Gatling. 

E-r-r-r-rip!  rattled  out  that  rapid-fire  ma- 
chine, and  the  fire  swept  mercilessly  into  the 
ranks  of  those  who  defended  the  datto. 

Lieutenant  Holmes  had  gotten  the  wounded 


246  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

inside  the  walls.  Now,  with  his  efficient  men  he 
had  turned  to  guard  the  gate,  for  outside,  hun- 
dreds of  frantically-yelling  Moro  fanatics  had 
gathered  for  the  attack  on  the  invaders. 

Into  the  closely  packed  ranks  of  the  brown 
men  who  sought  to  defend  the  datto  's  house  the 
Gatling  poured  its  raking  fire  with  fearful  effect. 

Whatever  the  issue  of  this  madly  fought  hat- 
tie,  it  began  to  look  as  though  the  Datto  Hak- 
kut  were  doomed. 


CHAPTER  XXIV 

CONCLUSION 

«  T  "1"  AVE  your  men  fix  their  bayonets,  Lieu- 

I  I  tenant  Prescott!"  commanded  Cap- 
tain Freeman.  "Fall  in,  men!  We'll 
take  the  datto  on  the  rush!" 

As  the  Moros,  reinforced  by  two  score  more 
who  had  rushed  to  the  aid  of  their  leader,  drew 
up  for  a  last  desperate  stand  before  the  house, 
the  door  opened. 

A  stream  of  light  from  inside  illuminated  the 
scene. 

Out  bounded  a  man  past  middle  age  and  of 
imposing  appearance.  Not  even  his  rich  cos- 
tume and  flashing  jewels  were  needed  to  pro- 
claim that  this  man  was  the  datto  himself. 


IN   THE    PHILIPPINES  247 

Behind  Hakkut  came  another  and  younger 
man,  the  datto 's  sword-bearer. 

Hakkut  was  carrying  his  own  heavy,  straight- 
edged  sword.  For  a  moment  or  two  he  stood 
blinking  upon  the  scene  of  carnage  and  death 
below  him  as  he  halted  on  his  porch.  Then  his 
gaze  swept  to  the  regulars  behind  the  machine 
gun,  standing  alert  with  bayonets  fixed,  ready 
for  that  solitary  word  "charge!" 

Instantly  the  datto  turned  and  shouted  some- 
thing to  the  younger  man  with  him. 

In  another  moment  the  datto  had  placed  the 
hilt  of  his  sword  against  the  flooring  of  the 
porch,  the  point  of  the  weapon  up.  The  younger 
man  knelt  swiftly,  holding  the  sword  in  this 
position.  Drawing  back,  the  Datto  Hakkut 
hurled  himself  forward  with  great  force,  fall- 
ing upon  the  point.  Then  he  tottered  sideways, 
tumbling  to  the  floor  of  the  porch.  The  younger 
man  without  hesitation  drove  a  needle-pointed 
creese  three  times  into  his  ruler 's  breast.  With- 
drawing the  knife,  the  sword-bearer  then  killed 
himself. 

"Charge,  Lieutenant  PrescottP  called  Cap- 
tain Freeman. 

"Charge!"  repeated  the  lieutenant.  The  line 
of  bayonets  swept  forward,  but  news  of  the  death 
of  the  datto  had  already  reached  his  would-be 
defenders.  The  regulars  swept  through,  meet- 


248  UNCLE    SAM'S    BOYS 

ing  little  resistance,  for  hope  had  left  the  Moros 
with  the  passing  of  their  savage  prince. 

In  a  twinkling  the  datto's  house  was  in  the 
hands  of  the  regulars.  Now  a  corporal's  guard 
could  have  held  it,  for  the  Moros  inside  the  fort 
who  were  still  capable  of  fighting  were  throwing 
down  their  weapons  in  despair. 

"Bound  the  prisoners  up,  Lieutenant  Pres- 
cott, ' '  commanded  Captain  Freeman.  ' '  I  '11  take 
some  of  your  men  and  the  Galling  to  the  gate  to 
help  Lieutenant  Holmes." 

In  truth  the  Gatling  was  now  sadly  needed  at 
the  gate,  for  Lieutenant  Holmes  was  having  the 
fight  of  his  life.  Swarms  of  fanatic  Moros  were 
attempting  to  rush  the  small  party  of  regulars. 

The  Gatling,  placed  in  a  position  commanding 
the  gate  and  sweeping  all  in  front  of  it,  soon 
checked  the  desperate  attack  at  this  point.  The 
Moros  could  yet  swarm  the  walls  on  all  sides, 
however.  The  fight  was  far  from  won. 

There  was  a  chance  still  to  close  the  huge 
wooden  gate,  and  this  Captain.  Freeman,  with 
a  few  of  his  men;  succeeded  in  doing  just  as  the 
Gatling  was  withdrawn. 

Suddenly  it  occurred  to  Captain  Freeman  that 
the  night  was  passing  and  that  the  first  dull  light 
of  day  was  creeping  over  the  scene. 

At  the  commanding  officer's  side  Sergeant  Hal 
Overton  reported,  saluting  and  saying: 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  249 

' '  Sir,  I  have  a  suggestion  to  offer. ' ' 

' l  State  it,  Sergeant, ' ' 

"It  seems  like  an  almost  dastardly  thing  to 
uo,  sir,  but  the  death  of  the  datto  stopped  the 
fighting  inside.  Wouldn  't  it  be  a  good  plan,  sir, 
since  the  datto  is  assuredly  dead,  to  have  his 
body  placed  upon  the  top  of  the  wall  and  hurled 
over  to  the  Moros  outside?  When  they  behold 
that  sight  they  may  feel  that  their  cause  is 
gone. ' ' 

"That  is  the  best  suggestion  that  could  be 
made.  You  attend  to  it,  Sergeant.' 

"Very  good,  sir.' 

Lieutenant  Prescott  paused  for  a  moment  in 
the  shelter  of  the  datto 's  porch.  It  had  been 
warm  work,  and  the  young  West  Pointer  was 
mopping  his  face  with  his  handkerchief. 

At  this  juncture  Hal  appeared  with  four  men. 

"Pardon  me,  sir,"  he  said,  saluting  the  lieu- 
tenant, "I  am  acting  by  Captain  Freeman's 
orders/ 

With  that  the  young  sergeant  pointed  to  the 
datto 's  body.  The  four  men  lifted  it,  carrying  it 
from  the  porch.  Prescott  asked  no  question,  but 
watched  with  interest  what  followed. 

Across  the  yard  Hal's  squad  bore  the  datto 's 
body,  to  a  point  of  the  walls  where  the  regulars 
were  making  their  fiercest  fight  to  repulse  the 
Moros  outside. 


250  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

"Two  of  you  climb  up  on  the  wall/'  Hal  or- 
dered. "The  other  two  pass  the  body  up." 

This  was  done. 

"Over  with  it,"  Sergeant  Hal  commanded, 
and  the  body  was  hurled  to  the  ground  outside. 

An  instant  later  there  was  a  shout  that  was 
soon  changed  to  a  wail.  In  the  growing  daylight 
several  of  the  Moro  fighters  had  recognized  the 
grisly  message  that  had  been  hurled  to  them. 
Half  a  dozen  fighting  men  dropped  their 
weapons,  picked  up  the  datto  's  body  and  hurried 
off  with  it  to  a  grove  beyond. 

Within  two  minutes  the  fighting  had  stopped. 
The  Moros  had  fled  to  the  grove,  from  which 
a  loud,  nerve-racking  wailing  now  ascended. 

Captain  Freeman  climbed  to  the  top  of  the 
wall. 

"We  could  wipe  them  out  by  the  hundreds 
with  the  Gatling  now,"  he  remarked  grimly. 
"However,  I  fancy  it  won't  be  necessary.' 

In  half  an  hour  the  wailing  of  the  Moros  had 
ceased.  They  had  gone  farther  away,  and  the 
regulars  were  content  to  remain  behind  the 
walls.  While  half  of  the  effective  troops  were 
left  on  the  walls,  the  other  half  prepared  and  ate 
their  breakfast  from  the  abundant  food  supplies 
found  in  the  fort.  After  that  the  other  half 
breakfasted. 

That  forenoon  Lieutenant  Holmes  was  sent 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  251 

out  with  a  scouting  force  of  thirty  men.  Two 
hours  later  he  returned,  stating  that  he  had  been 
unable  to  find  any  signs  of  the  enemy. 

In  the  afternoon  Lieutenant  Prescott  and 
thirty  men  marched  back  to  camp.  There  they 
found  the  transport  wagons  and  horses  unin- 
jured, and  returned  with  them  to  the  fort  after 
having  set  the  half  dozen  native  prisoners  free. 

"I  fancy  the  cruel  war  is  over,  gentlemen,7 
remarked  Captain  Freeman  that  evening  to  his 
two  younger  officers.  "  These  Moros,  like  other 
semi-savages,  fight  with  heart  only  when  they 
have  a  great  leader.  In  this  way,  the  Datto 
Hakkut  was  a  great  man.  For  ten  years  he  has 
been  the  scourge  of  northern  Mindanao,  but  now 
we  shall  have  a  rest  from  him.  He  will  never 
again  disturb  the  peace  of  the  island. ' 

Early  the  following  morning  Lieutenant  Pres- 
cott was  sent  out  at  the  head  of  forty  men,  Hal 
and  Noll  accompanying  him.  Unless  attacked 
by  superior  force  this  detachment  was  to  remain 
out  all  day,  scouting  through  the  country  for 
signs  of  the  enemy. 

In  the  morning  two  native  villages  were  found 
close  to  the  principal  road  through  the  moun- 
tains. As  the  natives  appeared  to  have  no 
weapons,  and  offered  no  trouble,  they  were  not 
molested. 

"You  may  be  sure,  though,  Sergeant  Over- 


252  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

ton, ' '  remarked  Lieutenant  Prescott,  ' '  that  very 
nearly  all  of  the  men  we  have  seen  so  far  to-day 
served  lately  under  the  datto.  However,  if  they 
have  learned  a  lesson,  and  are  now  bent  on  peace, 
we  won't  molest  them." 

In  the  afternoon,  as  the  detachment,  moving  at 
route  step,  reached  the  crest  of  a  hill  those  in 
advance  came  upon  a  party  of  Moros  camped 
in  a  grove  by  the  road.  These  men,  perhaps  fifty 
in  number,  were  preparing  a  meal.  They  dis- 
played no  weapons. 

' '  These  men  were  undoubtedly  recent  fighters, 
too,'  remarked  Lieutenant  Prescott.  "How- 
ever, we'll  look  them  over  to  make  sure  that  they 
have  no  weapons  now." 

Hardly  had  the  two  sergeants  started  on  their 
tour  of  inspection  when  one  man  leaped  sud- 
denly from  his  seat  on  the  ground  and  made  off 
on  a  run. 

"There's  the  man  we  want!"  yelled  Hal. 
"Vicente  Tomba,  I  call  upon  you  to  halt  and 
surrender ! ' ' 

But  Tomba,  for  it  was  he,  continued  to  run 
fleetly. 

"Bring  that  man  down,  if  he  won't  stop!" 
commanded  Lieutenant  Prescott  sternly. 

"Halt,  Tomba,  or  we  fire!"  shouted  Hal. 
1 '  Ready,  men !  Aim !  fire ! ' ' 

Seven  rifles  spoke,  almost  in  unison.    Vicente 


IN    THE    PHILIPPINES  253 

» 

Tomba  pitched  forward,  then  fell.  When  ex- 
amined he  was  found  to  have  received  four 
bullet  wounds.  As  he  was  dead,  the  soldiers 
buried  him  then  and  there. 

"Men  who  are  found  in  Tomba 's  company  are 
subjects  for  suspicion,"  remarked  Lieutenant 
Prescott  dryly.  " Though  we've  found  no 
weapons  with  this  crowd  we'll  round  'em  up 
and  take  'em  in." 

This  was  done.  Captain  Freeman  decided  to 
read  these  natives  a  lesson  and  then  let  them  go. 

Why  not  make  the  rascals  most  humbly  salute 
the  Flag,  sir?"  suggested  Sergeant  Overt  on  re- 
spectfully. ' '  I  still  have  the  Flag  that  the  Moros 
insulted. ' ' 

"A  good  idea,'  nodded  the  commanding  of- 
ficer. "Get  the  Flag,  Sergeant." 

Over  the  late  datto  's  fort  the  Stars  and  Stripes 
soon  fluttered.  The  troops  were  paraded  to  do 
the  emblem  honor.  Then  the  Moro  prisoners 
were  forced  to  pay  it  humble  reverence,  after 
which  they  were  allowed,  on  their  hands  and 
knees,  to  crawl  out  of  the  fort  and  find  their 
liberty  outside. 

"I'm  sorry  the  datto  didn't  live  a  little 
longer,'  murmured  Sergeant  Hal  to  his  chum. 
"I'd  have  enjoyed  seeing  him  salute  the  Flag 
fifty  times  and  then  crawl  away  on  his  knees.' 

The    following    morning    Captain    Freeman 


254  UNCLE    SAM'S   BOYS 

marched  his  column  back  over  the  many  miles 
that  lay  between  them  and  Bantoc.  On  a  later 
morning  of  the  march  the  dusty  column  passed 
Draney's  plantation.  That  adventurer  boldly 
hailed  the  officers  as  the  troops  marched  by. 

"I  hear  you've  killed  the  datto,"  was  the 
planter's  greeting. 

"Yes,'  responded  Captain  Freeman  dryly. 
"There  are  a  few  others,  though,  who  deserve 
the  same  fate.' 

"We'll  mix  it  up  with  that  scoundrel  yet,' 
muttered  Hal  to  his  chum. 

Back  in  Bantoc  all  was  quiet  again.  Cerverra 
had  been  released  with  a  reprimand  that  he  was 
not  likely  to  forget.  Now  that  the  datto  was 
gone,  the  spirit  was  lacking  for  insurrection,  and 
that  part  of  Mindanao  settled  down  to  quiet. 

For  how  long!  Undoubtedly  the  reader  will 
discover  in  the  next  volume  of  this  series — a 
volume  that  will  be  filled  with  the  lively  doings 
of  our  Army  in  the  Philippines.  This  great 
tale  will  be  published  under  the  title,  "UNCLE 
SAM'S  BOYS  ON  THEIR  METTLE;  Or,  A  Chance 
to  Win  Officers'  Commissions."  In  this  forth- 
coming narrative  the  reader  will  meet  several 
old  friends  and  will  renew  their  acquaintance  in 
the  most  startling  situations. 

THE  END 


HENRY    ALTEMUS    COMPANY'S 

CATALOGUE  OF 

The  Best  and  Least  Expensive 

Books  for  Real  Boys 

and  Girls 


Really  good  and  new  stories  for  boys  and  girls  are  not 
plentiful.  Many  stories,  too,  are  so  highly  improbable  as 
to  bring  a  grin  of  derision  to  the  young  reader's  face  be- 
fore he  has  gone  far.  The  name  of  ALTEMUS  is  a  dis- 
tinctive brand  on  the  cover  of  a  book,  always  ensuring 
the  buyer  of  having  a  book  that  is  up-to-date  and  fine 
throughout.  No  buyer  of  an  ALTEMUS  book  is  ever 
disappointed. 

Many  are  the  claims  made  as  to  the  inexpensiveness 
of  books.  Go  into  any  bookstore  and  ask  for  an  Altemus 
book.  Compare  the  price  charged  you  for  Altemus 
books  with  the  price  demanded  for  other  juvenile  books. 
You  will  at  once  discover  that  a  given  outlay  of  money 
will  buy  more  of  the  ALTEMUS  books  than  of  those 
published  by  other  houses. 

Every  dealer  in  books  carries  the  ALTEMUS  books. 


Sold     by     all     booksellers    or    sent     postpaid     on     receipt     of     price 

Henry    Altemus    Company 

1326-1336     Vine      Street,      Philadelphia 


The   Motor    Boat    Club    Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

The  keynote  of  these  books  is  manliness.  The  stories  are  wonder  - 
fully  entertaining,  and  they  are  at  the  same  time  sound  and  whole- 
some. No  boy  will  willingly  lay  down  an  unfinished  book  in  this 
series. 

1  THE  MOTOR  BOAT  CLUB  OF  THE  KENNEBEC;    Or,  The 

Secret  of  Smugglers'  Island. 

2  THE  MOTOR  BOAT  CLUB  AT  NANTUCKET ;  Or,  The  Mys- 

tery of  the  Dunstan  Heir. 

3  THE  MOTOR  BOAT  CLUB  OFF  LONG  ISLAND ;    Or,  A  Dar- 

ing Marine  Game  at  Racing  Speed. 

4  THE  MOTOR  BOAT  CLUB  AND  THE  WIRELESS;    Or,  The 

Dot,  Dash  and  Dare  Cruise. 

$     THE   MOTOR   BOAT   CLUB    IN   FLORIDA;    Or,   Laying  the 
Ghost  of  Alligator  Swamp. 

6  THE  MOTOR  BOAT  CLUB  AT  THE  GOLDEN  GATE;    Or,  A 

Thrilling  Capture  in  the  Great  Fog. 

7  THE  MOTOR  BOAT  CLUB  ON  THE  GREAT  LAKES;    Or, 

The  Flying  Dutchman  of  the  Big  Fresh  Water. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  500. 


The  Range  and  Grange  Hustlers 

By  FRANK  GEE  PATCHIN 

Have  you  any  idea  of  the  excitements,  the  glories  of  life  on  great 
ranches  in  the  West?  Any  bright  boy  will  "devour"  the  books  of 
this  series,  once  he  has  made  a  start  with  the  first  volume. 

t  THE  RANGE  AND  GRANGE  HUSTLERS  ON  THE  RANCH ; 
Or,  The  Boy  Shepherds  of  the  Great  Divide. 

s  THE  RANGE  AND  GRANGE  HUSTLERS'  GREATEST 
ROUND-UP;  Or,  Pitting  Their  Wits  Against  a  Packers' 
Combine. 

3  THE  RANGE  AND  GRANGE  HUSTLERS  ON  THE  PLAINS; 

Or,  Following  the  Steam  Plows  Across  the  Prairie. 

4  THE  RANGE  AND  GRANGE  HUSTLERS  AT  CHICAGO; 

Or,  The  Conspiracy  of  the  Wheat  Pit. 

Goth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  500. 


Submarine    Boys    Series 

By  VICTOR  G.  DURHAM 

1  THE   SUBMARINE   BOYS   ON  DUTY;   Or,   Life  on  a  Diving  Torpedo 

Boat. 

2  THE    SUBMARINE    BOYS'     TRIAL    TRIP;    Or,     "Making    Good"    as 

Young  Experts. 

3  THE  SUBMARINE  BOYS  AND  THE  MIDDIES;  Or,  The  Prize  Detail 

at  Annapolis. 

4  THE  SUBMARINE  BOYS  AND  THE  SPIES;  Or,  Dodging  the  Sharks 

of  the  Deep. 

5  THE    SUBMARINE    BOYS'    LIGHTNING    CRUISE;     Or,    The    Young 

Kings  of  the  Deep. 

6  THE  SUBMARINE  BOYS  FOR  THE  FLAG;  Or,  Deeding  Their  Lives 

to  Uncle  Sam. 

7  THE  SUBMARINE  BOYS  AND  THE  SMUGGLERS;  Or,  Breaking  Up 

the  New  Jersey  Customs  Frauds. 


The  Square  Dollar  Boys  Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

1  THE  SQUARE  DOLLAR  BOYS  WAKE  UP;  Or,  Fighting  the  Trolley 

Franchise  Steal. 

2  THE  SQUARE  DOLLAR  BOYS  SMASH  THE  RING;   Or,  In  the  Lists 

Against  the  Crooked  Land  Deal. 


The   College   Girls   Series 

By  JESSIE  GRAHAM  FLOWER,  A.M. 

1  GRACE  HARLOWE'S  FIRST  YEAR  AT  OVERTON  COLLEGE. 

2  GRACE  HARLOWE'S  SECOND  YEAR  AT  OVERTON  COLLEGE. 

3  GRACE  HARLOWE'S  THIRD  YEAR  AT  OVERTON  COLLEGE. 

4  GRACE  HARLOWE'S  FOURTH  YEAR  AT  OVERTON  COLLEGE. 

5  GRACE  HARLOWE'S  RETURN  TO  OVERTON  CAMPUS. 


Dave    Darrin    Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

1    DAVE    DARRIN    AT    VERA    CRUZ;     Or,    Fighting    With    the    U. 
Navy  in  Mexico. 

All  these  books  are  bound  in  Cloth  and  will  be  sent  post- 
paid on  receipt  of  only  50  cents  each. 


Pony    Rider    Boys   Series 

By  FRANK  GEE  PATCHIN 

These  tales  may  be  aptly  described  the  best  books  for  boys  and  girls. 

1  THE  PONY  RIDER  BOYS  IN  THE  ROCKIES;  Or,  The  Secret  of  the 
Lost  Claim.— 2  THE  PONY  RIDER  BOYS  IN  TEXAS;  Or,  The 
Veiled  Riddle  of  the  Plains.— 3  THE  PONY  RIDER  BOYS  IN 
MONTANA;  Or,  The  Mystery  of  the  Old  Custer  Trail.— 4  THE 
PONY  RIDER  BOYS  IN  THE  OZARKS;  Or,  The  Secret  of  Ruby 
Mountain.— 5  THE  PONY  RIDER  BOYS  IN  THE  ALKALI;  Or, 
Finding  a  Key  to  the  Desert  Maze.— 6  THE  PONY  RIDER  BOYS 
IN  NEW  MEXICO;  Or,  The  End  of  the  Silver  Trail.— 7  THE  PONY 
RIDER  BOYS  IN  THE  GRAND  CANYON;  Or,  The  Mystery  of 
Bright  Angel  Gulch. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  50c. 


The  Boys  of  Steel  Series 

By  JAMES  R.  MEARS 

Each  book  presents  vivid  picture  of  this  great  industry.    Each  story 
is  full  of  adventure  and  fascination. 

1  THE  IRON  BOYS  IN  THE  MINES;  Or,  Starting  at  the  Bottom  of 
the  Shaft.— 2  THE  IRON  BOYS  AS  FOREMEN;  Or,  Heading  the 
Diamond  Drill  Shift.— 3  THE  IRON  BOYS  ON  THE  ORE  BOATS; 
Or,  Roughing  It  on  the  Great  Lakes.— 4  THE  IRON  BOYS  IN  THE 
STEEL  MILLS;  Or,  Beginning  Anew  in  the  Cinder  Pits. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  50c. 


The  Madge  Morton  Books 

By  AMY  D.  V.  CHALMERS 

1  MADGE  MORTON— CAPTAIN  OF  THE  MERRY  MAID. 

2  MADGE  MORTON'S  SECRET. 

3  MADGE  MORTON'S  TRUST. 

4  MADGE  MORTON'S  VICTORY. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  50c, 


West     Point     Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

The    principal    characters    in    these    narratives    are    manly,    young 
Americans  whose  doings  will  inspire  all  boy  readers. 

1  DICK   PRESCOTT'S    FIRST   YEAR   AT   WEST    POINT;     Or, 

Two  Chums  in  the  Cadet  Gray. 

2  DICK  PRESCOTT'S  SECOND  YEAR  AT  WEST  POINT ;    Or. 

Finding  the  Glory  of  the  Soldier's  Life. 

3  DICK  PRESCOTT'S  THIRD  YEAR  AT  WEST   POINT;    Or, 

Standing  Firm  for  Flag  and  Honor. 

4  DICK  PRESCOTT'S  FOURTH  YEAR  AT  WEST  POINT;    Or> 

Ready  to  Drop  the  Gray  for  Shoulder  Straps. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  500. 


Annapolis      Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

The  Spirit  of  the  new  Navy  is  delightfully  and  truthfully  depicted 
in  these  volumes. 

1  DAVE  DARRIN'S  FIRST  YEAR  AT  ANNAPOLIS;    Or,  Two 

Plebe  Midshipmen  at  the  U.  S.  Naval  Academy. 

2  DAVE    DARRIN'S    SECOND    YEAR    AT    ANNAPOLIS;     Orr 

Two  Midshipmen  as  Naval  Academy  "Youngsters." 

3  DAVE  DARRIN'S  THIRD  YEAR  AT  ANNAPOLIS  ;    Or,  Lead- 

ers of  the  Second  Class  Midshipmen. 

4  DAVE  DARRIN'S  FOURTH  YEAR  AT  ANNAPOLIS;  Or, 

Headed  for  Graduation  and  the  Big  Cruise. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  500. 


The  Young  Engineers  Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

The  heroes  of  these  stories  are  known  to  readers  of  the  High 
School  Boys  Series.  In  this  new  series  Tom  Reade  and  Harry 
Hazelton  prove  worthy  of  all  the  traditions  of  Dick  &  Co. 

1  THE  YOUNG  ENGINEERS  IN  COLORADO;    Or,  At  Railroad 

Building  in  Earnest. 

2  THE  YOUNG  ENGINEERS  IN  ARIZONA ;    Or,  Laying  Tracks 

on  the  "Man-Killer"  Quicksand. 

3  THE  YOUNG  ENGINEERS   IN   NEVADA;    Or,   Seeking  For- 

tune on  the  Turn  of  a  Pick. 

4  THE   YOUNG   ENGINEERS   IN    MEXICO;     Or,   Fighting  the 

Mine  Swindlers. 

Goth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  500. 


Boys   of   the   Army   Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

These  books  breathe  the  life  and  spirit  of  the  United  States  Army 
of  to-day,  and  the  life,  just  as  it  is,  is  described  by  a  master  pen. 

1  UNCLE  SAM'S  BOYS  IN  THE  RANKS ;    Or,  Two  Recruits  in 

the  United  States  Army. 

2  UNCLE  SAM'S  BOYS  ON  FIELD  DUTY;    Or,  Winning  Cor- 

poral's Chevrons. 

3  UNCLE  SAM'S  BOYS  AS  SERGEANTS;    Or,  Handling  Their 

First  Real  Commands. 

4  UNCLE  SAM'S  BOYS  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES;    Or,  Follow- 

ing the  Flag  Against  the  Moros. 

(Other  volumes  to  follow  rapidly.) 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  500. 


Battleship    Boys    Series 

By  FRANK  GEE  PATCHIN 

These  stories  throb  with  the  life  of  young  Americans  on  to-day's 
huge  drab  Dreadnaughts. 

i     THE  BATTLESHIP  BOYS  AT  SEA;    Or,  Two  Apprentices  in 

Uncle  Sam's  Navy. 
s     THE    BATTLESHIP    BOYS     FIRST    STEP    UPWARD;     Or, 

Winning  Their  Grades  as  Petty  Officers. 

3  THE    BATTLESHIP    BOYS    IN    FOREIGN    SERVICE;    Or, 

Earning  New  Ratings  in  European  Seas. 

4  THE  BATTLESHIP  BOYS  IN  THE  TROPICS;    Or,  Uphold- 

ing the  American  Flag  in  a  Honduras  Revolution. 

(Other  volumes  to  follow  rapidly.) 
Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  SQC. 


The  Meadow-Brook  Girls  Series 

By  JANET  ALDRIDGE 

Real  live  stories  pulsing  with  the  vibrant  atmosphere  of  outdoor 
life. 

1  THE   MEADOW-BROOK  GIRLS  UNDER  CANVAS. 

2  THE   MEADOW-BROOK   GIRLS   ACROSS   COUNTRY. 

3  THE    MEADOW-BROOK    GIRLS   AFLOAT. 

4  THE   MEADOW-BROOK   GIRLS   IN   THE   HILLS. 

5  THE  MEADOW-BROOK   GIRLS   BY  THE   SEA. 

6  THE  MEADOW-BROOK  GIRLS  ON  THE  TENNIS   COURTS. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  50c. 


High    School    Boys    Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

In  this  series  of  bright,  crisp  books  a  new  note  has  been  struck. 
Boys  of  every  age  under  sixty  will  be  interested  in  these  fascinat- 
ing volumes. 

1  THE   HIGH    SCHOOL   FRESHMEN;     Or,   Dick  &  Co.'s  First 

Year  Pranks  and  Sports. 

2  THE    HIGH.   SCHOOL    PITCHER;     Or,    Dick    &    Co.    on    the 

Gridley  Diamond. 

3  THE  HIGH  SCHOOL  LEFT  END  ;    Or,  Dick  &  Co.  Grilling  on 

the  Football  Gridiron. 

4  THE  HIGH  SCHOOL  CAPTAIN  OF  THE  TEAM;    Or,  Dick  & 

•Co.  Leading  the  Athletic  Vanguard. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  500. 

Grammar   School    Boys    Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

This   series   of   stories,   based   on   the'   actual    doings   of   grammar 
school  boys,  comes  near  to  the  heart  of  the  average  American  boy. 

1  THE  GRAMMAR   SCHOOL  BOYS   OF  GRIDLEY;    Or,   Dick 

&  Co.  Start  Things  Moving. 

2  THE  GRAMMAR  SCHOOL  BOYS  SNOWBOUND;    Or,  Dick 

&  Co.  at  Winter  Sports. 

3  THE    GRAMMAR    SCHOOL    BOYS    IN    THE   WOODS ;     Or, 

Dick  &  Co.  Trail  Fun  and  Knowledge. 

4  THE  GRAMMAR  SCHOOL  BOYS  IN  SUMMER  ATHLETICS; 

Or,  Dick  &  Co.  Make  Their  Fame  Secure. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  5oc. 

High  School  Boys' Vacation  Series 

By  H.  IRVING  HANCOCK 

"Give  us  more  Dick  Prescott  books !" 

This  has  been  the  burden  of  the  cry  from  young  readers  of  the 
country  over.  Almost  numberless  letters  have  been  received  by  the 
publishers,  making  this  eager  demand ;  for  Dick  Prescott,  Dave  Dar- 
rin,  Tom  Reade,  and  the  other  members  of  Dick  &  Co.  are  the  most 
popular  high  school  boys  in  the  land.  Boys  will  alternately  thrill 
and  chuckle  when  reading  these  splendid  narratives. 
i  THE  HIGH  SCHOOL  BOYS'  CANOE  CLUB  ;  Or,  Dick  &  Co.'s 

Rivals  on  Lake  Pleasant. 

a     THE  HIGH   SCHOOL  BOYS  IN  SUMMER  CAMP;    Or,  The 
Dick  Prescott  Six  Training  for  the  Gridley  Eleven. 

3  THE  HIGH  SCHOOL  BOYS'  FISHING  TRIP;    Or,  Dick  &  Co. 

in  the  Wilderness. 

4  THE  HIGH  SCHOOL  BOYS'  TRAINING  HIKE;    Or,  Dick  & 

Co.  Making  Themselves  "Hard  as  Nails." 

Goth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  SOG. 


The   Circus    Boys   Series 

By  EDGAR  B.  P.  DARLINGTON 

Mf.  Darlington's  books  breathe  forth  every  phase  of  an  intensely 
interesting  and  exciting  life. 

1  THE  CIRCUS  BOYS  ON  THE  FLYING  RINGS;    Or,  Making 

the  Start  in  the  Sawdust  Life. 

2  THE  CIRCUS  BOYS  ACROSS  THE  CONTINENT;    Or,  Win- 

ning New  Laurels  on  the  Tanbark. 

3  THE    CIRCUS    BOYS    IN    DIXIE    LAND;     Or,    Winning    the 

Plaudits  of  the  Sunny  South. 

4  THE  CIRCUS  BOYS  ON  THE  MISSISSIPPI;    Or,  Afloat  with 

the  Big  Show  on  the  Big   River. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  500. 

The    High  School  Girls   Series 

By  JESSIE  GRAHAM  FLOWER,  A.  M. 

These!  breezy  stories  of  the  American  High  School  Girl  take  the 
reader  fairly  by  storm. 

1  GRACE  HARLOWE'S  PLEBE  YEAR  AT  HIGH  SCHOOL; 

Or,  The  Merry  Doings  of  the  Oakdale  Freshman  Girls. 

2  GRACE  HARLOWE'S   SOPHOMORE  YEAR  AT  HIGH 

SCHOOL;    Or,  The  Record  of  the  Girl  Chums  in  Work  and 
Athletics. 

3  GRACE  HARLOWE'S  JUNIOR  YEAR   AT   HIGH   SCHOOL; 

Or,  Fast  Friends  in  the  Sororities. 

4  GRACE   HARLOWE'S   SENIOR   YEAR  AT  HIGH   SCHOOL; 

Or,  The  Parting  of  the  Ways. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  500. 

The    Automobile    Girls    Series 

By  LAURA  DENT  CRANE 

No   girl's   library — no    family  book-case  can  be'^  considered   at   all 
complete  unless  it  contains  these  sparkling  twentieth-century  books. 

1  THE  AUTOMOBILE  GIRLS  AT  NEWPORT;  Or,  Watching  the  Sum- 
mer Parade.— 2  THE  AUTOMOBILE  GIRLS  IN  THE  BERKSHIRES; 
Or,  The  Ghost  of  Lost  Man's  Trail.— 3  THE  AUTOMOBILE  GIRLS 
ALONG  THE  HUDSON;  Or,  Fighting  Fire  in  Sleepy  Hollow.— 
4  THE  AUTOMOBILE  GIRLS  AT  CHICAGO;  Or,  Winning  Out 
Against  Heavy  Odds.— 5  THE  AUTOMOBILE  GIRLS  AT  PALM 
BEACH;  Or,  Proving  Their  Mettle  Under  Southern  Skies.— 6  THE 
AUTOMOBILE  GIRLS  AT  WASHINGTON;  Or,  Checkmating  the 
Plots  of  Foreign  Spies. 

Cloth,  Illustrated  Price,  per  Volume,  50c. 


JU 


MAY  1  9  1943